This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
Katz
Sets and Their Sizes
New York, New York
Fred M. Katz (fred@katz.com)
Logic & Light, Inc.
New York, NY 10028
USA
Sets and Their Sizes
Mathematics Subject Classiﬁcation (2001): 03E10, 54A25
c _1981, 2001 Fred M. Katz.
All rights reserved. This work may not be translated or copied in whole or in
part without the written permission of the publisher (Logic & Light, Inc. 400
East 84th Street, New York, NY 10028, USA), except for brief excerpts in con
nection with reviews or scholarly analysis.
The author hereby grants to M.I.T. permission to reproduce and distribute
copies of this thesis document in whole or in part.
Preface
Cantor’s theory of cardinality violates common sense. It says, for example, that
all inﬁnite sets of integers are the same size. This thesis criticizes the arguments
for Cantor’s theory and presents an alternative.
The alternative is based on a general theory, CS (for Class Size). CS
consists of all sentences in the ﬁrst order language with a subset predicate and a
lessthan predicate which are true in all interpretations of that language whose
domain is a ﬁnite power set. Thus, CS says that less than is a linear ordering
with highest and lowest members and that every set is larger than any of its
proper subsets. Because the language of CS is so restricted, CS will have inﬁnite
interpretations. In particular, the notion of oneone correspondence cannot
be expressed in this language, so Cantor’s deﬁnition of similarity will not be in
CS, even though it is true for all ﬁnite sets.
We show that CS is decidable but not ﬁnitely axiomatizable by characterizing
the complete extensions of CS. CS has ﬁnite completions, which are true only
in ﬁnite models and inﬁnite completions, which are true only in inﬁnite models.
An inﬁnite completion is determined by a set of remainder principles, which
say, for each natural number, n, how many atoms remain when the universe is
partitioned into n disjoint subsets of the same size.
We show that any inﬁnite completion of CS has a model over the power set
of the natural numbers which satisﬁes an additional axiom:
OUTPACING. If initial segments of A eventually become smaller
than the corresponding initial segments of B, then A is smaller than
B.
Models which satisfy OUTPACING seem to accord with common intuitions
about set size. In particular, they agree with the ordering suggested by the
notion of asymptotic density.
Acknowledgements
This dissertation has been made possible by Cantor — who invented set theory,
Tarski — who discovered model theory, Abraham Robinson — who introduced
modelcompleteness, and George Boolos — who made all of these subjects ac
cessible to me. Prof. Boolos read several handwritten versions and as many
typed versions of this thesis, with care and patience each time around. I owe
i
ii
him thanks for ﬁnding (and sometimes correcting) my errors, for directing me
to some useful literature, and simply for being interested. The reader should
join me in thanking him for his help with style and organization, and for his
insistence on ﬁlling in mere details. Nevertheless, whatever errors, gaps, or
infelicities remain are solely the responsibility of the author.
Note
Except for some minor wording changes, typographical corrections, and omis
sions of some elementary (but very long) proofs, this is the text of my disserta
tion.
This dissertation was submitted in partial fulﬁllment of the requirements for
the degree of Doctor of Philosophy at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
in April, 1981
It was certiﬁed and accepted by Prof. George Boolos, Thesis Supervisor and
Chairperson of the Department of Linguistics and Philosophy.
Fred M. Katz
June, 2001
Contents
Preface i
1 Introduction 1
1.1 The Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Cantor’s argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Cantor and the logicists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.4 Aims and outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 The General Theory 9
2.1 The Theory CORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Addition of Set Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3 A Formal Theory of Class Size 19
3.1 CS  The Theory of Class Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2 CA  Axioms for CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.3 Remarks on showing that CA axiomatizes CS . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4 The Pure Theory of Class Sizes 45
4.1 Size models and PCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2 Some models and theories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.3 PCA is model complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.4 Remarks on showing that PCA axiomatizes PCS . . . . . . . . . 61
5 Completeness of CA 63
5.1 Model completeness of CA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.2 Prime models for CA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6 Sets of Natural Numbers 83
6.1 The outpacing principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.2 Models of CS and Outpacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.3 Size and density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
iii
iv CONTENTS
Appendix 101
A Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
B Model Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
C Model Completeness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Bibliography 107
Index of Symbols 108
Index of Theories 110
Subject Index 112
1
Introduction
1.1 The Problem
This paper proposes a theory of set size which is based on intuitions, naive and
otherwise. The theory goes beyond intuitions, as theories will, so it needs both
justiﬁcation and defense. I spend very little time justifying the theory; it is so
clearly true that anyone who comes to the matter without prejudice will accept
it. I spend a lot of time defending the theory because no one who comes to the
matter comes without prejudice.
The prejudice stems from Cantor’s theory of set size, which is as old as sets
themselves and so widely held as to be worthy of the name the standard theory.
Cantor’s theory consists of just two principles:
ONEONE. Two sets are the same size just in case there is a one
one correspondence between them.
CANTOR
<
. A set, x, is smaller than a set, y, just in case x is the
same size as some subset of y, but not the same size as y itself.
A oneone correspondence between two sets is a relation which pairs each
member of either set with exactly one member of the other. For example, the
uppercase letters of the alphabet can be paired with the lowercase letters:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
So, the standard theory says, the set of uppercase letters is the same size
as the set of lowercase letters. Fine and good.
The standard theory also says that the set of even numbers is the same size
as the set of integers since these two sets can also be paired oﬀ onetoone:
. . . −n . . . −3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 . . . n . . .
. . . −2n . . . −6 −4 −2 0 2 4 6 . . . 2n . . .
1
2 1. INTRODUCTION
Similarly, the standard theory says that the set of positive even integers is
the same size as the set of prime numbers: pair the nth prime with the nth
positive even number. In both of these cases, common sense chokes on the
standard theory.
In the ﬁrst case, common sense holds that the set of integers is larger than
the set of even integers. The integers contain all of the even integers and then
some. So it’s just good common sense to believe there are more of the former
than the latter. This is just to say that common sense seems to follow:
SUBSET. If one set properly includes another, then the ﬁrst is
larger than the second.
even into the inﬁnite, where it comes up against the standard theory.
Common sense can make decisions without help from SUBSET. Though
the set of primes is not contained in the set of even integers, it is still clear to
common sense that the former is smaller than the latter. One out of every two
integers is even, while the prime numbers are few and far between. No doubt, to
use this reasoning, you need a little number theory in addition to common sense;
but, given the number theory, it’s the only conclusion common sense allows.
The theory proposed here accommodates these bits of common sense rea
soning. It maintains SUBSET and a few and far between principle and much
else besides. To state this theory, we use three twoplace predicates: <, ∼, and
>. If A and B name sets, then
• A < B is read as A is smaller than B,
• A ∼ B is read as A is the same size as B, and
• A > B is read as A is larger than B.
Incidentally, we assume throughout this thesis that the following schemata
are equivalent, item by item, to the readings of the three predicates given above,
assuming that A is the set of α’s and B is the set of β’s:
a. • There are fewer α’s than β’s.
• There are just as many α’s than β’s.
• There are more α’s than β’s.
b. • The number of α’s is less than the number of β’s.
• The number of α’s is the same as the number of β’s.
• The number of α’s is greater than the number of β’s.
c. • The size of A is smaller than the size of B.
• A and B are (or, have) the same size.
• The size of A is larger than the size of B.
1.2. CANTOR’S ARGUMENT 3
Regarding this last group, we emphasize that we are not arguing that there
really are such things as set sizes, nor that there are not really such things.
Statements about sizes can be translated in familiar and longwinded ways into
statements about sets, though we will not bother to do so.
I have identiﬁed the standard theory, Cantor’s, with two principles about set
size. The term size, however, is rarely used in connection with Cantor’s theory;
so it might be wondered whether the standard theory is really so standard. In
stating ONEONE and CANTOR
<
, Cantor used the terms power and cardinal
number rather than size. In the literature, the term cardinal number (some
times just number) is used most frequently. If someone introduces cardinal
number as a deﬁned predicate or as part of a contextual deﬁnition (e.g. “We
say that two sets have the same cardinal number just in case . . . ”), there is
no point in discussing whether that person is right about size.
Though Cantor’s theory is usually taken as a theory of set size, it can also
be taken as just a theory of oneone correspondences. More speciﬁcally, saying
that two sets are similar iﬀ they are in oneone correspondence can either be
taken as a claim about size or be regarded as a mere deﬁnition. Whether or
not similarity is coextensive with being the same size, the deﬁnition is worth
making. The relation picked out is well studied and well worth the study. The
technical brilliance of the theory attests to this: it has given us the transﬁnite
hierarchy, the continuum problem, and much else. In addition, the theory has
consequences which do not prima facie seem to have anything to do with size
or similarity: the existence of transcendental numbers comes to mind. All of
this is to say that the interest in oneone correspondence has not been sustained
solely by its identiﬁcation with the notion of size. Hence, denying that they are
the same does not endanger the theory of oneone correspondences, per se.
But most mathematicians and philosophers do not use cardinal number as
a mere abbreviation. They use the term in just the way that we use size and
slide freely among (A), (B), and (C). This is true, in particular, of Cantor, who
oﬀered ONEONE as a theory; indeed, he oﬀered an argument for this theory.
1.2 Cantor’s argument
Cantor bases his argument for ONEONE on the idea that the size of a set, it’s
cardinal number, depends on neither the particular elements it contains nor on
how those elements are arranged:
The cardinal number, [M[, of a set M (is the general concept which)
arises from M when we make abstraction of the nature of its elements
and of the order in which they are given. [Cantor, p.86]
But to say that the cardinal number of a set does not depend on certain things
is not to say what the cardinal is. Neither does it insure that two sets have
the same cardinal number just in case they are in oneone correspondence. To
ﬂesh out this notion of double abstraction, Cantor reduces it to a second ab
straction operator, one which works on the elements of sets rather than the sets
4 1. INTRODUCTION
themselves:
Every element, m, if we abstract from its nature becomes a unit.
[Cantor, p.86]
and so, concludes Cantor:
The cardinal number, [M[, is a set composed of units (which has
existence in our minds as an intellectual image or projection of M.)
[Cantor, p.86]
According to Jourdain, Cantor
distinguised very sharply between an aggregate and a cardinal num
ber that belongs to it: “Is not an aggregate an object outside us,
whereas its cardinal number is an abstract picture of it in our
mind.” [Cantor, p.80]
I have parenthesized the expressions above where Cantor describes cardinal
numbers as mental entities. Nevertheless, I can only make sense of his arguments
insofar as he treats cardinal numbers as sets: he refers to them as ‘deﬁnite
aggregates’, supposes that they have elements, and employs mappings between
cardinal numbers and other sets.
The following three statements seem to express Cantor’s intent:
[M[ = ¦ y [ ∃x ∈ M ∧ y = Abstract(x) ¦ (1.1)
∀x∃y(y = Abstract(x) ∧ Unit(y)) (1.2)
∀M∀y(y ∈ [M[ → Unit(y)) (1.3)
Abstract (x) is to be read as the result of abstracting from the element
x, Unit (x) as x is a unit, and [M[ as the cardinal number of M.
So (1.1) gives a deﬁnition of cardinal number, in terms of the operation of
abstraction, from which Cantor proves both ONEONEa and ONEONEb.
M ∼ N → [M[ = [N[ (ONEONEa)
[M[ = [N[ → M ∼ N (ONEONEb)
ONEONEa is true, says Cantor, because
the cardinal number [M[ remains unaltered if in the place of one
or many or even all elements m of M other things are substituted.
[Cantor, p.80]
and so, if f is a oneone mapping from M onto N, then in replacing each element,
m, of M with f(m)
M transforms into N without change of cardinal number. (p.88)
1.2. CANTOR’S ARGUMENT 5
In its weakest form, the principle Cantor cites says that if a single element of
M is replaced by an arbitrary element not in M then the cardinal number of
the set will remain the same. That is,
(1.4) (a ∈ M ∧ b / ∈ M)
∧ N = ¦ x [ (x ∈ M ∧ x / ∈ a) ∨ x ∈ b ¦
→ [M[ = [N[
The reasoning is clear: so far as the cardinal number of a set is concerned, one
element is much the same as another. It is not the elements of a set, but only
their abstractions, that enter into the cardinal number of a set. But abstractions
of elements are just units; so one is much the same as another.
ONEONEb is true, Cantor says, because
. . . [M[ grows, so to speak, out of M in such a way that from every
element m of M a special unit of [M[ arises. Thus we can say that
M ∼ [M[.
So, since a set is similar to its cardinal number, and similarity is an equivalence
relation, two sets with same cardinal number are similar. Unless each element
of a set abstracts to a ‘special’, i.e. distinct, unit, the correspondence from M
to its cardinal number will be manyone and not oneone. A weak version of
this principle is:
M = ¦a, b¦ ∧ a ,= b
→ [M[ = ¦Abstract(a), Abstract(b)¦
∧ Abstract(a) ,= Abstract(b)
(1.5)
These two arguments do one another in. (1.4) says that replacing an element
of a set with any element not in the set does not aﬀect the cardinality. But, by
the deﬁnition of [M[, (1.1), this means that
(1.6) ∀x∀y(Abstract(x) = Abstract(y))
For, consider an arbitrary pair of elements, a and b. Let M = ¦a¦ and let
N = ¦b¦. So, the conditions of (1.4) are met and [M[ = [N[. But [M[ =
¦Abstract(a)¦ and [N[ = ¦Abstract(b)¦, by (1.1). So Abstract(a) = Abstract(b).
Generalizing this argument yields (1.6).
So Cantor’s argument for ONEONEa only works by assigning all non
empty sets the same, onemembered, cardinal number. But, this contradicts
ONEONEb.
Conversely, the argument that a set is similar to its cardinal number relies
on (1.5), which entails
(1.7) ∀x∀y(x ,= y → Abstract(x) ,= Abstract(y))
6 1. INTRODUCTION
assuming only that any two objects can constitute a set. But if the abstractions
of any two elements are distinct, then no two sets have the same cardinal number
as deﬁned by (1.1), contra ONEONEa.
There is no way to repair Cantor’s argument. Rather than leading to a
justiﬁcation of ONEONE, Cantor’s deﬁnition of cardinal number is suﬃcient
to refute the principle. The negation of (1.6) is:
(1.8) ∃x∃y(Abstract(x) ,= Abstract(y))
So one of (1.6) and (1.8) must be true. We have shown that (1.6) contradicts
ONEONEb. Similarly, (1.8) contradicts ONEONEa; if a and b have distinct
abstractions, then ¦a¦ and ¦b¦ have distinct cardinal numbers, ¦Abstract(a)¦
and ¦Abstract(b)¦, despite the fact that they are in oneone correspondence. So
ONEONE is false whether (1.6) or its negation, (1.8), is true.
1.3 Cantor and the logicists
Though both Frege and Russell accepted Cantor’s theory of cardinality, neither
accepted Cantor’s argument. Frege spends an entire chapter of the Grundlagen
mocking mathematicians from Euclid to Schroder for deﬁning numbers as sets
of units. He neatly summarizes the diﬃculty with such views:
If we try to produce the number by putting together diﬀerent dis
tinct objects, the result is an agglomeration in which the objects
remain still in possession of precisely those properties which serve to
distinguish them from one another, and that is not the number. But
if we try to do it in the other way, by putting together identicals,
the result runs perpetually together into one and we never reach a
plurality . . .
The word ‘unit’ is admirably adapted to conceal the diﬃculty . . . We
start by calling the things to be numbered ‘units’ without detracting
from their diversity; then subsequently the concept of putting to
gether (or collecting, or uniting, or annexing, or whatever we choose
to call it) transforms itself into arithmetical addition, while the con
cept word ‘unit’ changes unperceived into the proper name ‘one’.
[Frege, pp 5051]
These misgivings about units do not prevent Frege from basing his deﬁnition
of ‘number’ and his entire reduction of arithmetic on Cantor’s notion of one
one correspondence. “This opinion”, says Frege, “that numerical equality or
identiy must be deﬁned in terms of oneone correlation, seems in recent years to
have gained widespread acceptance among mathematicians” [Frege, pp. 7374].
Frege cites Schroder, Kossak, and Cantor.
Russell displays similar caution about Cantor’s argument [Russell, p.305] and
similar enthusiasm for his theory (see the quote at the beginning of Chapter 2,
for example.)
1.4. AIMS AND OUTLINE 7
Of course, Frege and Russell cleaned up Cantor’s presentation of the theory.
Russell, for example, notes that Cantor’s statement (1) is not a ‘true deﬁnition’
and
merely presupposes that every collection has some such property as
that indicated — a property, that is to say, independent of its terms
and their order; depending, we might feel tempted to add, only upon
their number. [Russell, pp. 304305]
So Russell, and similarly Frege, relied upon the principle of abstraction to obtain
a ‘formal deﬁnition’ of cardinal numbers, in contrast to Cantor, who had “taken”
number “to be a primitive idea” and had to rely on “the primitive proposition
that every collection has a number.” [Russell, p.305]
So, while some people regard Cantor’s ONEONE as just a deﬁnition and
others embrace it as a theory, the logicists have it both ways: adding ONEONE
as a formal deﬁnition to set theory (or, as they would call it, logic) they have no
obligation to defend it and can steer clear of peculiar arguments about units; at
the same time, they can advance it as a great lesson for simple common sense.
The logicists’ adoption of Cantor’s theory of cardinality needs no great ex
planation: it came with set theory and, to a large extent, motivated set theory
and determined its research problems. But there are two speciﬁc reasons that
they should have seized upon ONEONE and CANTOR
<
. First, they both
have the form of deﬁnitions, no matter how they are intended. So the notion of
cardinality is born reduced.
Second, Cantor’s theory clears the way for other reductions. Suppose, for
example, you wish to reduce ordered pairs to sets. Well, you have to identify
each ordered pair with a set and deﬁne the relevant properties and relations
among ordered pairs in terms of properties and relations among sets. One
of the relations that has to be maintained is identity; so each ordered pair
must be identiﬁed with a distinct set. In addition, the relative sizes of sets of
ordered pairs should be preserved under translation. But, if ONEONE is the
correct theory of size, then this second condition follows from the ﬁrst, since the
existence of oneone correspondences will be preserved under a oneone mapping.
1.4 Aims and outline
It would be naive to suppose that people’s faith in Cantor’s theory would be
shaken either by refuting speciﬁc arguments for ONEONE or by associating the
acceptance of that theory with a discredited philosophy of mathematics. Such
points may be interesting, but in the absence of an alternative theory of size
they are less than convincing.
This dissertation presents such an alternative. Chapter 2 canvasses common
sense intuitions for some basic principles about set size. Chapter 3 reorganizes
those principles into a tidy set of axioms, oﬀers an account of where the intu
itions come from (viz. known facts about ﬁnite sets), and mines this source for
additional principles. Chapters 4 and 5 prove that the theory so obtained is
8 1. INTRODUCTION
complete, in the sense that it embraces all facts about ﬁnite sets of a certain
kind (i.e. expressible in a particular language). Finally, Chapter 6 elaborates
additional principles that concern only sets of natural numbers and demon
strates that these additional principles, together with the theory in Chapter 3,
are satisﬁable in the domain of sets of natural numbers.
2
The General Theory
The possibility that whole and part may have the same number of
terms is, it must be confessed, shocking to common sense . . . Common
sense, therefore, is here in a very sorry plight; it must choose between
the paradox of Zeno and the paradox of Cantor. I do not propose
to help it, since I consider that, in the face of the proofs, it ought to
commit suicide in despair. [Russell, p. 358]
Is common sense confused about set size, as Russell says, or is there a way
of elaborating on common sense to get a plausible and reasonably adequate
theory of cardinality? To be plausible, a theory should at least avoid principles
and consequences which violate common sense. To be reasonably adequate, a
theory has to go beyond bare intuitions: it should not rest with trivialities and
it should answer as many questions about set size as possible, though it need
not be complete. Plausibility and adequacy are conﬂicting demands: the ﬁrst
says that there should not be too many principles (no false ones, consistency),
the second that there should not be too few principles.
In the Introduction, I argued that a coherent theory of cardinality has to
contain some principles that refer to the kinds of objects in sets, pace Cantor. In
this chapter, however, I want to see how far we can go without such principles;
i.e. how much can you say about smaller than without using predicates (other
than identity) which relate the members of the sets being compared? I shall
begin by stating a number of principles and explaining why they are included
in the general theory.
2.1 The Theory CORE
First, there is the SUBSET principle:
SUBSET. If x is a proper subset of y, then x is smaller than y.
The reason for including SUBSET should be obvious. What has prompted the
search for an alternative to the standard theory of cardinality is the conﬂict
9
10 2. THE GENERAL THEORY
between ONEONE and SUBSET. Now, it is often said that common sense
supports both of these principles and that it is in doing so that common sense
is confused. From this it is supposed to follow that common sense cannot be
relied upon, so we should opt for ONEONE,with the technical attractions that
it provides.
But, there’s a diﬀerence in the way that common sense supports these two
principles. There is no doubt that you can lead an unsuspecting person to
agree to ONEONE by focusing their attention on forks and knives, husbands
and wives, and so forth: i.e. ﬁnite sets. With carefully chosen examples, say
the odds and the evens, you might even convince someone that ONEONE is
true for inﬁnite sets, too. Now, I do not think that such guile is needed to
lead someone to agree to SUBSET, but that’s not what my argument depends
on. The argument hinges on a suggestion about how to resolve cases where
mathematical intuitions seem to conﬂict. The suggestion is to see what happens
with particular cases on which the principles conﬂict before you’ve lead someone
to agree to either of the general statements.
So, if you want to ﬁnd out what common sense really thinks about SUBSET
and ONEONE, you would present people with pairs of inﬁnite sets, where one
was a proper subset of the other. I’ve actually tried this, in an unscientiﬁc way,
and what I’ve gotten, by and large, is what I expected: support for SUBSET.
(By and large because many people think that all inﬁnite sets have the same
size: Inﬁnity.)
Naturally, I would not venture that this sort of technique, asking people, is
any way to ﬁnd out which of SUBSET and ONEONE is true. People’s intu
itions about mathematics are notoriously unreliable, not to mention inconstant.
Of course, harping on this fact might engender some unwarranted skepticism
about mathematics. What I am suggesting is that there might be a rational
way of studying mathematical intuitions and that we should at least explore
this possibility before proclaiming common sense to be hopelessly confused on
mathematical matters.
So, SUBSET, all by itself seems to be a plausible alternative to Cantor’s
theory. though it surely is not enough. Given just this principle, it’s possible
that one set is smaller than another just in case it is a proper subset of the
other. It’s clear that we need additional principles. All of the following seem
worthy (where x < y is to be read as x is smaller than y, x ∼ y is to be read
as x is the same size as y, x > y as x is larger than y. The Appendix gives
a full account of the notations used throughout this thesis.)
2.1. THE THEORY CORE 11
Theory 2.1.1. QUASILOGICAL
x < y → y < x (ASYM
<
)
x > y → y > x (ASYM
>
)
(x < y ∧ y < z) → x < z (TRANS
<
)
(x > y ∧ y > z) → x > z (TRANS
>
)
x ∼ y → Indisc(x, y) (INDISC
∼
)
x ∼ x (REF
∼
)
x ∼ y → y ∼ x (SYM
∼
)
(x ∼ y ∧ y ∼ z) → x ∼ z (TRANS
∼
)
x > y ↔ y < x (DEF
>
)
where Indisc(x, y) abbreviates ∀z((z < x ↔ z < y) ∧ (z > x ↔ z > y))
We call the principles listed above quasilogical principles because it is
tempting to defend them as logical truths. Consider the ﬁrst principle, for
example, in unregimented English:
ASYM
<
. If x is smaller than y, then y is not smaller than x.
This sentence can be regarded as an instance of the schema:
ASYM
F
. If x is Fer than y, then y is not Fer than x.
where F is to be replaced by an adjective from which comparatives can be
formed, e.g. ‘tall’, ‘short’, ‘happy’, but not ‘unique’ or ‘brick’. It appears that
every instance of this schema is true, so it could be maintained that each is true
in virtue of its form, that each is a logical truth.
The other principles might be defended in the same way, though the schema
for INDISC
∼
would have to be restricted to triples of corresponding compara
tives, for example: is smaller than, is larger than, is the same size as.
But using such observations to support these principles would be problematic
for two reasons. First, it would require taking positions on many questions
about logical form and grammatical form which would take us far aﬁeld and,
possibly, antagonize ﬁrstorder logicians. Second, there are some instances of
the schemata that make for embarassing counterexamples: ‘further east than’
(in a round world) and ‘earlier than’ (in, I’m told, a possible world).
So, it might be that casting the principles above as instances of the appro
priate schema would only explain why they are part of common sense. What
remains clear is that a theory of cardinality which openly denied any of these
principles would be implausible: it would be ridiculed by common sense and
mathematical sophisticates alike. I can just barely imagine presenting a theory
which, for fear of inconsistency, withheld judgment on one or more of these
principles. But to do so without good reason would be counterproductive. It
seems that if a case could be made that these statements, taken together, are
inconsistent with SUBSET, that would be good reason to say that there is no
12 2. THE GENERAL THEORY
reasonably adequate alternative to Cantor’s theory. Since my goal is to counter
such a conclusion, it seems that the proper strategy is to include such seemingly
obvious truths and to show that the resulting theory is consistent. So the strat
egy here is not to adduce principles and argue for the truth of each. This would
be impossible, given that the principles are logically contingent. Instead, our
approach is to canonize what common sense holds to be true about cardinality
and show that the result is consistent and reasonably adequate.
As long as we restrict ourselves to SUBSET and the quasilogical principles,
consistency is no problem. After all, what do the quasilogical principles say?
Only that smaller than is a partial ordering, the larger than is the converse
partial ordering, that the same size as is an equivalence relation, and that
sets of the same size are indiscernible under the partial orderings. So, if we
are given any domain of sets, ﬁnite or inﬁnite, we get a model for our theory
by assigning to < the relation of being a proper subset of, assigning to > the
relation of properly including, and assigning to ∼ the identity relation. Since
common sense knows that diﬀerent sets can be the same size, there must be
some additional principles to be extracted from common sense.
We shall now consider some principles which cannot be regarded as quasi
logical.
First, there is the principle of trichotomy.
(TRICH) x < y ∨ x ∼ y ∨ x > y
which says that any two sets are comparable in size. While a theory of set size
which excluded TRICH might escape ridicule, it would surely be regarded with
suspicion. Indeed, if the principles of common sense were incompatible with
TRICH, this would undoubtedly be used to discredit them.
Second, there is the representation principle.
(REP
<
) x < y → ∃x
(x
∼ x ∧ x
⊂ y)
which says that if a set, x, is smaller than another, y, then x is the same size
as some proper subset of y. Now, this is a principle which common sense has
no particular feelings about. Analogous statements about physical objects are
neither intuitive nor very clearly true. For example, (1) does not stand a chance
of being regarded as true:
(1) If one table is smaller than another, then the ﬁrst is the same
size as some proper part of the second.
if ‘part’ is taken to mean ‘leg or top or rim or ...’. Even if common sense can
be persuaded to take particles and arbitrary fusions of such as parts of tables,
no one should condemn its residual caution about (1). If REP
<
is true, then it
seems to be an interesting and special fact about sets.
REP
<
was originally included in this theory for technical reasons; it makes
it easier to reduce the set of axioms already presented and it provides a basis for
several principles not yet presented. REP
<
may be open to doubt, but it is not
2.1. THE THEORY CORE 13
a principle that Cantorians could complain about, for it is entailed by Cantor’s
deﬁnition of <:
(CANTOR
<
) x < y ↔ (x ∼ y) ∧ ∃x
(x
∼ x ∧ x
⊂ y)
If CANTOR
<
is regarded as a principle instead of a deﬁnition, then it is entailed
by the principles we have already mentioned:
If x < y, then (x ∼ y), by INDISC
∼
and ASYM
<
. By REP
<
,
some proper subset of y, say x
, must be the same size as x. But
x
< y, by SUBSET: so x < y
, by INDISC
∼
.
Conversely, if x
∼ x and x
⊂ y, then x
< y, by SUBSET. So
x < y, by INDISC
∼
.
There are more principles to come, but before proceeding, I’d like to take stock
of what we already have. First, I want to reduce the principles mentioned above
to a tidy set of axioms. Second, I want to estimate how far we’ve gone.
The entire set of principles already adopted are equivalent to the following,
which will be referred to as the core theory.
Theory 2.1.2. CORE, the core theory,
x ⊂ y → x < y (SUBSET)
x ∼ y ↔ Indisc(x, y) (DEF
∼
)
(x ∼ y ∧ y ∼ z) → x ∼ z (TRANS
∼
)
x > y ↔ y < x (DEF
>
)
(x < x) (IRREF
<
)
x < y ∨ x ∼ y ∨ x > y (TRICH)
The only axiom in CORE that has not already been introduced is DEF
∼
,
which is logically equivalent to the conjunction of INDISC
∼
and its converse
∼
INDISC:
x ∼ y → Indisc(x, y) (INDISC
∼
)
Indisc(x, y) → x ∼ y (
∼
INDISC)
∼
INDISC says that if two sets fail to be the same size, then their being diﬀerent
in size is attributable to the existence of some set which is either smaller than
one but not smaller than the other, or larger than one but not larger than the
other.
Theorem 2.1.3. Let T = QUASI; SUBSET; REP
<
. Then T ≡ CORE.
Proof.
¬ T ¬ CORE. We only need to show that
∼
INDISC is entailed by T.
Suppose (x ∼ y). So x < y or y < x, by TRICH. But (x < x) and
(y < y), by IRREF
<
.
14 2. THE GENERAL THEORY
¬ CORE ¬ T
(i) TRANS
<
. If y < z, there is a y
such that y
∼ y and y
⊂ z by
REP
<
. If x < y, then x < y
because y
∼ y, by DEF
∼
. So, there
is an x
such that x
∼ x and x
⊂ y
. So x
⊂ z and, by SUBSET,
x
< z. But then x < z by DEF
∼
.
(ii) ASYM
<
. If x < y and y < x, then x < x, by TRANS
<
, contra
IRREF
<
.
(iii) TRANS
>
, ASYM
>
, and IRREF
>
follow from the corresponding
principles for < and DEF
>
.
(iv) INDISC
∼
, SYM
∼
, TRANS
∼
, and REF
∼
are logical consequences of
DEF
∼
.
CORE is consistent. In fact, two kinds of models satisfy CORE.
Deﬁnition 2.1.4.
a. / is a ﬁnite class model with basis x iﬀ
(i)
˙
/ = T(x), where x is ﬁnite.
(ii) / a ⊂ b iﬀ a ⊂ b
(iii) / a < b iﬀ [a[ < [b[
b. / is a ﬁnite set model iﬀ
(i)
˙
/ = ¦ x [ x is a ﬁnite subset of Y ¦, for some inﬁnite Y .
(ii) / a ⊂ b iﬀ a ⊂ b
(iii) / a < b iﬀ [a[ < [b[
Models can be speciﬁed by stipulation the smaller than relation since larger
than and same size as are deﬁned in terms of smaller than.
Fact 2.1.5.
a. If / is a ﬁnite class model, then / CORE.
b. If / is a ﬁnite set model, then / CORE.
Proof. In both cases, the ﬁnite cardinalities determine a quasilinear ordering
of the sets in which any set is higher than any of its proper subsets.
The normal ordering of ﬁnite sets is, in fact, the only one that satisﬁes
CORE. By adding TRICH we have ruled out all nonstandard interpretations
of <.
Theorem 2.1.6. Suppose that / is a model such that
2.1. THE THEORY CORE 15
a. If x ∈
˙
/, then x is ﬁnite,
b. If x ∈
˙
/ and y ⊂ x, then y ∈
˙
/, and
c. / CORE.
Then / a < b iﬀ [a[ < [b[
Proof. We shall prove (*) by induction on n:
If [a[ = n, then / (a ∼ b) iﬀ [b[ = n (*)
Suppose n = 0
then a = ∅
But if [b[ = 0
then / (a ∼ b) by REF
∼
And if [b[ , = 0
then a ⊂ b
So / (a < b) by SUBSET
So / (a ∼ b) by INDISC
∼
Now, suppose that (*) is true for all i ≤ n:
If [a[ = [b[ = n + 1
then / (a ∼ b), as follows:
Suppose / (a < b)
So / (a
∼ a) for some a
⊂ b by REP
<
But if / a
⊂ b
then [a
[ ≤ n
So [a[ ≤ n by (*), contra our hypothesis.
But if [a[ = n + 1
and / (a ∼ b)
then [b[ ≥ n + 1 by induction.
But if [b[ > n + 1
pick b
⊂ b, b
∈ A,
with [b
[ = n + 1 by condition (b)
So / (b
< b) by SUBSET
and / (b
∼ a)
So / (a < b) contra our supposition.
So [b[ = n + 1
16 2. THE GENERAL THEORY
2.2 Addition of Set Sizes
We shall now extend CORE to an account of addition of set sizes. Since the
domains of our intended models contain only sets and not sizes of sets, we have
to formulate our principles in terms of a threeplace predicate true of triples of
sets: Sum (x, y, z) is to be read as the size of z is the sum of the sizes of x
and y .
The following principles are suﬃcient for a theory of addition:
Theory 2.2.1. Addition
Functionality of addition
Sum(x, y, z) → (x ∼ x
↔ Sum(x
, y, z) (a)
Sum(x, y, z) → (y ∼ y
↔ Sum(x, y
, z) (b)
Sum(x, y, z) → (z ∼ z
↔ Sum(x, y, z
) (c)
Addition for disjoint sets
x ∩ y = ∅ → Sum(x, y, x ∪ y) (DISJ
+
)
Monotonicity of Addition
Sum(x, y, z) → x < z ∨ x ∼ z (MONOT)
FUNC
+
says that sets bear Sum relations to one another by virtue of their
sizes alone. This condition must clearly be met if Sum is to be read as speciﬁed
above.
DISJ
+
tries to say what function on sizes the Sum relation captures by ﬁxing
the function on paradigm cases: disjoint sets. But FUNC
+
and DISJ
+
leave
open the possibility that addition is cyclic: suppose we begin with a ﬁnite class
model whose basis has n elements and assign to Sum those triples ¸x, y, z) where
[z[ = ([x[ +[y[) mod (n + 1)
Both FUNC
+
and DISJ
+
will be satisﬁed, though the interpretation of Sum does
not agree with the intended reading. MONOT rules out such interpretations.
Given an interpretation of ’<’ over a power set there is at most one way
of interpreting Sum which satisﬁes ADDITION. We shall show this by proving
that ADDITION and CORE entail DEF
+
:
(DEF
+
) Sum(x, y, z) ↔
∃x
∃y
(x ∼ x
∧ y ∼ y
∧ x
∩ y
= ∅ ∧ x
∪ y
= z)
DEF
+
says that the extension of Sum is determined by the extension of <.
2.2. ADDITION OF SET SIZES 17
A model of CORE must satisfy an additional principle, DISJ
∪
, if Sum is to
be interpreted in a way compatible with ADDITION,
(DISJ
∪
) (x ∼ x
∧ y ∼ y
∧ x ∩ y = ∅ ∧ x
∩ y
= ∅)
→ (x ∪ y) ∼ (x
∪ y
)
(Note: The proofs in this chapter will use boolean principles freely, despite the
fact that we have not yet introduced them.)
Theorem 2.2.2. CORE + ADDITION ¬ DISJ
∪
Proof.
Suppose (x ∼ x
∧ y ∼ y
∧ x ∩ y = ∅ ∧ x
∩ y
= ∅)
then Sum(x, y, x ∪ y)
and Sum(x
, y
, x
∪ y
) by DISJ
+
So Sum(x
, y, x ∪ y) by FUNC
+
(a)
So Sum(x
, y
, x ∪ y) by FUNC
+
(b)
So x ∪ y ∼ x
∪ y
by FUNC
+
(c)
If the minimal conditions on addition are to be satisﬁed in a model of CORE,
then Sum has to be deﬁnable by DEF
+
.
Theorem 2.2.3. CORE + ADDITION ¬ DEF
+
Proof. (⇒)
Suppose Sum(x, y, z)
So x < z ∨ x ∼ z by MONOT
But if x ∼ z,
Let x
= z
and y
= ∅;
then Sum(x
, y
, z) by DISJ
+
So Sum(x, y
, z) by FUNC
+
(a)
So y
∼ y by FUNC
+
(b)
And if x < z
pick x
⊂ z
with x
∼ x by REP
<
.
Let y
= z −x
But y
∼ y, as before.
18 2. THE GENERAL THEORY
(⇐)
Suppose (x ∼ x
∧ y ∼ y
∧ x
∩ y
= ∅ ∧ x
∪ y
= z)
then Sum(x
, y
, z) by DISJ
+
So Sum(x, y
, z) by FUNC
+
(a)
So Sum(x, y, z) by FUNC
+
(b)
Theory 2.2.4. EXCORE, the extended core, is CORE ∪ ADDITION.
Fact 2.2.5. The following are consequences of EXCORE:
x ∩ y
1
= x ∩ y
2
= ∅ ∧ y
1
∼ y
2
→ x ∪ y
1
∼ x ∪ y
2
x ∩ y
1
= x ∩ y
2
= ∅ ∧ y
1
< y
2
→ x ∪ y
1
< x ∪ y
2
x
1
∩ y
1
= x
1
∩ y
2
= ∅ ∧ x
1
∼ x
2
∧ y
1
< y
2
→ x
1
∪ y
1
< x
2
∪ y
2
x ⊂ z ∧ y ⊂ z ∧ x < y → (z −y) < (z −x)
x ⊂ z ∧ y ⊂ z ∧ x ∼ y → (z −y) ∼ (z −x)
x < y → ∃y
(y
∼ y ∧ x ⊂ y
)
x ∼ y → x −(x ∩ y) ∼ y −(x ∩ y)
x < y → x −(x ∩ y) < y −(x ∩ y)
Proof. The proofs are elementary.
3
A Formal Theory of Class
Size
In the preceding chapter, we searched for principles that accord with pre
Cantorian ideas about sizes of sets. We produced several such principles, consti
tuting EXCORE, and found two kinds of interpretations which satisﬁed these
principles. In one case, the domains of the interpretations were ﬁnite power
sets. In the other case, the domains consisted of all ﬁnite subsets of a given
inﬁnite set. Insofar as both kinds of interpretation have quantiﬁers ranging over
ﬁnite sets, we may say that they demonstrate that EXCORE is true when it is
construed as being about ﬁnite sets.
Our goal is to show that this general theory of set size can be maintained for
inﬁnite sets as well as for ﬁnite sets. We shall show this by constructing a model
for the general theory whose domain is the power set of the natural numbers.
But the ability to construct such a model is interesting only to the extent that
the general theory it satisﬁes is reasonably adequate. Suppose, for example, that
we oﬀered as a general theory of size the axioms of CORE other than REP
<
.
Call this theory T. So T just says that smaller than is a quasilinear ordering
which extends the partial ordering given by the proper subset relation. Since
any partial ordering can be extended to a quasilinear ordering, T has a model
over T(N). But unless we have a guarantee that the model constructed will
satisfy, say, DISJ
∪
, the existence of the model does not rule out the possibility
that T is incompatible with DISJ
∪
. For a particular principle, φ, in this case
DISJ
∪
, we may take one of three tacks: (1) add φ to T, obtaining T
, and show
that T
has a model over T(N); (2) show that φ is inconsistent with T and argue
that T is somehow more fundamental or more intuitive than φ; (3) acquiesce
in ignorance of whether T and φ are compatible and argue that if they are
incompatible, then T should be maintained anyway.
Below, we deal with DISJ
∪
as in (1), since DISJ
∪
is in EXCORE. Cantor’s
principle ONEONE is dealt with as in case (2). It seems futile to try to rule
out the need to resort to the third approach for any cases at all, but we can
19
20 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
reduce this need to the extent that we include in our general theory, T, as many
plausible statements as possible.
We cannot construct T by taking all statements which are true for ﬁnite
sets. Not only is ONEONE such a statement, but using the notion of all
statements true for ﬁnite sets presupposes that we have some idea of the
range of all statements. To avoid the problems involved in speaking of all
statements, we might instead settle for all statements in L, where L is some
judiciously chosen language. To avoid ONEONE, T must fall short of the full
expressive power of the language of set theory.
Consider, now, the axioms in EXCORE. Other than size relations, these
axioms involve only boolean operations and inclusion relations among sets. They
do not use the notions ordered pair, relation, or function. In short, the only set
theory implicit in these axioms is boolean algebra, or a sort of Venn diagram
set theory. This is not to say the axioms do not apply to relations, functions,
or other sets of ordered pairs, but only that they do not refer to these sorts of
objects as such.
In the next section, we deﬁne a language just strong enough to express
EXCORE. We then construct a theory by taking all statements in that lan
guage which are true over all ﬁnite power sets. By drawing statements only from
this relatively weak language, we arrive at a theory which can be satisﬁed over
inﬁnite power sets. But, since we include in the language all statements of the
language which are true over any ﬁnite power set, we know that no statement in
that language can arise as something which ought to be true over inﬁnite power
sets but might be incompatible with our theory.
There remains the possibility that we could follow the same strategy with a
more expressive language, though it would have to remain less expressive that
the full language of set theory. In fact, such a language can be obtained by
including a notion of the product of set sizes. This in turn opens the possibility
of a succession of richer languages and a corresponding succession of stronger
theories of size. At this point, the possible existence of any such hierarchy is
sheer speculation; we mention it only to emphasize that no claim is made here
that we have the strongest possible general theory of set size.
3.1 CS  The Theory of Class Size
The theories discussed in this paper will be formulated within ﬁrst order predi
cate logic with identity. To specify the language in which a theory is expressed,
then, we need only list the individual constants, predicates, and operation sym
bols of the language and stipulate the rank, or number of argument places, for
each predicate and each operation symbol.
Deﬁnition 3.1.1.
a. L
C
, L
C
, the language of classes, is the ﬁrst order language with
individual constants ∅ and I, the oneplace predicate, Atom, the two
3.1. CS  THE THEORY OF CLASS SIZE 21
place predicate ⊂, and the two place operation symbols, −, ∩, and
∪.
b. L
<
, the language of size,, is the ﬁrst order language with the one
place predicate Unit, the twoplace predicates < and ⊂, and the three
place predicate Sum.
c. L
C<
, the language of class size, is the ﬁrst order language contain
ing just the nonlogical constants in L
C
and L
<
.
Following the strategy outlined above, we deﬁne the theory of class size in
terms of interpretations of L
C<
over ﬁnite power sets.
Deﬁnition 3.1.2.
a. If L
C
⊂ L, then / is a standard interpretation of L iﬀ
(i)
˙
/ = T(x), for some x, and
(ii) / assigns the usual interpretations to all constants of L
C
:
/(I) = x,
/(∅) = ∅,
/ a ⊂ b iﬀ a ⊂ b
b. If / is a standard interpretation and
˙
/ = T(x), then x is the basis
of /, B(/).
Deﬁnition 3.1.3. / is a standard ﬁnite interpretation of L
C<
iﬀ
a. / is a standard interpretation of L
C<
,
b. / has a ﬁnite basis, and
c.
/ a < b iﬀ [a[ < [b[,
/ a ∼ b iﬀ [a[ = [b[, and
/ Unit(a) iﬀ [a[ = 1
Deﬁnition 3.1.4. CS, the theory of class size, is the set of all sentences
of L
C<
which are true in all standard ﬁnite interpretations of L
C<
.
By drawing only on principles which can be stated in L
C<
we have at least
ruled out the most obvious danger of paradox. Since the notion of oneto
one correspondence cannot be expressed in this language, Cantor’s principle
ONEONE will not be included in the theory CS, even though it is true over
any ﬁnite power set.
22 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
Since CS has arbitarily large ﬁnite models, it has inﬁnite models. It is not
obvious that CS has standard inﬁnite models, in which the universe is an inﬁnite
power set. In Chapter 6 we show that such models do exist.
The present chapter is devoted to getting a clearer picture of the theory CS.
Section 2 develops a set of axioms, CA, for CS. Section 3 outlines the proof
that CA does indeed axiomatize CS. This proof is presented in Chaper 5, after
a slight detour in Chapter 4.
3.2 CA  Axioms for CS
Here we shall develop a set of axioms, CA, for the theory CS. This will be done
in several stages.
3.2.1 BA Axioms for atomic boolean algebra
We’ll begin with the obvious. Since all of the universes of the interpretations
mentioned in the deﬁnition of CS are power sets, they must be atomic boolean
algebras and, so, must satisfy BA:
Deﬁnition 3.2.1. BA, the theory of atomic boolean algebras, is the
theory consisting of the following axioms:
x ∪ y = y ∪ x
x ∩ y = y ∩ x
x ∪ (y ∪ z) = (x ∪ y) ∪ z)
x ∩ (y ∩ z) = (x ∩ y) ∩ z)
x ∩ (y ∪ z) = (x ∩ y) ∪ (y ∩ z)
x ∪ (y ∩ z) = (x ∪ y) ∩ (y ∪ z)
x ∩ (I −x) = ∅
x ∪ (I −x) = I
x ⊂ y ↔ (x ∪ y) = y ∧ x ,= y
Atom(x) ↔ (∀y)(y ⊂ x → y = ∅)
x ,= ∅ → (∃y)(Atom(y) ∧ (y ⊂ x ∨ y = x)
These axioms are adapted from [Monk, Def 9.3, p. 141 and Def. 9.28, p.
151].
BA is clearly not a complete axiomatization of CS, since BA does not in
volve any size notions. But BA does entail all the sentences in CS which do
not themselves involve size notions. To show this we need to draw on some
established facts about the complete extensions of BA (in the language L
C
).
The key idea here is that complete extensions of BA can be obtained either by
stipulating the ﬁnite number of atoms in a model or by saying that there are
inﬁnitely many atoms.
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS 23
Deﬁnition 3.2.2. For n ≥ 1,
a. ATLEAST
n
is a sentence which says that there are at least n atoms:
∃x
1
...∃x
n
(Atom(x
1
) ∧ ... ∧ Atom(x
n
) ∧ ¦ x
i
,= x
j
[ 0 < i < j ≤ n¦)
b. EXACTLY
n
is a sentence which says that there are exactly n atoms:
ATLEAST
n
∧ ATLEAST
n+1
c. INF is a set of sentences which is satisﬁed in all and only inﬁnite
models of BA:
INF = ¦ ATLEAST
n
[ n > 1 ¦
d. BA
n
= BA; EXACTLY
n
e. BAI = BA∪ INF
Fact 3.2.3.
a. For n ≥ 1, BA
n
is categorical. [Monk, Cor 9.32, p.152]
b. For n ≥ 1, BA
n
is complete. (Immediate from above)
c. For n ≥ 1, an natom atomic boolean algebra is isomorphic to any
standard ﬁnite interpretation of L
C
with an nelement basis. [Monk,
Prop. 9.30, p.151]
d. BA is complete. [Monk, Theorem 21.24, p.360]
e. BAI and the theories BA
n
, n ≥ 1, are the only complete, consistent
extensions of BA.
Fact 3.2.4. If BAI ¬ φ, then φ is true in some ﬁnite model of BA.
Proof. BA∪ INF ¬ φ. By compactness, then, there is a k such that
BA∪ ¦ ATLEAST
n
[ 1 ≤ n ≤ k ¦ ¬ φ
So φ is true in any atomic boolean algebra with more than k atoms.
Theorem 3.2.5. If CS ¬ φ, and φ ∈ L
C
, then BA ¬ φ.
Proof. If BA φ, then φ is true is some atomic boolean algebra, /.
If / is ﬁnite, then / is isomorphic to some standard ﬁnite interpration /
of L
C
. But, then φ is true in /
, so φ is not true in /
and φ / ∈ CS.
If / is inﬁnite, then φ is consistent with BAI. But BAI is complete, so
BAI ¬ φ. By 3.2.4, φ is true in some ﬁnite model / of BA. Hence, φ is
true in some standard ﬁnite interpretation of L
C
and, again, φ / ∈ CS.
24 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
3.2.2 Size principles
Here, we just gather the principles presented above as EXCORE:
Theory 3.2.6. CORE SIZE consists of the following axioms:
x ⊂ y → x < y (SUBSET)
x > y ↔ y < x (DEF
>
)
x ∼ y ↔ Indisc(x, y) (DEF
∼
)
(x < x) (IRREF
<
)
x < y ∨ x ∼ y ∨ x > y (TRICH)
Unit(x) ↔ Atom(x) (DEF
1
)
Sum(x, y, z) ↔ ∃x
∃y
( (DEF
+
)
x ∼ x
∧ y ∼ y
∧ x
∩ y
= ∅
∧ x
∪ y
= z)
(x ∼ x
∧ y ∼ y
(DISJ
∪
)
∧x
∩ y
= ∅
∧x
∪ y
= z) → x ∪ y ∼ x
∪ y
Combining the principles of boolean algebra and the size principles, we ob
tain our ﬁrst serious attempt at a general theory of size:
Deﬁnition 3.2.7. BASIC, the basic theory, is deﬁned as:
BA∪ SIZE
3.2.3 Division principles
BASIC is not a complete axiomatization of CS. In this section we shall exhibit
an inﬁnite number of principles which need to be added to BASIC in order to
axiomatize CS. When we are done, we will have an eﬀective set of sentences,
CA, the Class Size Axioms, though we will not prove that CA ≡ CS until
Chapter 5.
To show that the new principles really do need to be added, we’ll need some
nonstandard models of BASIC. These models will be similar in that (1)their
universes will be subsets of T(N), (2) their atoms will be singletons in T(N),
and (3) all boolean symbols will receive their usual interpretations. The models
will, however, include diﬀerent subsets of N and assign diﬀerent size orderings
to these sets.
In Chapter 6, these models of BASIC will reappear as submodels of various
standard models of CS over T(N). So, in addition to the immediate purpose of
establishing independence results, these models provide a glimpse of how sets
of natural numbers are ordered by size.
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS 25
Every standard ﬁnite interpretation, /, of L
C<
satisﬁes exactly one of the
following:
∃x∃y(x ∼ y ∧ x ∩ y = ∅ ∧ x ∪ y = I) (EVEN)
∃x∃y∃y(x ∼ y ∧ x ∩ y = x ∩ z = y ∩ z = ∅
∧Atom(z) ∧ x ∪ y ∪ z = I)
(ODD)
/ EVEN if [B(/)[ is even and / ODD if [B(/)[ is odd. But BASIC
(EVEN∨ ODD). Consider the model T whose universe consists of all only the
ﬁnite and coﬁnite subsets of N, where, for a, b ∈
˙
T:
T (a < b) iﬀ a and b are both ﬁnite and [a[ < [b[
or a and b are both coﬁnite and [N −a[ > [N −b[
or a is ﬁnite and b is inﬁnite.
T is a model of BASIC. But neither EVEN nor ODD is true in T, for any
two sets that are the same size are either both ﬁnite, in which case their union
is also ﬁnite, or both coﬁnite, in which case they cannot be disjoint.
So EVEN∨ODD is in CS, but not entailed by BASIC. As you might suspect,
this is just the tip of the iceberg of principles missing from an axiomatization of
CS. Informally, we can extend T to a model that satisﬁes EVEN by including
the set of even numbers and the set of odd numbers and making them the same
size. To round out the result to a model of BASIC, we also need to include all
sets which are near the set of evens or the set of odds, i.e. those that diﬀer
from the evens or odds by a ﬁnite set. With these additions made, the new
model will be closed under boolean operations and will satisfy BA. There is
a (unique) way of ordering these added sets by smaller than that will satisfy
BASIC: rank them according to the size and direction of their ﬁnite diﬀerence
from the odds or the evens. So, we can construct an inﬁnite model of BASIC ;
(EVEN ∨ ODD).
But this model will still not satisfy CS, as we can see by generalizing the
argument above. (EVEN∨ODD) says that the universe is roughly divisible by
two: EVEN says that the universe is divisible by two without remainder. ODD
says that there is a remainder of a single atom. We can construct a similar
statement that says the universe is roughly divisible by three — with remainder
0, 1, or 2. As with (EVEN ∨ ODD), this statement is in CS but is satisﬁed by
neither our original model nor the model as amended. Again, we can extend
the model and again we can produce a statement of CS which is false in the
resulting model.
We now formalize this line of reasoning.
Deﬁnition 3.2.8. If 0 ≤ m < n, then
26 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
a. MOD
n,m
is the sentence
∃x
1
...∃x
n
∃y
1
. . . ∃y
m
(
x
1
∼ x
2
∼ . . . ∼ x
n
∧ Atom(y
1
) ∧ . . . ∧ Atom(y
m
)
∧
1≤i<j≤n
(x
i
∩ x
j
= ∅)
∧
1≤i<j≤m
(y
i
∩ y
j
= ∅)
∧ (x
1
∪ . . . x
n
) ∩ (y
1
∪ . . . y
m
) = ∅
∧ (x
1
∪ . . . x
n
) ∪ (y
1
∪ . . . y
m
) = I)
MOD
n,m
says that the universe is divisible into n sets of the same
size with m atoms remaining.
b. DIV
n
is the sentence
MOD
n,0
∨ . . . ∨ MOD
n,n−1
Fact 3.2.9. If 0 ≤ m < n and / is a standard ﬁnite interpretation of L
C<
,
then
/ MOD
n,m
iﬀ [B(/)[ ≡ m mod n (a)
/ DIV
n
(b)
CS ¬ DIV
n
(c)
Theorem 3.2.10. BASIC CS
Proof. If n > 1, BASIC DIV
n
. The model, T deﬁned above satisﬁes BASIC
but not DIV
n
, for any n ﬁnite sets have a ﬁnite union and any two coﬁnite sets
overlap. So, BASIC CS, by 3.2.9c.
We could consider adding all DIV
n
sentences to BASIC in the hope that this
would yield a complete set of axioms for CS. We did consider this, but it does
not work. To demonstrate this, we need some independence results for sets of
DIV
n
sentences.
Deﬁnition 3.2.11. If J is a set of natural numbers, then
a. DIV
J
= ¦ DIV
n
[ n ∈ J ¦
b. BDIV
J
= BASIC∪ DIV
J
c. BDIV
j
= BDIV
{j}
Our independence results will be obtained by constructing models of BASIC
which satisfy speciﬁc sets of DIV sentences. To build such models from subsets
of N, we shall include sets which can be regarded as fractional portions of N.
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS 27
Deﬁnition 3.2.12. For n ≥ 0,
a. x is an ncongruence class iﬀ x = [nk +m] for some m, where
0 ≤ m < n.
b. x is an nquasicongruence class iﬀ x is the union of ﬁnitely many
ncongruence classes.
c. x is a congruence class iﬀ x is an ncongruence class for some n.
d. x is a quasicongruence class iﬀ x is an nquasicongruence class
for some n.
e. QC
n
= ¦ x [ x is an nquasicongruence class ¦
f. QC =
n>0
QC
n
Examples.
a. The set of evens, [2n], and the set of odds, [2n + 1], are 2congruence
classes.
b. [3k + 2] is a 3congruence class.
c. N is a 1congruence class.
d. N is an nquasicongruence class for every n > 0:
N = [nk + 0] ∪ . . . ∪ [nk +n −1]
Fact 3.2.13.
a. If x ∈ QC
n
and y ∈ QC
n
, then x ∪ y ∈ QC
n
.
b. If x ∈ QC
n
, then N −x ∈ QC
n
.
Proof.
a. Suppose x = a
1
∪. . . a
k
and y = b
1
∪. . . b
j
. Then x∪y = a
1
∪. . . a
k
∪b
1
∪
. . . b
j
.
b. N itself is the union of ncongruence classes. If x is the union of m of these
classes, then N − x is the union of the remaining (n − m) ncongruence
classes.
Deﬁnition 3.2.14. x is near y, NEAR(x,y), iﬀ x − y and y − x are both
ﬁnite.
Fact 3.2.15. x is near y iﬀ there are ﬁnite sets, w
1
and w
2
such that
x = (y ∪ w
1
) −w
2
.
28 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
Proof.
⇒ Let w
1
= x −y and let w
2
= y −x.
⇐ Suppose x = (y ∪ w
1
) − w
2
. Then x − y ⊆ w
1
and y − x ⊆ w
2
, so x − y
and y −x are ﬁnite.
Fact 3.2.16. If x
1
⊆ x ⊆ x
2
, x
1
is near y, and x
2
is near y, then x is near
y.
Proof. Since x ⊆ x
2
, (x − y) ⊆ (x
2
− y). But (x
2
− y) is ﬁnite, so (x − y) is
ﬁnite.
Since x
1
⊆ x, (y−x) ⊆ (y−x
1
). But (y−x
1
) is ﬁnite, so (y−x) is ﬁnite.
Fact 3.2.17. NEAR is an equivalence relation.
Proof.
a. x is near x, since x −x = ∅, which is ﬁnite.
b. If x is near y, then y is near x. Immediate.
c. Suppose x is near y and y is near z. Note that
(z −x) = ((z ∩ y) −x) ∪ ((z −y) −x)
But (z −y) −x is ﬁnite because (z −y) is ﬁnite and ((z ∩ y) −x) is ﬁnite
because ((z ∩ y) − x) ⊆ (y − x), which is ﬁnite. So the union, (z − x), is
ﬁnite.
Similarly,
(x −z) = ((x ∩ y) −z) ∪ ((x −y) −z)
where ((x∩y) −z) ⊆ (y −z) and ((x−y) −z ⊆ (x−y). So (x−z) is also
ﬁnite.
Hence, x is near z.
Fact 3.2.18.
a. If x
1
is near x
2
, then x
1
∪ y is near x
2
∪ y.
b. If x
1
is near x
2
and y
1
is near y
2
, then x
1
∪ y
1
is near x
2
∪ y
2
.
c. If x is near y, then N −x is near N −y
Proof.
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS 29
a. Since x
1
is near x
2
, x
1
−x
2
and x
2
−x
1
are ﬁnite. But
(x
1
∪ y) −(x
2
∪ y) ⊆ (x
1
−x
2
)
and (x
2
∪ y) −(x
1
∪ y) ⊆ (x
2
−x
1
)
b. By (a), x
1
∪ y
1
is near x
2
∪ y
1
, which is near x
2
∪ y
2
. So x
1
∪ y
1
is near
x
2
∪ y
2
, by transitivity.
c. (N − x) − (N − y) = y − x and (N − y) − (N − x) = x − y. So if x and y
are near each other, so are their complements.
We can now deﬁne the domains of the models we will use to establish the
independence results.
Deﬁnition 3.2.19.
a. Q
n
= ¦ y [ y is near an nquasicongruence class ¦
b. Q =
n>0
Q
n
Examples.
a. Q
1
= ¦ y ⊆ N [ y is ﬁnite or coﬁnite ¦.
b. Q
2
= ¦ y ⊆ N [ y is ﬁnite, coﬁnite, near [2n] or near [2n + 1] ¦.
Q
2
is the domain of the model constructed above to satisfy DIV
2
.
Fact 3.2.20. If A is a class of sets such that
a.
A ∈ A,
b. If x ∈ A, then
A−x ∈ A, and
c. If x ∈ A and y ∈ A, then x ∪ y ∈ A,
then A forms a boolean algebra under the usual settheoretic operations,
where I is interpreted as A. [Monk, Def. 9.1, p.141 and Corr 9.4, p.142]
Theorem 3.2.21. If n > 0, then Q
n
forms an atomic boolean algebra under
the usual settheoretic operations.
Proof. Using Fact 3.2.20:
a.
¦Q
n
¦ = N, since N ∈ ¦Q
n
¦ and if x ∈ Q
n
, then x ⊆ N.
b. If x ∈ Q
n
, then
Suppose x is near y
and y ∈ QC
n
So N −y ∈ QC
n
by 3.2.13b
and N −x is near N −y by 3.2.18b
So N −x ∈ Q
n
.
30 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
c.
Suppose x ∈ Q
n
and y ∈ Q
n
then x is near x
and x
∈ QC
n
for some x
and y is near y
and y
∈ QC
n
for some y
But then x
∪ y
∈ QC
n
by 3.2.13a
and x ∪ y is near x
∪ y
by 3.2.18b
So x ∪ y ∈ QC
n
Thus, Q
n
is a boolean algebra. Moreover, every singleton is in Q
n
since all
singletons are near ∅. So Q
n
is an atomic boolean algebra.
We now deﬁne a size function on all sets which are near quasicongruence
classes. The sizes assigned to sets are ordered pairs. The ﬁrst member is a
rational between 0 and 1 which represents the density of the set. The second
member is an integer which represents the ﬁnite (possibly negative) deviation
of a set from average sets of the same density. First, we deﬁne the ordering
and arithmetic for these sizes with the intention of inducing the size ordering
and Sum relation for sets from the assignment of sizes to sets.
Deﬁnition 3.2.22.
a. A size is an ordered pair ¸ρ, δ), where ρ is rational and δ is an integer.
b. If θ
1
= ¸ρ
1
, δ
1
) and θ
2
= ¸ρ
2
, δ
2
) are sizes, then
(i) θ
1
< θ
2
iﬀ ρ
1
< ρ
2
or (ρ
1
= ρ
2
∧ δ
1
< δ
2
).
(ii) θ
1
+θ
2
= ¸ρ
1
+ρ
2
, δ
1
+δ
2
)
Only some of these sizes will actually be assigned to sets. Speciﬁcally, a size
will be assigned to a set only if 0 ≤ ρ ≤ 1. Moreover, if ρ = 0, then δ ≥ 0 and
if ρ = 1, then δ ≤ 0.
Our intention in assigning sizes to sets is as follows: Suppose x is near an
nquasicongruence class, x
. So x
is the union of k ≤ n nquasicongruence
classes. The set x
has density k/n and this is the value, ρ, assigned to x. The
δ value assigned to x is the ﬁnite number of elements added to or removed from
x
to obtain x.
The deﬁnitions and facts below formalize this intention and demonstrate
that the assignment of sizes to sets is welldeﬁned.
Fact 3.2.23.
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS 31
a. If x ∈ QC, y ∈ QC, and x ,= y, then x is not near y. (That is, no
two quasicongruence classes are near each other.)
b. Any set is near at most one quasicongruence class.
Proof.
a. Let n be the least number such that
x ∈ QC
n
and y ∈ QC
n
So each is a disjoint union of ncongruence classes:
x = x
1
∪ . . . ∪ x
j
and y = y
1
∪ . . . ∪ y
k
Suppose a ∈ x −y
then a ∈ x
i
for some i.
But a / ∈ y
j
, for any y.
So x
i
,= y
j
, for any j
So x
i
⊆ x −y
So x −y is inﬁnite, since x
i
is inﬁnite
Similarly, if a ∈ y −x, then y −x is inﬁnite.
b. If x were near two quasicongruence classes, the two would have to be near
each other, since NEAR is transitive. But this is impossible by (a).
Deﬁnition 3.2.24. If x is near a quasicongruence class, then
a. C(x) is the quasicongruence class near x.
b. ∆
1
(x) = x −C(x).
c. ∆
2
(x) = C(x) −x.
∆
1
(x) and ∆
2
(x) are ﬁnite and
x = (C(x) ∪ ∆
1
(x)) −∆
2
(x)
Deﬁnition 3.2.25. If x ∈ QC, then
a. α(x) = the least n such that x ∈ QC
n
.
b. β(x) = the unique k such that x is the disjoint union of k α(x)
congruence classes.
32 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
Examples.
a. If x = [2n + 1], α(x) = 2 and β(x) = 1.
b. If x = [4n + 1] ∪ [4n + 2], α(x) = 4 and β(x) = 2.
c. If x = [4n + 1] ∪ [4n + 3], α(x) = 2 and β(x) = 1, since x = [2n + 1].
Deﬁnition 3.2.26. If x ∈ Q, then
ρ(x) =
β(C(x))
α(C(x))
δ(x) = [∆
1
(x)[ −[∆
2
(x)[
θ(x) = ¸ρ(x), δ(x))
We can, at last, deﬁne the models to be used in our independence proof.
Deﬁnition 3.2.27. For n > 0, Q
n
is the interpretation Q of L
C<
in which
boolean symbols receive their usual interpretation and
˙
Q = Q
n
Q x < y iﬀ θ(x) < θ(y)
Q x ∼ y iﬀ θ(x) = θ(y)
Q Unit(x) iﬀ θ(x) = ¸0, 1)
Q Sum(x, y, z) iﬀ θ(z) = θ(x) +θ(y)
To show that the models Q
n
satisfy BASIC, we will need the following facts
about congruence classes.
Fact 3.2.28.
a. If x = [an +b] and a
2
= ac, then
x =
_
0≤i<c
[a
2
n + (ia +b)]
b. If x ∈ QC
n
and m = kn, then x ∈ QC
m
.
c. If x ∈ QC and y ∈ QC, there is an n such that x ∈ QC
n
and y ∈ QC
n
.
Proof.
a. If k ∈ [a
2
n + (ia +b)] for some i, 0 ≤ i < c, then, for some n
1
,
k = a
2
n
1
+ia +b
= a(cn
1
) +ia +b
= a(cn
1
+i) +b
So k ∈ x.
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS 33
If k ∈ x, there is an n
1
such that k = an
1
+ b. Let n
2
be the greatest n
such that a
2
n ≤ k and let k
= k −a
2
n
2
.
Since k ≡ b mod a
and a
2
n
2
≡ 0 mod a
then k
≡ b mod a
So k
= ia +b, where 0 ≤ i < c
But k = a
2
n
2
+k
= a
2
n
2
+ia +b
So k ∈ [a
2
n + (ia +b)]
b. By (a), each ncongruence class is a disjoint union of mcongruence classes.
c. Suppose x ∈ QC
n1
and y ∈ QC
n2
. Then, by (b), both x and y are in
QC
n1n2
.
Theorem 3.2.29. For any n > 0, Q
n
BASIC
Proof. By 3.2.21, Q
n
is an atomic boolean algebra; so Q
n
BA. The <relation
of Q
n
is induced from the linear ordering of sizes; so it is a quasilinear ordering
and IRREF
<
, TRICH, and DEF
∼
are satisﬁed. As for the remaining axioms:
a. SUBSET: Suppose x ⊂ y. If C(x) = C(y) then ρ(x) = ρ(y) and ∆
1
(x) ⊆
∆
1
(y) and ∆
2
(x) ⊆ ∆
2
(y), where at least one of these inclusions is proper.
So δ(x) < δ(y).
But if C(x) ,= C(y), then C(x) ⊂ C(y), so ρ(x) < ρ(y).
In either case, θ(x) < θ(y), so Q
n
x < y.
b. REP
<
: Suppose Q
n
x < y. So θ(x) = ¸k
1
/n, δ
1
), θ(x) = ¸k
2
/n, δ
2
), and
either k
1
< k
2
or δ
1
< δ
2
.
We want to ﬁnd some x
⊂ y such that Q
n
x ∼ x
.
If k
1
= k
2
> 0, then y must be inﬁnite; so, x
can be obtained by removing
δ
2
−δ
1
atoms from y.
If k
1
= k
2
= 0, then 0 ≤ δ
1
< δ
2
; so, again, x
can be obtained by removing
δ
2
−δ
1
atoms from y.
If k
2
> k
1
> 0, then let y
1
be the union of k
1
ncongruence classes
contained in C(y). So y − y
1
is inﬁnite and y
1
− y is ﬁnite. Let y
2
=
y
1
−(y
1
−y) = y
1
∩y. So θ(y
2
) = ¸k
1
/n, −δ
3
) where δ
3
= [y
1
−y[. Finally,
let δ
4
= δ
3
+δ
1
and x
= y
2
∪ y
3
, where y
3
⊆ y
1
−y with [y
3
[ = δ
4
.
If k
1
= 0, then x is ﬁnite. If k
2
> 0, then y is inﬁnite, so there is no
problem. If k
2
= 0, then y is ﬁnite, but has more members than x, since
δ
1
< δ
2
. So, let x
be any proper subset of y with δ
1
members.
34 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
c. DISJ
∪
: It is enough to show that if x and y are disjoint, then θ(x ∪ y) =
θ(x) +θ(y). We need the following three facts:
(i) C(x ∪ y) = C(x) ∪ C(y). (See Fact 3.2.18b.)
(ii) ∆
1
(x ∪ y) = (∆
1
(x) ∪ ∆
1
(y)) −(C(x) ∪ C(y)).
If z ∈ x ∪ y but a / ∈ C(x ∪ y), then a ∈ ∆
1
(x) or a ∈ ∆
1
(y); any
element of ∆
1
(x) is also in ∆
1
(x∪y) unless it is in C(y); any element
of ∆
1
(y) is also in ∆
1
(x ∪ y) unless it is in C(x).
(iii) ∆
2
(x ∪ y) = (∆
2
(x) ∪ ∆
2
(y)) −(∆
1
(x) ∪ ∆
1
(y)).
Note that if x ∈ Q, y ∈ Q, and x ∩ y = ∅, then C(x) ∩ C(y) = ∅;
otherwise, C(x) and C(y) have an inﬁnite intersection.
Hence, if a ∈ C(x) ∪ C(y) −(x ∪ y)
then a ∈ C(x) −x = ∆
2
(x)
or a ∈ C(y) −y = ∆
2
(y)
And if a ∈ ∆
2
(x), then a ∈ ∆
2
(x ∪ y)
unless a ∈ ∆
1
(y)
And if a ∈ ∆
2
(y), then a ∈ ∆
2
(x ∪ y)
unless a ∈ ∆
1
(x)
.
From (ii) we obtain (iia):
(iia) [∆
1
(x ∪ y)[ = [∆
1
(x) ∪ ∆
1
(y)[
−[(∆
1
(x) ∪ ∆
1
(y) ∩ (C(x) ∪ C(y))[
and from (iii) we obtain (iiia):
(iiia) [∆
2
(x ∪ y)[ = [∆
2
(x) ∪ ∆
2
(y)[
−[∆
1
(x) ∪ ∆
1
(y) ∩ (∆
2
(x) ∪ ∆
2
(y))[
But ∆
1
(x) and ∆
1
(y) are disjoint, since x and y are disjoint. So:
[∆
1
(x) ∪ ∆
1
(y)[ = [∆
1
(x)[ +[∆
1
(y)[ = δ
1
(x) +δ
1
(y) (iv)
Since ∆
2
(x) and ∆
2
(y) are contained, respectively, in C(x) and C(y),
which are disjoint, they are also disjoint. So:
[∆
2
(x) ∪ ∆
2
(y)[ = δ
2
(x) +δ
2
(y) (v)
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS 35
So,
δ
1
(x ∪ y)−δ
2
(x ∪ y)
= (δ
1
(x) +δ
1
(y)) −(δ
2
(x) +δ
2
(y))
= (δ
1
(x) −δ
2
(x)) + (δ
1
(y) −δ
2
(y))
= δ(x) +δ(y)
Since ρ(x ∪ y) = ρ(x) +ρ(y), by (i), we know that θ(x ∪ y) = θ(x) +θ(y).
d. DEF
+
:
Suppose Q
n
Sum(x, y, z)
So θ(z) = θ(x) +θ(y)
Clearly θ(x) ≤ θ(z)
Assume θ(x) = θ(z)
then θ(y) = ¸0, 0)
So y = ∅
Let x
= z, y
= ∅ to satisfy DEF
+
Assume θ(x) < θ(z)
then Q
n
x
∼ x
and x
⊂ z for some x
since Q
n
REP
<
Let y
= z −x
So z = x
y
Claim θ(y) = θ(y
) so Q
n
y ∼ y
For θ(x
) +θ(y
) = θ(z) by DISJ
∪
But θ(x
) = θ(x)
So θ(y
) = θ(z) −θ(x) = θ(y)
(Cancellation is valid for sizes because it is valid for rationals and integers.)
Conversely,
If θ(z) = θ(x
) +θ(y
)
and θ(x
) = θ(x)
and θ(y
) = θ(y)
then θ(z) = θ(x) +θ(y)
Theorem 3.2.30. For any n > 0, Q
n
DIV
m
iﬀ m [ n.
Proof.
36 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
⇒ θ(N) = ¸1, 0). Hence, if m disjoint sets of the same size exhaust N, they
must each have size ¸1/m, 0). But if x ∈ Q
n
, then θ(x) = ¸a/n, b), for
integral a and b. So b = 0 and a = n/m.
⇐ For each i, 0 ≤ i < n, let A
i
= [nk +i]. So N =
0≤i<n
A
i
.
If i ,= j, then A
i
∩ A
j
= ∅ and Q
n
(A
i
∼ A
j
) since θ(A
i
) = θ(A
j
) =
¸1/n, 0).
Letting p = n/m, group the n sets A
i
into m collections with p members
in each:
B
1
, . . . , B
m
Letting b
j
=
B
j
for 1 ≤ j ≤ m, we have b
j
∈ Q
n
and θ(b
j
) = ¸p/n, 0) =
¸1/m, 0).
Furthermore, b
1
∪ . . . b
m
= N.
Deﬁnition 3.2.31. If J ,= ∅ and J is ﬁnite, then the least common mul
tiple of J, µ(J), is the least k which is divisible by every member of J.
Remark. µ(J) always exists since the product of all members of J is di
visible by each member of J. Usually, the product is greater than µ(J).
Corollary 3.2.32. If J is ﬁnite, then
a. If BDIV
n
¬ DIV
m
, then m [ n.
b. If BDIV
J
¬ DIV
m
, then m [ µ(J).
c. There are only ﬁnitely many m for which BDIV
J
¬ DIV
m
.
Proof. Based on Theorem 3.3.20:
a. If m n, then Q
n
BDIV
n
; DIV
m
b. Q
µ(J)
BDIV
J
since it satisﬁes DIV
j
for each j ∈ J. But, if m µ(J),
then Q
µ(J)
DIV
m
.
c. Immediate from (b), since only ﬁnitely many m divide µ(J).
We are now ready to show that BDIV
n
CS by ﬁnding a sentence in CS
which entails inﬁnitely many DIV
n
sentences. Such sentences can be produced
by generalizing the notion of divisibility to all sets instead of applying it only
to the universe.
Deﬁnition 3.2.33.
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS 37
a. If 0 ≤ n, then Times
n
(x, y) is the formula:
∃x
0
. . . ∃x
n
[x
0
= ∅ ∧ x
n
= y ∧
1≤i≤n
Sum(x
i−1
, x, x
i
)]
Times
n
(x, y) says that y is the same size as the Sum of n sets, each
the same size as x.
b. If 0 ≤ m < n, then Mod
n,m
(z) is the formula:
∃x∃y∃v∃w[Times
n
(x, v) ∧ Unit(y) ∧ Times
m
(y, w) ∧ Sum(v, w, z)]
Mod
n,m
(z) says that z can be partitioned in n sets of the same size
and m atoms.
c. Div
n
(z) is the formula
Mod
n,0
(z) ∨ . . . ∨ Mod
n,n−1
(z)
d. ADIV
n
is the sentence
∀xDiv
n
(x)
Remark. We have taken this opportunity to formulate the divisibility
predicates purely in terms of size predicates. Notice that in the presence
of BASIC,
MOD
n,m
≡ Mod
n,m
(I)
and DIV
n
≡ Div
n
(I)
Fact 3.2.34. CS ¬ ADIV
n
, for every n.
Proof. Every set in every standard ﬁnite interpretation is a ﬁnite set, and all
ﬁnite sets are roughly divisible by every n.
Fact 3.2.35. BASIC; ADIV
n
¬:
a. ADIV
n
m, for all m
b. DIV
n
, and
c. DIV
n
m, for all m.
Proof.
a. By induction on m: if m = 1, then n
m
= n, so ADIV
n
¬ ADIV
n
m.
If T ¬ ADIV
n
k, / T, and x ∈
˙
/, then x can be partitioned into n
k
sets of the same size and i atoms, where i < n
k
. Each nonatomic set in
the partition can be further partitioned into n sets of the same size and
atoms, where j < n. Thus, we have partitioned x into n
k
n sets of the
same size and n
k
j + i atoms. But n
k
n = n
k+1
and, since i < n
k
and
j < n, n
k
j +i < n
k+1
. Hence, / ADIV
n
k+1.
38 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
b. Obvious.
c. Immediate from (a) and (b).
Theorem 3.2.36. BDIV
N
ADIV
n
for any n > 1.
Proof. If BDIV
N
¬ ADIV
n
, then by compactness there is a ﬁnite set J such
that BDIV
J
¬ ADIV
n
. But then BDIV
J
¬ DIV
n
k for every k, by Fact 3.2.35c.
But this contradicts Fact 3.2.32, which says that BDIV
J
entails only ﬁnitely
many DIV
n
sentences.
So, even if we add all of the DIV sentences to BASIC, we are left with a
theory weaker than CS. Since this weakness has arisen in the case of ADIV
sentences, it is reasonable to attempt an axiomatization of CS as follows:
Deﬁnition 3.2.37. CA ≡ BASIC∪ ¦ ADIV
n
[ n > 0 ¦
The remainder of this chapter and the next two are devoted to showing that
CA is, indeed, a complete set of axioms for CS.
3.3 Remarks on showing that CA axiomatizes
CS
We know that CS ¬ CA and we want to show that CA ≡ CS, i.e. that CA ¬ CS.
To do so, it will be suﬃcient to show that every consistent extension of CA is
consistent with CS.
Fact 3.3.1.
a. (Lindenbaum’s lemma) Every consistent theory has a consistent,
complete extension.
b. If every consistent, complete extension of T
2
is consistent with T
1
,
then T
2
¬ T
1
.
Proof.
a. [Monk, Theorem 11.13, p.200]
b. Suppose that T
1
¬ φ, T
2
φ. Then T = T
2
; φ is consistent. T has a
consistent, complete extension, T
, by Lindenbaum’s lemma. Since T
2
⊆
T, T
is also a consistent, complete extension of T
2
. But T
is not consistent
with T
1
.
Deﬁnition 3.3.2. T
is a completion of T iﬀ T
is a complete, consistent
extension of T.
3.3. REMARKS ON SHOWING THAT CA AXIOMATIZES CS 39
To prove that every completion of CA is consistent with CS, we deﬁne two
kinds of completions of a theory.
Deﬁnition 3.3.3.
a. T
is a ﬁnite completion of T iﬀ T
is true in some ﬁnite model of
T.
b. T
is an inﬁnite completion of T iﬀ T
is true in some inﬁnite model
of T.
Fact 3.3.4. If T
is a completion of T and BA ⊆ T, then (T
is a ﬁnite
completion of T iﬀ T
is not an inﬁnite completion of T.)
Proof.
⇒ Suppose / is a ﬁnite model of T
with n atoms. Since T
is complete,
T
¬ EXACTLY
n
. So T
¬ ATLEAST
n+1
and has no inﬁnite models.
⇐ T
¬ ATLEAST
n
for every n, so T
has no ﬁnite models.
Fact 3.3.5.
a. Every ﬁnite completion of CA is equivalent to CA;EXACTLY
n
, for
some n.
b. Every ﬁnite completion of CA is consistent with CS.
Proof.
a. CA ¬ BASIC and, by Theorem 2.1.6, BASIC is categorical in every ﬁnite
power.
b. The model / of CA; EXACTLY
n
is a standard ﬁnite interpretation. So
/ CS.
Deﬁnition 3.3.6.
a. CAI = CA∪ INF
b. CSI = CS ∪ INF
So, to show that every completion of CA is consistent with CS, we may now
concentrate on showing that every completion of CAI is consistent with CSI.
What, then, are the completions of CAI? Recall that CA entails DIV
n
for
every n > 0, where DIV
n
is
MOD
n,0
∨ . . . ∨ MOD
n,n−1
Any completion, T, of CAI has to solve the disjunction DIV
n
for each n; T
has to entail one of the disjuncts. Remainder theories specify, for each n, the
number of atoms remaining when the universe is divided into n disjoint sets of
the same size.
40 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
Deﬁnition 3.3.7. Remainder functions and remainder theories
a. f : N
+
→ N is a remainder function iﬀ 0 ≤ f(n) < n for all n ∈
Dom(f). (Henceforth f ranges over remainder functions.)
b. f is total iﬀ Dom(f) = N
+
; otherwise f is partial.
c. f is ﬁnite iﬀ Dom(f) is ﬁnite.
d. n is a solution for f iﬀ for any i ∈ Dom(f), n ≡ f(i) mod i.
e. f is congruous iﬀ for any i, j ∈ Dom(f), then gcd(i, j) [ f(i) − f(j);
otherwise, f is incongruous.
f. The remainder theory speciﬁed by f, RT
f
, is the set of sentences
¦ MOD
n,m
[ f(n) = m¦.
g. If T is a theory, T
f
= T ∪ RT
f
.
Chapter 5 will show that if f is total, CAI
f
is complete and that these are
the only complete extensions of CAI. In this section, we will show that CAI
f
is
consistent just in case CSI
f
is consistent.
Fact 3.3.8.
a. If f is ﬁnite, then f has a solution iﬀ f is congruous iﬀ f has in
ﬁnitely many solutions. [Griﬃn, Theorem 511, p.80]
b. f is congruous iﬀ every ﬁnite restriction of f is congruous.
c. There are congruous f without any solutions. (Let f(p) = p − 1,
for all primes p. Any solution would have to be larger than every
prime.)
Theorem 3.3.9.
a. If f is ﬁnite, then CS
f
is consistent iﬀ f is congruous.
b. CS
f
is consistent iﬀ f is congruous.
c. CSI
f
is consistent iﬀ f is congruous.
Proof.
a. (⇒)Let φ =
_
RT
f
, Since CS; φ is consistent, there is some n such that
/
n
φ. So n is a solution of f and, hence, f is congruous by 3.3.8a.
(⇐)If f is congruous, f has a solution, n. So /
n
CS; φ
b. (⇒)For every ﬁnite restriction, g, of f, CS
g
is consistent. By (a), each
such g is congruous. Hence, f is congruous by 3.3.8b.
(⇐)Every ﬁnite restriction, g, of f is congruous. So CS
g
is consistent, by
(a). By compactness, then, CS
f
is consistent.
3.3. REMARKS ON SHOWING THAT CA AXIOMATIZES CS 41
c. (⇒)If CSI
f
is consistent, so is CS
f
. So, by (b), f is congruous.
(⇐)By compactness, it is suﬃcient to show that every ﬁnite subtheory, T,
of CSI
f
is consistent. But, if T is such a theory, then
T ⊆ CS
g
∪ ¦ ATLEASTi [ i < n¦
for some n and some ﬁnite restriction, g, of f. Since f is congruous, g is
as well, by 3.3.8b. So g has arbitrarily large solutions and CS
g
has ﬁnite
models large enough to satisfy T. Hence, T is consistent.
We now want to prove a similar theorem for CA, our proposed axiomatization
of CS. To do this, we must ﬁrst establish that certain sentences are theorems
of CA.
Lemma 3.3.10. If n [ m, 0 ≤ q < n, and p ≡ q mod n, then
CA ¬ MOD
m,p
→ MOD
m,q
.
Proof. Suppose / MOD
m,p
, k
1
= m/n, and p = k
2
n + q. So, B(/) can be
partitioned into m sets of the same size
b
1,1
. . . b
1,n
b
2,1
. . . b
2,n
b
k1,1
. . . b
k1,n
and p atoms
a
1,1
. . . a
1,n
a
2,1
. . . a
2,n
a
k2,1
. . . a
k2,n
c
1
. . . . . . c
q
For 1 ≤ i ≤ n, let
B
i
=
_
1≤j≤k1
b
j,n
∪
_
1≤j≤k2
a
j,n
Since / DISJ
∪
, / B
i
∼ B
j
, for 1 ≤ i, j ≤ n. Furthermore,
B(/) =
_
1≤i≤n
B
i
∪ (c
1
. . . c
q
)
So, / MOD
n,q
.
Lemma 3.3.11. If 0 ≤ p < q < m, then
CA ¬ MOD
m,p
→ MOD
m,q
42 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
Proof. Suppose / MOD
m,p
∧ MOD
m,q
. Then:
/ x
1
∪ . . . x
m
∪ a
1
∪ . . . a
p
= I
/ y
1
∪ . . . y
m
∪ b
1
∪ . . . b
q
= I
where the a’s and b’s are atoms and the x’s (y’s) are disjoint sets of the same
size in /. Let
X = x
1
∪ ∪ x
m
Y = y
1
∪ ∪ y
m
A = a
1
∪ ∪ a
p
B = b
1
∪ ∪ b
p
B
= b
p+1
∪ ∪ b
q
We claim that y
1
< x
1
. For, if y
1
∼ x
1
, then X ∪ A ∼ Y ∪ B and if x
1
< y
1
,
then X ∪ A < Y ∪ B; neither is possible since Y ∪ B ⊂ I = X ∪ a. So y
i
< x
i
for 1 ≤ i ≤ m. Since / REP
<
, there is a proper subset y
i
of x
i
which is the
same size at y
i
.
Let z
i
= x
i
−y
i
and Y
= y
i
∪ ∪ y
m
So Y
∪ Z = X = I −A
and Y
∪ B
= I −B.
But A ∼ B, since each is the disjoint union of p atoms. Thus (I − A) ∼
(I − B), by RC
∼
, so Y
∪ Z ∼ Y ∪ B
. But Y
∼ Y , since for each component
of Y , there is a component of Y
of the same size. So Z ∼ B
, by RC
∼
.
But Z must be larger than B
, for B
is the union of fewer than m atoms
while Z is the union of m nonempty sets. So, the original supposition entails a
contradiction.
Theorem 3.3.12.
a. If f is ﬁnite, then CA
f
is consistent iﬀ f is congruous.
b. CA
f
is consistent iﬀ f is congruous.
c. CAI
f
is consistent iﬀ f is congruous.
Proof.
a. (⇒)Supposing that f is incongruous, there exist i, j, and k such that
k = gcd(i, j) and k (f(i) −f(j)). We will show that
CA ¬ (MOD
i,f(i)
∧ MOD
j,f(j)
) (*)
3.3. REMARKS ON SHOWING THAT CA AXIOMATIZES CS 43
from which it follows that CA
f
is inconsistent.
Let p and q be such that
0 ≤ p, q < k,
f(i) ≡ p mod k, and
f(j) ≡ q mod k
By lemma 3.3.10, we have
CA ¬ MOD
i,f(i)
→ MOD
k,p
, and (1)
CA ¬ MOD
j,f(j)
→ MOD
k,q
(2)
since k [ i and k [ j. Since k f(i) −f(j), p ,= q. So lemma 3.3.11 yields
CA ¬ MOD
k,p
→ MOD
k,q
(3)
From (1), (2), and (3) we may conclude (*).
(⇐)Follows from 3.3.9a since CA
f
⊆ CS
f
.
b. See proof of 3.3.9b.
c. See proof of 3.3.9c.
Corollary 3.3.13. CAI
f
is consistent iﬀ CSI
f
is consistent.
Proof. Immediate from 3.3.9c and 3.3.12c.
It might help to review our strategy before presenting the diﬃcult parts of
the proof that CA ≡ CS. The main objective is (1), which follows from (2) by
3.3.1b.
(1) CA ¬ CS
(2) Every completion of CA is consistent with CS.
We already know that the ﬁnite completions of CA are consistent with CS
(see 3.3.5c) and that if CAI
f
is consistent, then CSI
f
is also consistent (see
3.3.12). So (2) is a consequence of (3).
(3) If T is a completion of CAI, then T ≡ CAI
f
for some total,
congruous f.
To establish (3), it is suﬃcient to prove (4) because every completion of CAI
entails CAI
f
for some total f.
(4) If f is total and congruous, then CAI
f
is complete.
44 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
To prove (4), we invoke the prime model test: If T is model complete and T
has a prime model, then T is complete (see Appendix, Fact C.3). So (4) follows
from (5) and (6).
(5) If f is total and congruous, then CAI
f
has a prime model.
(6) For any f, CAI
f
is model complete.
Finally, since any extension of a model complete theory is also model com
plete (see Appendix, Fact C7a), we can infer (6) from (7).
(7) CAI is model complete.
So (1) follows from (5) and (7).
The proof outlined here will be carried out in Chapter 5. But ﬁrst, we
consider a simpler theory, PSIZE, which deals only with sizes of sets and ignores
boolean relations. Chapter 4 formulates PSIZE and establishes that it is model
complete, a result we need for showing that CAI is model complete.
4
The Pure Theory of Class
Sizes
CS is about sets; it makes claims about sets in terms of their boolean relations
and their size relations. In this chapter, we identify a theory, PCS (the pure
theory of class sizes), which is not about sets, but only about sizes of sets. Sizes,
here, are equivalence classes of sets which have the same size. PCS is formulated
in the language of size relations, L
<
.
PCS is worth examining in its own right, for if number theory is the theory
of cardinal numbers, then PCS is our version of number theory. But our main
reason for introducing PCS is to aid the proof that CA is model complete. For
this reason,we only give a sketchy treatment of PCS itself.
Section 1 deﬁnes PCS and develops a set of axioms, PCA, for it, as follows:
for each model, /, of BASIC, the size model, o
A
, consists of equivalence classes
drawn from
˙
/ under the same size relation; PCS is the set of statements true
in o
A
for any standard ﬁnite model, /. PCA consists of a theory, PSIZE, which
holds in o
A
whenever / BASIC and a set of divisibility principles.
Using some results about model theory in section 2, Section 3 establishes
that PCA is model complete, the main result of this chapter and the only result
needed for subsequent proofs. This is done by reducing PCA to the theory Zgm,
whose models are Zgroups taken modulo some speciﬁc element.
Finally, section 4 indicates how PCA could be shown to axiomatize PCS.
This method is the same outlined in chapter 3 to show that CA ≡ CS.
4.1 Size models and PCS
Deﬁnition 4.1.1. Suppose / BASIC.
a. If x is a member of
˙
/, then σ
A
[x] is the size of x in /:
σ
A
[x] = ¦ y [ / (x ∼ y) ¦
45
46 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
b. o
A
, the size model for /, is the interpretation of L
<
whose domain
is
_
σ
A
[x] [ x ∈
˙
/
_
where
o
A
σ
A
[x] ∼ σ
A
[y] iﬀ / x ∼ y
o
A
σ
A
[x] < σ
A
[y] iﬀ / x < y
o
A
Sum(σ
A
[x], σ
A
[y], σ
A
[z]) iﬀ / Sum(x, y, z), and
o
A
Unit(σ
A
[x]) iﬀ / Atom(x)
c. The oneplace operator ˜ x is to be read as the complementary size of x:
o
A
(y = ˜ x) iﬀ o
A
Sum(x, y, I)
These interpretations are well deﬁned because the predicates are satisﬁed
by elements of
˙
/ in virtue of their sizes. For example, if / Sum(x, y, z) and
/ z ∼ z
, then / Sum(x, y, z
).
Deﬁnition 4.1.2. PCS, the pure theory of class sizes, consists of all
sentences of L
<
which are true in the size model of every standard ﬁnite
interpretation of L
C<
.
Deﬁnition 4.1.3. PSIZE, the theory of sizes, consists of the following
axioms:
Order axioms
(x < x) (IRREF
<
)
x < y ∧ y < z → x < z (TRANS
<
)
x ∼ y ↔ x = y (UNIQ
∼
)
x ≤ I (MAX)
0 ≤ x (MIN)
x < y ∨ x ∼ y ∨ y < x (TRICH)
Unit axioms
Unit(x) ↔ (y < x ↔ y = 0)
∃xUnit(x)
4.2. SOME MODELS AND THEORIES 47
Sum axioms
Sum(x, 0, x) (IDENT)
Sum(x, y, z) ↔ Sum(y, x, z) (COMM)
Sum(x
1
, y, z
1
) ∧ Sum(x
2
, y.z
2
) → (MONOT)
(x
1
< x
2
↔ z
1
< z
2
)
Sum(x, y, w
1
) ∧ Sum(w
1
, z, w) ∧ Sum(y, z, w
2
) (ASSOC)
→ Sum(x, w
2
, w)
∃zSum(x, y
1
, z) ∧ y
2
≤ y
1
→ ∃zSum(x, y
2
, z) (EXIST
+
)
x ≤ z → ∃ySum(x, y, z) (EXIST
−
)
Sum(x, ˜ x, I) (COMP)
Fact 4.1.4. If / BASIC, then o
A
PSIZE
Fact 4.1.5. PSIZE PCS.
Proof. PSIZE fails to axiomatize PCS for the same reason that BASIC fails to
axiomatize CS: the lack of divisibility principles.
We oﬀer PCA as an axiomatic version of PCS:
Deﬁnition 4.1.6. PCA, the pure class size axioms, is deﬁned as:
PSIZE ∪ ¦ ADIV
n
[ n > 0 ¦
Fact 4.1.7. If / CA, then o
A
PCA
If / is a standard ﬁnite interpretation of BASIC with n atoms, then the
elements of o
A
can be regarded as the sequence 0, . . . , n with the usual ordering,
where
o
A
Unit(x) iﬀ x = 1
and
o
A
Sum(i, j, k) iﬀ (i +j) = k ≤ n
Once n is ﬁxed, this is the only interpretation allowed by the axioms PSIZE. In
particular, MONOT rules out the interpretation in which Sum(i, j, k) is satisﬁed
just in case (i +j) ≡ k mod n + 1.
4.2 Some models and theories
We shall use Theorem 4.2.1a to show that PCA is model complete and Theorem
4.2.1b to show, in chapter 5, that CAI is model complete.
Theorem 4.2.1.
a. If T satisﬁes Monk’s Condition, then T is model complete.
48 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
Monk’s Condition. If / T, B T, / ⊆ B, and ( is a
ﬁnitely generated submodel of B, then there is an isomor
phism, f : ( → / such that if x ∈
˙
( ∩
˙
/, then f(x) = x. f is
a Monk mapping.
b. If T is model complete and L
T
has no function symbols, then T
satisﬁes Monk’s Condition.
Proof.
a. [Monk, p.359]
b. If L
T
has no function symbols, then any ﬁnitely generated structure over
L
T
is ﬁnite. So, suppose
˙
( contains a
1
, . . . , a
n
(from
˙
/) and b
1
, . . . , b
m
(from
˙
B
˙
/). Let φ
1
be the diagram of ( and obtain φ
2
from φ
1
by sub
stituting the variable x
i
for each constant a
i
and the variable y
i
for each
constant b
i
. Finally, let φ
3
be
∃y
1
. . . ∃y
m
φ
2
So, φ
3
is a primitive formula. B φ
3
(a
1
, . . . , a
n
), so / does as well, by
Fact C.5d in the Appendix. So, to obtain the desired isomorphism, map
the a
i
’s into themselves and map the b
i
’s into a sequence of elements of
˙
/
which can stand in for the existentially quantiﬁed variables of φ
3
.
In chapter 5, we use Monk’s Theorem to infer the model completeness of the
theory CA from that of PCA. To establish the model completeness of PCA, we
use Fact 4.2.2.
Fact 4.2.2.
a. If T
1
is model complete and T
1
¬ T
2
, then T
2
is also model complete.
b. If T is model complete in L, and L
is an expansion of L by adjoining
new individual constants, then T is model complete in L
. [Monk,
p.355]
Deﬁnition 4.2.3. Suppose L
1
and L
2
are ﬁrst order languages and L
12
=
L
1
−L
2
. A translation (simple translation) of L
1
into L
2
is a function,
τ, which:
a. assigns to the universal quantiﬁer a (quantiﬁer free) formula, τ
∀
, of
L
2
with exactly one free variable.
b. assigns to each nplace predicate, P, in L
12
a (quantiﬁer free) for
mula, τ
P
, of L
2
with exactly n free variables, and
c. assigns to each nplace function symbol, O, in L
12
a (quantiﬁer free)
formula, τ
O
, of L
2
with exactly (n + 1) free variables.
4.2. SOME MODELS AND THEORIES 49
Deﬁnition 4.2.4. If τ is a translation of L
1
into L
2
, then τ extends to all
formulae of L
1
as follows:
a. Predicates and function symbols of L
2
are translated into themselves.
b.
τ(φ ∨ ψ) = τ(φ) ∨ τ(ψ)
τ(φ ∧ ψ) = τ(φ) ∧ τ(ψ)
τ(φ) = τ(φ)
τ(∀xφ) = ∀x(τ
∀
(x) → φ)
τ(∃xφ) = ∃x(τ
∀
(x) ∧ φ)
Deﬁnition 4.2.5. If τ is a translation of L
1
into L
2
, then
a. The functional assumptions of τ are the sentences:
∀x
1
. . . ∀x
n
(τ
∀
(x
1
) ∧ . . . ∧ τ
∀
(x
n
)) →
∃y
1
(τ
∀
(y
1
) ∧ ∀y
2
(τ
O
(x
1
, . . . , x
n
, y
2
) ↔ y
1
= y
2
))
where O is a function symbol in L
1
but not in L
2
.
b. The existential assumption of τ is
∃xτ
∀
(x)
The functional assumptions of a translation say that the formulas which
translate function symbols yield unique values within the relevant part of the
domain when given values in the relevant part of the domain. The relevant
part of the domain is the set of elements which satisfy the interpretation of
universal quantiﬁer. The existential assumption of a translation says that that
subdomain is nonempty. Notice that the existential and functional assumptions
of a translation are sentences of L
2
.
A translation from L
2
into L
1
induces a mapping from interpretations of L
2
into interpretations of L
1
.
Deﬁnition 4.2.6. If τ is a translation from L
1
into L
2
and B is an inter
pretation of L
2
which satisﬁes the existential and functional assumptions
of τ, then τ(B) is the interpretation / of L
1
such that:
a.
˙
/ is the set of elements of
˙
B which satisfy τ
∀
.
b. / interprets all predicates and function symbols common to L
1
and
L
2
in the same way that B does.
50 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
c. / interprets all predicates and function symbols in L
12
in accordance
with the translations assigned by τ.
/ P(x) iﬀ B τ
P
(x)
/ y = O(x) iﬀ B τ
O
(x, y)
The following condition on theories allows us to infer the model completeness
of one from the model completeness of the other.
Deﬁnition 4.2.7.
a. If τ is a translation from L
1
to L
2
, then T
1
is τreducible to T
2
iﬀ
for every model / of T
1
there is a model B of T
2
such that / = τ(B).
b. T
1
is reducible (simply reducible) to T
2
iﬀ there is a (simple) trans
lation, τ, for which T
1
is τreducible to T
2
.
c. T
1
is uniformly τreducible to T
2
iﬀ for any models, /
1
and B
1
,
such that /
1
T
1
and B
1
T
1
, and /
1
⊆ B
1
, there exist models /
2
and B
2
such that /
2
T
2
and B
2
T
2
, and /
2
⊆ B
2
/
1
= τ(/
2
) and
B
1
= τ(B
2
),
Lemma 4.2.8. Suppose that T
1
is τreducible to T
2
and that /
1
= τ(/
2
).
Then, for any primitive formula, φ, of L
1
and any sequence, x ∈ A
1
,
/
1
φ(x) iﬀ /
2
τ
φ
(x)
Proof. Suppose
φ(x) = ∃y
1
. . . ∃y
n
φ
(x)
where φ
(x) is a conjunction of atomic formulae and negations of atomic formu
lae. Then
/
1
φ(x) iﬀ /
1
∃y
1
. . . ∃y
n
φ
(x, y
1
, . . . , y
n
)
iﬀ /
1
φ
(x, b
1
, . . . , b
n
), for b
i
∈
˙
/
iﬀ /
2
τ
φ
(x, b
1
, . . . , b
n
)
iﬀ /
2
∃y
1
. . . ∃y
n
(τ
∀
(y
1
) ∧ . . . ∧ τ
∀
(y
n
) ∧ φ
(x, y
1
, . . . , y
n
))
iﬀ /
2
τ
φ
(x)
Theorem 4.2.9. If T
2
is model complete, τ is a simple translation from
L
T1
to L
T2
, and T
1
is uniformly τreducible to T
2
, then T
1
is also model
complete.
4.2. SOME MODELS AND THEORIES 51
Proof. By Fact C.5d in the Appendix, it is enough to show that given models
/
1
and B
1
of T
1
, where /
1
⊆ B
1
and a primitive formula, φ:
If B
1
φ(x) for x ∈
˙
/
then /
1
φ(x)
Since T
1
is uniformly τreducible to T
2
, there are models of T
2
, /
2
⊆ B
2
, where
/
1
= τ(/
2
) and B
1
= τ(B
2
)
Since B
1
φ(x) by assumption
then B
2
τ
φ
(x) by lemma 4.2.8
So /
2
τ
φ
(x) since T
2
is model complete
and /
1
φ(x) by lemma 4.2.8
We shall now deﬁne several theories, all more or less familiar, which will
serve in showing that our theory of size is model complete.
Deﬁnition 4.2.10.
a. The theory of abelian groups with identity has the following axioms
x + (y +z) = (x +y) +z (1)
x +y = y +x (2)
x + 0 = x (3)
∃y(x +y = 0) (4)
b. The theory of cancellable abelian semigroups with identity con
sists of (1), (2), and (3) above and:
x +y = x +z → y = z (4
)
c. The axioms of simple order are:
x ≤ y ∧ y ≤ z → x ≤ z (5)
x ≤ y ∧ y ≤ x → x = y (6)
x ≤ x (7)
x ≤ y ∨ y ≤ x (8)
d. The theory of Zgroups, Zg , has the following axioms
(i) The axioms for abelian groups with identity,
(ii) The axioms for simple order,
52 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
(iii) The following additional axioms:
y ≤ z → x +y ≤ x +z (9)
1 is the least element greater than 0 (10)
∀x∃y(ny = x ∨ . . . ∨ ny = x + (n −1)) (11)
for each positive n, where ny stands for:
y + +y
. ¸¸ .
n times
e. The theory of Nsemigroups has the following axioms:
(i) The axioms for cancellable abelian semigroups with identity,
(ii) The axioms of simple order,
(iii) Axioms (9) and (10) of Zg, and
(iv) The additional axiom:
0 ≤ x (12)
f. The theory of Zgroups modulo I, Zgm, consists of the following
axioms:
(i) The axioms for abelian groups with identity,
(ii) The axioms for simple order
(iii) Axioms (10) and (11) of Zg, axiom (12) from the theory of
Nsemigroups, and
(iv) The following additional axioms
(y ≤ z ∧ x ≤ x +z) → x +y ≤ x +z) (13)
x ≤ I (14)
The theory of Zgroups is taken from [Chang, p. 291]
Fact 4.2.11.
a. Zg is the complete theory of ¸Z, +, 0, 1, ≤). [Chang, p.291]
b. Zg is model complete.[Robinson]
Theorem 4.2.12.
a. The theory of Nsemigroups is model complete.
b. The theory of Zgroups modulo I is model complete.
4.3. PCA IS MODEL COMPLETE 53
Proof.
a. Every abelian semigroup with cancellation can be isomorphically embed
ded in an abelian group [Kurosh, pp. 4448]. It is clear from the con
struction in [Kurosh] that if the semigroup is ordered, the abelian group
in which it is embedded may also be ordered and that the elements of
the semigroup will be the positive elements of the group. Moreover, the
(rough) divisibility of the elements in the semigroup will be carried over
to the group.
Consequently, the theory of Nsemigroups is uniformly reducible to the
theory of Z groups by the translation:
τ
∀
= 0 ≤ x
Since the latter is model complete, so is the former, by 4.2.9.
b. First, consider the theory of Nsemigroups in the language which contains,
besides the constant symbols in the original theory, an individual constant,
I. The theory of Nsemigroups is modelcomplete in this language, by
4.2.2b.
We claim that the theory of Zgroups modulo I is uniformly reducible to
this new theory by the following translation:
τ
∀
= x ≤ I
τ
+
= x +y = z ∨ x +y = I +z
(The construction: given a model of Zgm, stack up ω many copies of the
model, assigning interpretations in the obvious way. The result is an N
semigroup and the original model is isomorphic to the ﬁrst copy of itself.)
In the next section, we use Theorem 4.2.9 to show that PSIZE is model
complete, by reducing it to the theory of Zgroups modulo I. Chapter 5 uses
Monk’s Theorem to show that CA is model complete.
4.3 PCA is model complete
To show that PCA is model complete, we shall reduce it to Zgm, the theory of
Zgroups with addition taken modulo some constant (see 4.2.11). The model
completeness of PCA then follows from the model completeness of Zgm (Fact
4.2.12) and Theorem 4.2.9. Speciﬁcally, we shall show that every model of PCA
is the τimage of a model of Zgm, where τ is the following translation.
54 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
Deﬁnition 4.3.1. Let τ be the translation from L
PSIZE
to L
Zgm
where:
τ
∀
= x = x
τ
Sum(x,y,z)
= x +y = z ∧ x ≤ z
τ
Unit(x)
= x = 1
τ
˜ x
= x +y = I
τ
x<y
= x ≤ y ∧ x ,= y
τ
∅
= x = 0
Given a model, /, of PCA, we can construct a model, Z
A
, of Zgm directly:
Deﬁnition 4.3.2. If / PSIZE, then Z
A
is the interpretation of L
Zgm
in
which:
˙
Z
A
=
˙
/ (a)
Z
A
(x ≤ y) iﬀ / (x < y ∨ x = y) (b)
Z
A
(I) = /(I) (c)
Z
A
(0) = /(0) (d)
Z
A
(x +y = z) iﬀ / Sum(x, y, z) (e)
or / ∃a∃wUnit(a)
∧ Sum(˜ x, ˜ y, w) ∧ Sum(w, a, ˜ z)
Z
A
(x = 1) iﬀ / Unit(x) (f)
Fact 4.3.3j establishes that 4.3.2 gives Sum a functional interpretation. The
orem 4.3.8 establishes that Z
A
Zgm, on the basis of the intervening facts: 4.3.3
deals with the model / of PSIZE; 4.3.4 deals with the corresponding model Z
A
;
4.3.6 veriﬁes some connections between / and Z
A
.
Fact 4.3.3. The following are theorems of PSIZE. (Sm(x, y) abbreviates
∃zSum(x, y, z). )
4.3. PCA IS MODEL COMPLETE 55
Sum(x, y, z
1
) ∧ Sum(x, y, z
2
) → z
1
= z
2
(UNIQ
+
) (a)
Sum(x, y
1
, z) ∧ Sum(x, y
2
, z) → y
1
= y
2
(UNIQ
−
) (b)
Sum(x, y, w
1
) & Sum(w
1
, z, w) → (ASSOC2) (c)
∃w
2
(Sum(y, z, w
2
) ∧ Sum(x, w
2
, w))
˜
˜ x = x (d)
x < y ↔ ˜ y < ˜ x (e)
x < y ∧ y < ˜ y → x < ˜ x (f)
Sm(x, y) ∨ Sm(˜ x, ˜ y) (g)
Sum(x, y, z) → Sum(˜ z, y, ˜ x) (h1)
Sum(x, y, z) → Sum(x, ˜ z, ˜ y) (h2)
Sum(x, y, z
1
) ∧ Sum(˜ x, ˜ y, ˜ z
2
) → (z
1
= z
2
= I) (i)
∃z
1
Sum(x, y, z
1
) ↔ (j)
∃a∃w∃z
2
(Unit(a) ∧ Sum(˜ x, ˜ y, w) ∧ Sum(w, a, ˜ z
2
))
Proof. The proofs are elementary.
In addition to the theorems of PSIZE listed in 4.3.3, we require a battery of
tedious facts about the model Z
A
. We shall state these in terms of the model
´
Z
A
, an expansion of both / and Z
A
, which interprets two additional operators,
as follows:
Deﬁnition 4.3.4. Given a model / of PSIZE,
´
Z
A
is the expansion of Z
A
induced by the deﬁnitions in 4.3.2 together with (a) and (b):
´
Z
A
y = −x iﬀ Z
A
x +y = 0 (a)
´
Z
A
z = x −y iﬀ Z
A
z = x +−y (b)
Remark. Given a model / of PSIZE: for each x in
˙
Z
A
, there is a unique
y such that:
Z
A
x +y = 0
Proof.
a. If x = 0, then Z
A
x +y = 0 iﬀ y = 0.
⇒
If Z
A
0 +y = 0
then / Sum(∅, y, ∅) by 4.3.2e
But / Sum(∅, ∅, ∅) by IDENT
So Z
A
y = 0 by UNIQ
−
56 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
⇐ Obvious
b. If x > 0, there is a unique y which satisﬁes
Sum(˜ x, a, y), where Unit (a) (*)
since there is a unique unit and / UNIQ
+
.
But Z
A
x +y = 0 iﬀ / (*).
⇒
If Z
A
x +y = 0
then / Sum(˜ x, ˜ y, w)
and / Sum(w, a,
˜
∅) since / Sum(x, y, 0)
But /
˜
∅ = I
So / w = ˜ a by COMP and UNIQ
−
So / Sum(˜ x, ˜ y, ˜ a)
So / Sum(˜ x, a, y) by 4.3.3d and h2
⇐
If / (*)
then / Sum(˜ x, ˜ y, ˜ a) by 4.3.3h2
and / Sum(˜ a, a,
˜
∅) by COMP
So Z
A
x +y = 0 by 4.3.2e
Fact 4.3.5.
´
Z
A
satisﬁes the following:
−(x +y) = −x +−y (a)
−(x −y) = y −x (b)
(x +y) −y = x (c)
−(−x) = x (d)
x ,= 0 ∧ x < y → −y < −x (e)
Proof. Omitted.
Fact 4.3.6.
´
Z
A
satisﬁes the following:
a. Sm(a, b) ↔ Sum(a, b, a +b)
b. c ≤ b ↔ Sum(c, b −c, b)
c. Sum(a, b, c) ∧ 0 < b → Sum(a, −c, −b)
Sum(a, b, c) ∧ 0 < a → Sum(−c, b, −a)
4.3. PCA IS MODEL COMPLETE 57
d. Sm(a, b) → (Sm(−a, −b) ∨ b = −a)
Proof.
a. (⇒)
Suppose Sm(a, b)
So Sum(a, b, w) for some w
So (a +b) = w by 4.3.2e
So Sum(a, b, a +b)
(⇐)Obvious.
b. (⇒)
Suppose c ≤ b
then Sum(c, w, b) for some w by EXIST
−
So b = c +w by (a) and UNIQ
+
So b −c = (c +w) −c
So b −c = w by 4.3.5c
So Sum(c, b −c, b)
(⇐)
Suppose Sum(c, b −c, b)
But Sum(c, 0, c) by IDENT
So 0 ≤ (b −c) ↔ b ≤ c by MONOT and UNIQ
+
So b ≤ c by MIN
c.
Suppose Sum(a, b, c)
and 0 < b
then c = (a +b) by (a) and UNIQ
+
So c −b = (a +b) −b
So c −b = a by 4.3.5c
So −b = a −c by 4.3.5c
So Sum(a, −c, −b) if Sm(a, −c) by (a)
But if a = 0
then Sm(a, −c) by IDENT
And if a ,= 0
then a < c, since 0 < b by MONOT and UNIQ
+
58 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
So −c < −a by 4.3.5e
So −c ≤ ˜ a by 4.3.4
But Sm(a, ˜ a) by IDENT
So Sm(a, −c) by EXIST
+
d.
Suppose Sm(a, b)
But b = (a +b) −a, by 4.3.5c
So Sum(a, (a +b) −a, a +b), by (a)
So (a ≤ a +b), by (b)
So (a +b) < a, by TRICH
But if (a +b) ,= 0
then −a < −(a +b), by 4.3.5e
So −a < −a +−b, by 4.3.5a
So Sum(−a, (−a +−b) −(−a), −a +−b), by (b)
But (−a +−b) −(−a) = −b, by 4.3.5c
So Sum(−a, −b, −a +−b)
So Sm(−a, −b)
And if (a +b) = 0
then b = −a
We can now show that Z
A
Zgm. The only real diﬃculty arises in verifying
that addition is associative. We need the following lemma.
Lemma 4.3.7. Z
A
(a +c) + (b −c) = a +b
Proof. We shall work through successively more general cases:
a. When Sm(a, b) and c ≤ b
We know Sum(b −c, c, b) by 4.3.6b
and Sum(b, a, a +b) by 4.3.6a
So ∃w(Sum(c, a, w)
∧ Sum(b −c, w, a +b) by ASSOC2
So w = c +a by 4.3.6a and UNIQ
+
and a +b = (b −c) + (c +a) by 4.3.6a and UNIQ
+
So a +b = (a +c) + (b −c)
4.3. PCA IS MODEL COMPLETE 59
b. When Sm(a, b) and Sm(a, c)
If c ≤ b, Case (a) applies directly
So assume b < c
then a +c = (a +b) + (c −b) by Case (a)
So (a +c) −(c −b) = a +b by 4.3.5c
So (a +c) +−(c −b) = a +b by 4.3.4b
So (a +b) + (b −c) = a +b by 4.3.5b
c. Sm(a, b)
If Sm(a, c) Case (b) applies
So assume Sm(a, c) and thus b < c by EXIST
+
So Sum(b, c −b, c) by 4.3.6b
and 0 < c −b by MONOT
So Sum(b, −c, −(c −b)) by 4.3.6c
So Sum(b, −c, b −c) by 4.3.5b
So Sum(−c, b, b −c) (c1)
Either Sm(−a, −c) or c = −a since Sm(a, c) by 4.3.6d
Assume Sm(−a, −c)
then Sum(−a, −c, −a +−c) by 4.3.6a
So Sum(−a, −c, −(a +c)) by 4.3.5a
and 0 < −a
So Sum(−(−(a +c)), −c, −(−a)) by 4.3.6c
So Sum(a +c, −c, a) by 4.3.5d (c2)
Assume c = −a
then a +c = 0
and a = −c
Hence Sum(a +c, −c, a) by (c2)
and Sum(−c, b, b −c) by (c1)
and Sum(a, b, a +b) since Sm(a, b)
So Sum(a +c, b −c, a +b) by ASSOC
So (a +c) + (b −c) = a +b by 4.3.6a
d. Whenever
Suppose Sm(a, b), for otherwise case c applies.
60 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
Either Sm(−a, −b) or b = −a by 4.3.6d
Assume b = −a
then a +b = 0
and b −c = (−a) −c
= −a +−c
= −(a +c)
So (a +b) + (b −c)
= (a +c) +−(a +c)
= 0 = a +b
Assume Sm(−a, −b)
then −a +−b = (−a +−c) + (−b −−c) by case c
So −(a +b) = −(a +c) +−(b −c) by 4.3.5a
So −(a +b) = −((a +c) + (b −c)) by 4.3.5a
So a +b = (a +c) + (b −c) by 4.3.5d
Theorem 4.3.8. Z
A
Zgm
Proof. The only axiom for abelian groups that needs further veriﬁcation is
associativity. We prove this using lemma 4.3.7:
x + (y +z) = (x +y) + ((y +z) −y), by 4.3.7
= (x +y) +z, by 4.3.5c
The ordering axioms of Zgm are satisﬁed in Z
A
because Z
A
uses the same
ordering as /, / PSIZE, and PSIZE includes the same ordering axioms.
Z
A
satisﬁes axiom (10) of Zgm because /satisﬁes the UNIT axiom of PSIZE.
The divisibility of elements in Z
A
required by axiom (11) of Zgm is guaran
teed by the fact that / satisﬁes the divisibility principles of PCA.
Similarly, Z
A
satisﬁes axioms (12), and (14) of Zgm because / satisﬁes MIN
and MAX.
Axiom (13) of Zgm is:
y ≤ z ∧ x ≤ x +z → x +y ≤ x +z
If Z
A
x ≤ x +z
then / Sum(x, z, x +z)
Since Z
A
y < z
then / Sum(x, y, x +y) by EXIST
+
and / x +y ≤ x +z by MONOT
So Z
A
x +y ≤ x +z
4.4. REMARKS ON SHOWING THAT PCA AXIOMATIZES PCS 61
So, we PCA is τreducible to Zgm. The reduction is uniform since each
model / of PCA has the same domain as its Zgmmodel. So, we may conclude
that PCA is model complete.
Theorem 4.3.9.
a. PCA is model complete.
b. PCA satisﬁes Monk’s condition.
Proof.
a. Apply Theorem 4.2.9.
b. Immediate from (a) and 4.2.1(b).
4.4 Remarks on showing that PCA axiomatizes
PCS
To prove that PCA ≡ PCS, we could follow the method outlined at the end of
chapter 3 for showing that CA ≡ CS.
We already know that PCS ¬ PCA, so we need only prove (1), which follows
from (2) by 3.3.1b.
(1) PCA ¬ PCS
(2) Every completion of PCA is consistent with PCS.
But (2) is equivalent to the conjunction of (2a) and (2b).
(2a) Every ﬁnite completion of PCA is consistent with PCS.
(2b) Every inﬁnite completion of PCA is consistent with PCS.
The ﬁnite completions of PCA are the theories PCA; EXACTLY
n
. But
PCA; EXACTLY
n
is true in o
A
, where / is the standard ﬁnite interpretation
of L
C<
containing n atoms. So, the ﬁnite completions of PCA are consistent
with PCS. (Formally, we would have to deﬁne EXACTLY
n
in terms of units
rather than atoms.)
Letting PCAI = PCA+INF and PCSI = PCS +INF, (2b) is a consequence
of (3a) and (3b).
(3a) If PCAI
f
is consistent, then PCSI
f
is consistent.
(3b) If T is a completion of PCAI, then T ≡ PCAI
f
, for some f.
62 4. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES
To prove (3a), we would have to prove analogues of 3.3.9 through 3.3.13 for
PCA and PCS. This seems straightforward, but tedious. The trick is to show
that enough axioms about size have been incorporated in PCA to establish the
entailments among MOD statements.
To prove (3b), it is suﬃcient to demonstrate (4), because every completion
of PCAI entails PCAI
f
for some total f.
(4) If f is total, then PCAI
f
is complete.
But PCA is model complete, so only (5) remains to be shown.
(5) If f is total and congruous, then PCAI
f
is has a prime model.
We will not construct prime models for the extensions of PCAI. It’s apparent
that the size models of the prime models for CAI
f
would do nicely. Alternatively,
the construction could be duplicated in this simpler case.
5
Completeness of CA
5.1 Model completeness of CA
We shall show that CA is model complete by showing that it satisﬁes Monk’s
criterion (see 4.3.1). So, given Assumption 5.1.1, we want to prove 5.1.2.
Assumption 5.1.1. / CA, B CA, / ⊆ B , and ( is a ﬁnitely generated
substructure of B.
Theorem 5.1.2. There is an isomorphic embedding, f : ( → /, where
f(x) = x if x ∈
˙
( ∩
˙
/
The Monk mappings for PCA can serve as a guide in constructing Monk
mappings for CA. The existence of Monk mappings for PCA tells us that we
can ﬁnd elements with the right sizes. DISJ
∪
and REP
<
then allow us to ﬁnd
elements with those sizes that ﬁt together in the right way.
Strictly speaking, o
A
is not a submodel of o
B
, so we cannot apply Monk’s
Theorem directly. But, let
o
B
(X) = the submodel of o
B
whose domain is ¦ σ
B
[x] [ x ∈ X¦
Then, clearly,
o
A
· o
B
(A) ⊆ o
B
, and
o
C
· o
B
(C), a ﬁnitely generated submodel of o
B
.
Monk’s Theorem applies directly to o
B
(A), o
B
, and o
B
(C), so we may con
clude 5.1.3:
Fact 5.1.3. There is an isomorphic embedding, g : o
C
→ o
A
, where
g(σ
B
[x]) = σ
A
[x] for all x ∈
˙
( ∩
˙
/.
63
64 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
That is to say, the sizes of elements in ( can be embedded in the sizes of
elements in /. It remains to be shown that the elements of ( themselves can be
mapped into / by a function which preserves boolean relations as well as size
relations.
( is a ﬁnite, and hence atomic, boolean algebra, though its atoms need not
be atoms of B; indeed, if B is inﬁnite, there must be some atoms of ( which are
not atoms of B since the union of all atoms of ( is the basis of B.
Deﬁnition 5.1.4. d is a molecule iﬀ d ∈
˙
( ∩
˙
/ and no proper subset of d
is in
˙
( ∩
˙
/.
˙
( ∩
˙
/ is a boolean algebra whose basis is the same as the basis of (. So
every atom of ( is included in some molecule. The embedding f has to map
each molecule to itself. Moreover, f has to be determined by its values on (
since f must preserve unions. In fact, the atoms of ( can be partitioned among
the molecules. So, if
d = b
1
∪ . . . ∪ b
n
where d is a molecule and b
1
, . . . , b
n
are the atoms of ( contained in d, then d
must also be the (disjoint) union of f(b
1
), . . . , f(b
n
). If this condition is satisﬁed,
f will preserve boolean relations. f must also select images with appropriate
sizes.
Proof. Proof of 5.1.2 Given a molecule, d, let b
1
, . . . , b
n
be the atoms of C
contained in d. For each b
i
, let c
i
be some member of g(σ
B
[b
i
]) These elements
will be elements of
˙
/, since g yields sizes in / whose members are in
˙
/. These
elements have the right sizes, as we will show below, but they are in the wrong
places. We have no guarantee that they are contained in the molecule d. So we
still need to show that there are disjoint elements of
˙
/, a
1
, . . . , a
n
whose union
is d and whose sizes are the same as those of b
1
, . . . , b
n
, respectively. Well,
Suppose d = b
1
∪ . . . ∪ b
n
So ( Sum(b
1
, . . . , b
n
, d)
So o
C
Sum(σ
B
[b
1
], . . . , σ
B
[b
n
], σ
B
[d])
So o
A
Sum(g(σ
B
[b
1
]), . . . , g(σ
B
[b
n
]), g(σ
B
[d]))
So o
A
Sum(c
1
, . . . , c
n
, d)
since each c
i
∈ g(σ
B
[b
i
]) and d ∈ g(σ
B
[d]) = σ
A
[d]. So, the existence of
a
1
, . . . , a
n
, as above, is guaranteed because / DEF
+
.
Now, let f(b
i
) = a
i
for each b
i
in the molecule d. Repeating this procedure
for each molecule yields a value of f for each atom of (. Finally, if x ∈
˙
( is
nonatomic, then
x = b
1
∪ . . . ∪ b
k
where each b
k
is atomic. So let
f(x) = f(b
1
) ∪ . . . ∪ f(b
k
)
5.1. MODEL COMPLETENESS OF CA 65
f satisﬁes the requirements of Theorem 5.1.2: Boolean relations are preserved
by f because the function is determined by its values on the atoms of (; f
maps elements of C ∩ A into themselves because the set of atoms contained in
each of these molecules is mapped into a disjoint collection of elements of
˙
/
whose union is the same molecule; so, we need only show that f preserves size
relations. To do so, we invoke lemma 5.1.6, below:
( x < y iﬀ / f(x) < f(y) (a)
( x ∼ y iﬀ / f(x) ∼ f(y) (b)
( Sum(x, y, z) iﬀ / Sum(f(x), f(y), f(z)) (c)
( Unit(x) iﬀ / Unit(y) (d)
Proof of (a): (The others are similar).
( x < y iﬀ o
B
σ
B
[x] < σ
B
[y]
iﬀ o
A
g(σ
B
[x]) < g(σ
B
[y])
iﬀ o
A
σ
A
[f(x)] < σ
A
[f(y)] by 5.1.6
iﬀ / f(x) < f(y)
So, we may conclude:
Theorem 5.1.5. CA is model complete.
Lemma 5.1.6. For all x in
˙
(,
σ
A
[f(x)] = g(σ
B
[x])
Proof. Suppose
x = b
1
∪ ∪ b
n
where each b
i
is an atom of
˙
(.
So B Sum(b
1
, . . . , b
n
, x) since B DISJ
∪
So o
B
Sum(σ
B
[b
1
], . . . , σ
B
[b
n
], σ
B
[x])
So o
A
Sum(g(σ
B
[b
1
]), . . . , g(σ
B
[b
n
]), g(σ
B
[x])) since o
A
⊆ o
B
But g(σ
B
[b]) = σ
A
[f(b)] by the choice of f(b).
So o
A
Sum(σ
A
[f(b
1
)], . . . , σ
A
[f(b
n
)], g(σ
B
[x]))
But / Sum(f(b
1
), . . . , f(b
n
), f(x)) since / DISJ
∪
So o
A
Sum(σ
A
[f(b
1
)], . . . , σ
A
[f(b
n
)], σ
A
[f(x)])
So g(σ
B
[x]) = σ
A
[f(x)] since o
A
UNIQ
+
66 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
5.2 Prime models for CA
For each total, congruous remainder function, f, we want to ﬁnd a prime model,
Q
f
, for CAI
f
. All of these prime models can be deﬁned over the class, Q, of
sets near quasicongruence classes (see section 3.2). For diﬀerent remainder
functions, we need to assign diﬀerent size relations over Q. Section 5.2.1 deﬁnes
the structures Q
f
and veriﬁes that each satisﬁes the respective theory, CAI
f
.
Section 5.2.2 deﬁnes, for each model of CAI
f
, a submodel, or shell. Section
5.2.3 shows that Q
f
is isomorphic to the shell of any model of CAI
f
.
5.2.1 The standard protomodels
The construction here is a more elaborate version of the construction of Q in
chapter 3 (see 3.2.19). Q turns out to be Q
f
, where f(n) = 0 for all n. As in
the case of Q, the models Q
f
and their copies in arbitrary models of CAI are
unions of chains.
The sizes assigned to elements of Q to induce Q
f
for a total, congruous
remainder function, f, are more elaborate than those used in the deﬁnition of
Q (see 3.2.22), but they are employed in substantially the same way:
Deﬁnition 5.2.1.
a. A size is an ordered pair ¸ρ, δ), where both ρ and δ are rational.
b. If θ
1
= ¸ρ
1
, δ
1
) and θ
2
= ¸ρ
2
, δ
2
) are sizes, then
(i) θ
1
< θ
2
iﬀ ρ
1
< ρ
2
or ρ
1
= ρ
2
and δ
1
< δ
2
.
(ii) θ
1
+θ
2
= ¸ρ
1
+ρ
2
, δ
1
+δ
2
)
(cf 3.2.22)
To assign sizes for Q
f
we rely on the representation of sets in Q deﬁned in
3.2.24. Q
f
, unlike Q, assigns diﬀerent sizes to the ncongruence classes for a
given n.
Deﬁnition 5.2.2. If f is total and congruous, then
a. If x is an ncongruence class, x = [nk +i], then
θ
f
(x) =
_
¸
1
n
,
n−f(n)
n
), if i < f(n),
¸
1
n
,
−f(n)
n
), if f(n) ≤ i.
b. If x ∈ QC
n
, so that x is the disjoint union of ncongruence classes,
x
1
∪ . . . ∪ x
k
then
θ
f
(x) = θ
f
(x
1
) + +θ
f
(x
k
)
5.2. PRIME MODELS FOR CA 67
c. If x is ﬁnite, then
θ
f
(x) = ¸0, [x[)
d. If x ∈ Q, so that x can be represented as
(C(x) ∪ ∆
1
(x)) −∆
2
(x)
as in 3.2.24, then
θ
f
(x) = θ
f
(C(x)) +θ
f
(∆
1
(x)) −θ
f
(∆
2
(x))
= θ
f
(C(x)) +¸0, [∆
1
(x)[) −¸0, [∆
2
(x)[)
= θ
f
(C(x)) +¸0, [∆
1
(x)[ −[∆
2
(x)[)
Intuitively, all ncongruence classes are assigned sizes ¸1/n, δ), but δ is no
longer 0 in all cases, as in Q. Instead, the ﬁrst f(n) ncongruence classes are
each one atom larger that the remaining (n −f(n)) ncongruence classes.
The desired models of CAI may now be deﬁned:
Deﬁnition 5.2.3. If f is total and congruous, then the standard proto
model for f is Q
f
, where
˙
Q
{
= Q
Q
f
x < y iﬀ θ
f
(x) < θ
f
(y)
Q
f
x ∼ y iﬀ θ
f
(x) = θ
f
(y)
Q
f
Unit(x) iﬀ θ
f
(x) = ¸0, 1)
Q
f
Sum(x, y, z) iﬀ θ
f
(z) = θ
f
(x) +θ
f
(y)
(cf 3.2.27)
To verify that the structure Q
f
is a model of CAI
f
, for total and congruous
f, we exhibit each such model as the union of a chain of models.
Deﬁnition 5.2.4. If f is total and congruous, then Q
f,n
is the submodel
of Q
f
whose domain is Q
n
.
Fact 5.2.5. If f is total and congruous and n > 0, then Q
f,n
BASIC.
Proof. The proof can be obtained from the proof of Theorem 3.2.29 by substi
tuting:
Q
f,n
for Q
n
,
θ
f
(x) for θ(x),
ρ
f
(x) for ρ(x), and
δ
f
(x) for δ(x)
68 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
The following notion is helpful in understanding our constructions.
Deﬁnition 5.2.6. Suppose / BASIC, x ∈
˙
/, and 0 ≤ m < n. Then an
(n.m)partition of x in / is a sequence x
1
, . . . , x
n
, where
a. x = x
1
∪ . . . ∪ x
n
b. If 0 < i < j ≤ n, then x
i
∩ x
j
= ∅, and
c. The x
i
are approximately the same size:
(i) If 0 < i < j ≤ m, then x
i
∼ x
j
,
(ii) If m < i < j ≤ n, then x
i
∼ x
j
,
(iii) If 0 < i ≤ m < j ≤ n, then Sum(x
i
, a, x
j
), for any atom a,
In other words, x is partitioned among n pairwise disjoint sets which are
roughly the same size: each of the ﬁrst m is one atom larger than each of
the remaining n −m. If 0 < i ≤ m, x
i
is called a charmed nfactor of x;
for i > m, x
i
is a common nfactor of x.
The sequence Q
f,n
does not constitute a chain of models. For example Q
f,3
is not an extension of Q
f,2
. But this sequence does harbor a chain of models:
Fact 5.2.7. If n > m, then Q
f,n!
⊆ Q
f,m!
.
Proof. It will be clearer, and easier, to establish this by example rather than by
formal proof. Letting n = 2 and m = 3, we want to show that the 2congruence
classes have the same size relations in Q
f,6
as they do in Q
f,2
, for any f. The
other elements of Q
f,6
will then fall into place, since size relations are determined
by the representations of each set, x, as C(x), ∆
1
(x), and ∆
2
(x).
Suppose that f(2) = 0, so that
Q
f,2
[2n] ∼ [2n + 1]
Since f is congruous, f(6) ∈ ¦0, 2, 4¦. If f(6) = 0, then all of the 6congruence
classes are common. If f(6) = 2, then [6n] and [6n + 1] are the only charmed 3
congruence classes. If f(6) = 4, then all of the 3congruence classes are charmed
except for [6n + 4] and [6n + 5].
In any case, [2n] will include the same number of charmed 3congruence
classes as [2n + 1], so
Q
f,6
[2n] ∼ [2n + 1]
Suppose, however that f(2) = 1, so that
Q
f,2
[2n] is one atom larger than [2n + 1]
Here, f(6) ∈ ¦1, 3, 5¦, since f is congruous. In any case, [2n] contains exactly
one more charmed congruence class than [2n + 1], so
Q
f,6
[2n] is one atom larger than [2n + 1]
So it goes in general.
5.2. PRIME MODELS FOR CA 69
Fact 5.2.7 allows us to regard Q
f
as the union of a chain of models:
Fact 5.2.8. If f is total and congruous, then
Q
f
=
_
n>0
Q
f,n!
Fact 5.2.9. If f is total and congruous, then
a. Q
f
BASIC
b. Q
f
ADIV
k
, for k > 0
c. Q
f
MOD
n,f(n)
, for n > 0
d. Q
f
CAI
f
Proof.
a. BASIC is a universalexistential theory; so it is preserved under unions of
chains. (See Appendix, Fact B.5).
b. Each ncongruence class can be partitioned into k nkcongruence classes.
c. Q
f,n
MOD
n,f(n)
, by deﬁnition. Since MOD
n,f(n)
is an existential sen
tence, it is preserved under extensions.
d. Immediate from (a), (b), and (c).
5.2.2 Shells of models
To embed the model Q
f
into an arbitrary model, /, of CAI
f
, we must ﬁnd a
smallest submodel, B, of / which satisﬁes CAI. Clearly, the basis of /, call it
x
0
, must be included in B, since the symbol I must refer to the same set in the
submodel as it does in the model. But, if the basis of / is in
˙
B and B CAI,
then
˙
B must contain two disjoint sets of roughly the same size whose union is
the basis of /, x
0
. Pick such a pair, x
1
and x
2
, to include in
˙
B. Whether these
are exactly the same size or diﬀer by an atom depends on whether / MOD
2,0
or / MOD
2,1
.
B must also satisfy ADIV
3
. We can aim for this by placing in
˙
B three disjoint
sets, x
11
, x
12
, and x
13
whose union is x
1
and another three disjoint sets, x
21
,
x
22
, and x
23
whose union is x
2
. The existence of such sets is assured because
/ ADIV
3
. Again, the exact size relations will be determined by which MOD
principles are satisﬁed in /. Insuring that x
1
and x
2
are each divisible by 3,
also guarantees that x
0
is divisible by 3: the three unions
x
11
∪ x
21
, x
12
∪ x
22
, and x
13
∪ x
23
will be roughly the same size and will exhaust x
0
.
70 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
We can continue this process indeﬁnitely, dividing each set introduced at
stage n into n + 1 roughly equal subsets at stage n + 1. This will produce an
inﬁnite tree, bearing sets. The deeper a node is in this tree, the smaller the set
it bears and the greater the number of successors among which this set will be
partitioned.
This great tree of sets will not form a boolean algebra, nor will it be closed
under ﬁnite unions. A boolean algebra could be obtained by including both the
node sets and their ﬁnite unions, but this would still not be an atomic boolean
algebra, which is what we are looking for. We cannot correct for this problem
by including in
˙
B all atoms of /: / may have uncountably many atoms while B,
to be a prime model, must be countable. We leave the solution of this problem
to the formal construction.
The formal proof proceeds as follows: First, we deﬁne a tree, i.e. the set of
nodes on which we shall hang both the components of the successive partitions
described above and the atoms of the submodel being constructed. Second, we
present the construction which, given a model / of CAI
f
, assigns a node set
A
λ
and a node atom, a
λ
, to each node, λ. Third, we deﬁne the shell of / as
the submodel of / generated by the collection of node sets and node atoms. In
the next section, we show that the shell of / is isomorphic to Q
f
.
First, the tree:
Deﬁnition 5.2.10.
a. A node is a ﬁnite sequence ¸n
1
, . . . , n
k
), where k > 0 and for all i ≤ k,
n
i
< i. (The variables λ and κ range over nodes.)
b. If λ = ¸n
1
, . . . , n
k
), then
(i) The length, or depth, of λ, L(λ) is k.
(ii) If 1 ≤ i ≤ k, then λ(i) = n
i
.
(iii) λ • m = ¸n
1
, . . . , n
k
, m)
c. λ extends κ iﬀ L(λ) > L(κ) and, for 1 ≤ i ≤ L(κ), λ(i) = κ(i).
d. λ 0extends κ iﬀ λ extends κ and, for L(κ) < i ≤ L(λ), λ(i) = 0.
Nodes constitute the vertices of an inﬁnite tree in which ¸0) is the root and
λ dominates κ iﬀ κ extends λ. The number of immediate descendants of a node
grows as the depth of the node increases.
We shall now assign a set to each node by repeatedly partitioning the basis
of /. At the same time we shall assign an atom to each node.
Deﬁnition 5.2.11. Given / = /
f
CAI
f
, where f is a total, congruous
remainder function:
a. Let A
0
be the basis of /, and let a
0
be any atom of /.
5.2. PRIME MODELS FOR CA 71
b. Suppose that A
λ
and a
λ
have been chosen. Let m = L(λ) and let
k =
f((m+ 1)!) −f(m!)
m!
Since f is congruous, k is an integer (see Deﬁnition 3.3.7e). Let
A
λ•0
, . . . , A
λ•m
be an (m+1, k) partition of A
λ
if A
λ
is common or an (m+1, k +1)
partition of A
λ
if A
λ
is charmed. Fact 5.2.12 guarantees that such
partitions exist. In either case, choose A
λ•0
so that it contains a
λ
.
This is always possible because A
λ
contains a
λ
.
c. Let a
λ•0
= a
λ
. If 0 < i ≤ m, let a
λ•i
be any atomic subset of A
λ•i
.
The sets A
λ
will be referred to as node sets and the atoms a
λ
as node
atoms.
Fact 5.2.12. Suppose / CAI
f
, n > 0, m > 0, and
k =
f(nm) −f(n)
n
Then
a. x has an (m, k)partition iﬀ / Mod
m,k
(x)
b. Every common nfactor of
˙
/ has an (m, k)partition.
c. Every charmed nfactor of
˙
/ has an (m, k + 1)partition.
Proof.
a. Mod
m,k
(x) says that x has an (m, k)partition.
b. All common nfactors are the same size and satisfy the same Mod
m,k
predicate. So, suppose that each common nfactor has k charmed m
factors and m−k common mfactors.
By (a), / has f(n) charmed nfactors and n − f(n) common nfactors.
Partitioning each of the nfactors into m subsets of roughly the same size
yields an nmpartition of /; the charmed mfactors of the nfactors are
the charmed nm factors of / and the common mfactors of the nfactors
are the common nm factors of /.
Each of the common n factors has k charmed mfactors and each of the
charmed nfactors has k + 1 charmed mfactors. In all, there are
(n −f(n))k +f(n)(k + 1)
=nk +f(n)
72 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
charmed mfactors among the nfactors of /.
But, by (a) again, there are f(nm) charmed nmfactors of /. So
f(nm) = nk +f(n)
and k = (f(nm) −f(n))/n
c. Immediate from (b), since every charmed nfactor is one atom larger than
each common nfactor.
The facts listed in 5.2.13 should clarify this constuction. All of them can be
established by induction on the depth of nodes.
Fact 5.2.13.
a. A
λ
⊂ A
κ
iﬀ κ extends λ or κ = λ.
b. If A
λ
= A
κ
, then κ = λ.
c. There are n! nodes (and, hence, node sets) of depth n.
d. If i ,= j, then A
λ•i
∩ A
λ•j
= ∅.
e. Any two node sets of the same depth are disjoint.
f. Each node set is the disjoint union of its immediate descendants.
g. Each node set is the disjoint union of all of its descendants at any
given depth.
h. a
λ
⊂ A
κ
iﬀ λ extends κ.
i. a
λ
= a
κ
iﬀ one of λ and κ 0extends the other.
j. Every node set contains inﬁnitely many node atoms.
k. For any n, the node sets of depth n form an (n!, f(n!))partition of
the basis of /.
Proof. We demonstrate (k) by induction on n.: If n = 1, then n! = 1, f(n!) = 0,
and A
λ
0
is the basis of /. So (k) holds because any set is a (1,0)partition of
itself.
Assume that (k) holds for n. Then (k) also holds for n+1: each node set of
depth n has n + 1 immediate descendants; so, there are (n!)(n + 1) = (n + 1)!
node sets of depth n + 1.
5.2. PRIME MODELS FOR CA 73
Furthermore, f(n!) of the nfactors are charmed and n! −f(n!) are common.
By Fact 5.2.12, each charmed nfactor has an (n + 1, k + 1)partition and each
common nfactor has an (n + 1, k)partition, where
k =
f(n!(n + 1)) −f(n!)
n!
=
f((n + 1)!) −f(n!)
n!
(substituting n! for n and n + 1 for m).
So, there are
(k + 1)f(n!) charmed n + 1 factors from the charmed nfactors
and k(n! −f(n!)) charmed n + 1 factors from the common nfactors
In all, then , the number of charmed nfactors is:
(k + 1)f(n!) +k(n! −f(n!))
= kf(n!) +f(n!) +n!k −f(n!)k
= f(n!) +n!k
= f(n!) +f((n!)(n + 1)) −f(n!)
= f(n!)(n + 1))
= f((n + 1)!)
So, the n+1 factors of the nfactors of the basis form an ((n+1)!, f((n+1)!))
partition of the basis. That is to say, (k) holds for n + 1.
Given a collection of node sets, A
λ
, and nodeatoms, a
λ
, from a model, /,
of CAI
f
, we can now construct a submodel, B, of / which is isomorphic to Q
f
.
Deﬁnition 5.2.14. Suppose f is total and congruous, that / CAI
f
and
A
λ
and a
λ
are the node sets and nodeatoms of / produced by construction
5.1.12. Then, the shell of / is the submodel of / generated by ¦A
λ
, a
λ
¦.
For the remainder of this chapter, we will regard as ﬁxed:
a. f, a total, congruous remainder function
b. /, a model of CAI
f
,
c. ¦A
λ
, a
λ
¦, a set of node sets and nodeatoms produced by the construction
above.
d.
ˆ
/, the shell of / generated from ¦A
λ
, a
λ
¦
74 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
To show that
ˆ
/ · Q
f
, we need a sharper characterization of the elements
of
ˆ
/. Recall from 3.2.24 that each member, x, of Q has a unique representation
as
(C(x) ∪ ∆
1
(x)) −∆
2
(x)
where C(x) is a quasicongruence class, ∆
1
(x) and ∆
2
(x) are ﬁnite sets and
∆
1
(x) ∩ C(x) = ∅
∆
1
(x) ∩ ∆
2
(x) = ∅
∆
2
(x) ⊆ C(x)
We can obtain a similar representation for elements of
ˆ
/: the node sets play
the role of (some of) the congruence classes; ﬁnite unions of node sets correspond
to the quasicongruence classes; ﬁnite sets of nodeatoms correspond to the ﬁnite
subsets in Q.
Deﬁnition 5.2.15.
a. x is a quasinodal set of / iﬀ it is the union of ﬁnitely many node
sets (iﬀ it is the union of ﬁnitely many node sets at a given depth).
b. x is an /ﬁnite set iﬀ it is a ﬁnite set of node atoms.
c. If x ∈ A and y ∈ A, then x is /near y iﬀ both x − y and y − x are
/ﬁnite sets,
(cf. 3.2.143.2.18)
Still following in the footsteps of chapter 3, we can characterize
˙
ˆ
A as the
collection of sets /near quasinodal sets. Analogues of 3.2.15 through 3.2.18
obtain for /nearness.
Fact 5.2.16.
a. x ∈
˙
ˆ
A iﬀ x is /near some quasinodal set of /.
b.
ˆ
/ is an atomic boolean algebra whose atoms are the nodeatoms a
λ
.
c. If x ∈
˙
ˆ
A, then x has a unique representation as
(C(x) ∪ ∆
1
(x)) −∆
2
(x)
where C(x) is a quasinodal set disjoint from ∆
1
(x) and including
∆
2
(x), both of which are /ﬁnite sets.
Proof.
a. (⇒)
ˆ
/ is generated from node sets and node atoms via the boolean oper
ations, each of which preserves /nearness to quasinodal sets.
(⇐)
ˆ
/ must contain ﬁnite unions of node sets as well as /ﬁnite sets; so it
must also contain sets obtained by adding or removing /ﬁnite sets from
quasinodal sets.
5.2. PRIME MODELS FOR CA 75
b. The proof parallels that of Theorem 3.2.21 exactly.
c. Let C(x) be the quasinodal set which is /near x (see 3.2.23); Let
∆
1
(x) = x −C(x); and, let ∆
2
(x) = C(x) −x.
5.2.3 The embeddings
To embed Q
f
into /, we ﬁrst describe Q in terms of node sets and node atoms.
In eﬀect, we are performing the construction 5.2.12 on Q
f
, but with two dif
ferences: ﬁrst, we are stipulating which (n, m)partitions to use at each level;
second, we are selecting node atoms so that every singleton in Q is the node
atom for some node. This latter condition guarantees that the shell of Q
f
will
be Q
f
itself.
Deﬁnition 5.2.17. Suppose λ is a node. Then
a. If L(λ) = k, then
Q
λ
= [k!n +m]
where
m =
k
i=1
λ(i)(i −1)!
b. The depth of Q
λ
is L(λ).
Examples.
Q
0
= [n]
Q
0,0
= [2n]
Q
0,1
= [2n + 1]
Q
0,1,0
= [6n + 1]
Q
0,0,2
= [6n + 4]
Q
0,1,2
= [6n + 5]
Deﬁnition 5.2.18.
a. ι(λ) = the least n ∈ Q
λ
.
b. q
λ
= ¦ι(λ)¦
Fact 5.2.19.
a. If λ = ¸n
1
, . . . , n
k
), then
ι(λ) =
k
i=1
(i −1)!n
i
76 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
b. ι(λ) = ι(κ) iﬀ λ = κ or one 0extends the other.
c. For every n, there’s a λ such that n = ι(λ).
d. For every n, there are inﬁnitely many λ such that n = ι(λ).
e. For every n, there’s a λ such that n = ι(κ) iﬀ κ = λ or κ 0extends
λ.
Fact 5.2.20.
a. At each depth, n, the ι(λ) take on all and only values less than n!.
b. If ι(λ) = k, then all nodes along the leftmost branch descending from
λ also have the value k. These are the only nodes below λ with the
value k.
c. Every natural number is the value of all and only those nodes along
the leftmost branch descending from some node.
Though for a given natural number n, there will be inﬁnitely many nodes λ
for which ι(λ) = n, we can associate with each natural number a shortest (i.e.
shallowest) node for which ι(λ) = n.
Deﬁnition 5.2.21. λ
n
= the shortest λ such that ι(λ) = n.
Fact 5.2.22.
a. ι(λ
n
) = n
b. λ extends λ
ι(λ)
c. λ
ι(λn)
= λ
n
d. λ
ι(λ)
= λ iﬀ λ =< 0 > or λ(L(λ)) ,= 0 (ie a node, λ, will be the highest
node with a certain value just in case λ is not the leftmost immediate
descendant of its parent.)
Each of the points listed in Fact 5.2.13 hold for the sets Q
λ
and q
λ
. That
is to say, the Q
λ
can be regarded as node sets and the q
λ
as node atoms
for any model Q
f
. Notice, especially, that 5.2.13k holds.
We may, ﬁnally, deﬁne the embedding of Q
f
into /:
Fact 5.2.23. If x ∈ Q, there is a unique y ∈
˙
ˆ
A such that
∀λ(q
λ
⊆ x ↔ a
λ
⊆ y)
Proof. There is at most one such y, by Fact 5.2.16. To show that there is such
a y, suppose ﬁrst that x ∈ QC.
Then there is some n such that
x = x
1
∪ ∪ x
k
5.2. PRIME MODELS FOR CA 77
where each x
i
is an (n!)congruence class and hence a node set in Q
f
. So
x = Q
λ1
∪ ∪ Q
λ
k
Now, let
y = A
λ1
∪ ∪ A
λ
k
So y ∈
˙
ˆ
A and:
q
λ
⊂ x iﬀ q
λ
⊂ Q
λ
i
, for some i
iﬀ λ extends λ
i
by 5.2..13h
iﬀ a
λ
⊂ A
λi
iﬀ a
λ
⊂ y.
If x is not a quasicongruence class, then
x = (x
∪ ∆
1
(x)) −∆
2
(x)
where x
is a quasicongruence class. Let y
be the element of
˙
ˆ
A corresponding
to x
, as described above, and let
y = (y
∪ ¦ a
λ
[ q
λ
⊆ ∆
1
(x) ¦) −¦ a
λ
[ q
λ
⊆ ∆
2
(x) ¦
Deﬁnition 5.2.24. The nodal embedding of Q into
˙
/ is deﬁned by letting
g(x ∈ Q) be the y ∈
˙
ˆ
A such that
∀λ(a
λ
⊆ y ↔ q
λ
⊆ x)
Fact 5.2.25.
a. If x ∈ Q, then
g(x) = (g(C(x)) ∪ g(∆
1
(x))) −g(∆
2
(x))
b. g is oneone.
c. g maps Q onto
˙
ˆ
A.
Proof.
a. Immediate from the proof of 5.2.23.
b. Suppose g(x) = y = g(x
). Then
∀λ(q
λ
⊆ x ↔ a
λ
⊆ y ↔ q
λ
⊆ x
)
But every integer is ι(λ) for some λ, so x = x
.
78 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
c. Obvious.
Theorem 5.2.26. The nodal embedding, g, of Q into / is an isomorphism
of Q
f
onto
ˆ
/.
Proof.
a.
Q
f
x ⊆ y iﬀ ∀λ(q
λ
⊂ x → q
λ
⊂ y)
iﬀ ∀λ(a
λ
⊆ g(x) → a
λ
⊆ g(y)) (by 5.2.24)
iﬀ
ˆ
/ g(x) ⊆ g(y) (by 5.2.16)
b. As in (a), g can be shown to preserve ∅, I, unions, intersections, relative
complements, and proper subsets.
c. Let nc(z, n) be the number of charmed node sets of level n contained in
C(z). And let n, below, be the least k such that x and y are both unions
of node sets of depth k.
Q
f
x ∼ y iﬀ θ
f
(x) = θ
f
(y)
iﬀ nc(x, n) −([∆
1
(x)[ −[∆
2
(x)[)
= nc(y, n) −([∆
1
(y)[ −[∆
2
(y)[)
iﬀ nc(g(x), n) −([g(∆
1
(x))[ −[g(∆
2
(x))[)
= nc(g(y), n) −([g(∆
1
(y))[ −[g(∆
2
(y))[)
since Q
λ
is charmed iﬀ A
λ
is charmed
and g preserves boolean relations
iﬀ / g(x) ∼ g(y)
iﬀ
ˆ
/ g(x) ∼ g(y) since
ˆ
/ ⊆ /
d.
Q
f
x < y iﬀ Q
f
x ∼ x
⊂ y
for some x
∈ Q since Q
f
REP
<
iﬀ / g(x) ∼ g(x
) ⊂ g(y) by (b) and (c)
iﬀ / g(x) < g(y) since / SUBSET, INDISC
∼
iﬀ
ˆ
/ g(x) < g(y) since
ˆ
/ ⊆ /
5.3. SUMMARY 79
e.
Q
f
Sum(x, y, z) iﬀ Q
f
(x
∪ y
= z
∧ x ∼ x
∧ y ∼ y
∧ x
∩ y
= ∅) since Q
f
DEF
+
iﬀ
ˆ
/ (g(x
) ∪ g(y
) = g(z)
∧ g(x) ∼ g(x
)
∧ g(y) ∼ g(y
)
∧ g(x
) ∩ g(y
) = ∅) by (b) and (c)
iﬀ / (g(x
) ∪ g(y
) = g(z)
∧ g(x) ∼ g(x
)
∧ g(y) ∼ g(y
)
∧ g(x
) ∩ g(y
) = ∅)
iﬀ / Sum(g(x), g(y), g(z)) since / DEF
+
iﬀ
ˆ
/ Sum(g(x), g(y), g(z)) since
ˆ
/ ⊆ /
So, each model of CAI
f
has a submodel isomorphic to Q
f
, and we may
conclude:
Corollary 5.2.27. If f is total and congruous, then CAI
f
has a prime
model.
5.3 Summary
We can now draw our ﬁnal conclusions about CA, CS, and their completions.
Theorem 5.3.1. If f is a total, congruous remainder function, then CAI
f
is consistent and complete.
Proof. CAI
f
is consistent because f is congruous, by 3.3.12c. Since CAI
f
is
model complete, by 5.1.6, and has a prime model, by 5.2.27, the prime model
test (Appendix, Fact C.3) applies. So CAI
f
is complete.
Corollary 5.3.2. It T is a completion of CAI, then T ≡ CAI
f
, for some
congruous f.
Proof. For each n > 0, T ¬ MOD
n,i
for exactly one i, 0 ≤ i < n:
Since T is complete, T ¬ MOD
n,i
or T ¬ MOD
n,i
for each such i. But if
T ¬ (MOD
n,0
∧ . . . ∧ MOD
n,n−1
), then T is inconsistent, since T ¬ CAI and
CAI ¬ DIV
n
. Hence T ¬ MOD
n,i
for at least one one i, 0 ≤ i < n.
But suppose T ¬ MOD
n,i
and T ¬ MOD
n,j
where 0 ≤ i ,= j < n. Again, T
would be inconsistent, for CA ¬ MOD
n,i
→ MOD
n,j
(see Lemma 3.3.11).
80 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
So, let f(n) = m iﬀ T ¬ MOD
n,m
. Then T ¬ CAI
f
and, since CAI
f
is
complete, CAI
f
¬ T.
Corollary 5.3.3.
a. Every completion of CA is consistent with CS.
b. CA ≡ CS
Proof.
a. Follows from 5.3.2 and 3.3.13.
b. Follows from (a) and 3.3.2b, given that CS ¬ CA.
Theorem 5.3.4.
a. For n > 0, CS; EXACTLY
n
is decidable.
b. CS is decidable.
Proof.
a. CS; EXACTLY
n
¬ φ iﬀ /
n
φ. But /
n
is a ﬁnite model.
b. To determine whether CS ¬ φ, alternate between generating theorems of
CA and testing whether /
n
φ.
Corollary 5.3.5.
a. CSI has 2
ω
completions.
b. For total f, CSI
f
is decidable iﬀ f is decidable.
Proof.
a. There are 2
ω
remainder functions whose domain is the set of prime num
bers. Each such function is congruous, so each corresponds to a consistent
extension of CSI. By Lindenbaum’s lemma, each of these extensions has
a consistent and complete extension.
b. (⇒)If f is decidable, then CAI
f
is recursively enumerable. But CAI
f
is
complete, so it is decidable.
(⇐)To calculate f(n), determine which MOD
n,m
sentence is in CSI
f
.
Theorem 5.3.6. There is no sentence, φ, such that T = CA; φ is consistent
and T has only inﬁnite models.
5.3. SUMMARY 81
Proof. If φ is true only in inﬁnite models of CA, then φ is true in all ﬁnite
models of CA, so φ ∈ CS. But CA ≡ CS, so CA; φ is inconsistent.
Theorem 5.3.7. CS is not ﬁnitely axiomatizable.
Proof. Suppose CS ¬ φ. So CA ¬ φ and, by compactness, (BASIC ∪ T) ¬ φ
for some ﬁnite set of ADIV
n
principles, T = ¦ ADIV
n
[ n ∈ J ¦. Let K =
¦ n [ every prime factor of n is a member of J ¦.
Let / be a model with domain
k∈K
Q
k
, in which size relations are deter
mined in accordance with the size function, θ, deﬁned in 3.2.26. We claim the
following without proof:
/ BASIC (1)
/ ADIV
j
for all j ∈ J (2)
/ ADIV
k
(3)
By (1) and (2), / (BASIC ∪ T), so / φ. But by (3), / CS. Hence
φ CS.
82 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
6
Sets of Natural Numbers
CS has standard ﬁnite models since it consists of sentences true in all such
models. It has inﬁnite models Q
n
and Q
f
. In this chapter we will show that
CS has inﬁnite standard models over T(N).
An ordering of T(N) that satisﬁes CS will not necessarily appear reasonable.
For example, some such orderings say that there are fewer even numbers than
prime numbers (see below 6.2.13). To rule out such anomalies, we introduce
a principle, OUTPACING, in section 1. OUTPACING mentions the natural
ordering of N and applies only to subsets of N. Section 2 establishes that
OUTPACING can be satisﬁed jointly with any consistent extension of CS in
a model whose domain is T(N). So CS ; OUTPACING does not ﬁx the size
relations over T(N).
6.1 The outpacing principle
Throughout this chapter, x and y will range over T(N).
Deﬁnition 6.1.1. x outpaces y just in case the restriction of x to any
suﬃciently large initial segment of N is larger than the corresponding
restriction of y, that is, iﬀ:
∃n∀m(m > n → [x
[m]
[ > [y
[m]
[)
Notice that the size comparison between the two restricted sets will always
agree with the comparison of their normal cardinalities since all initial segments
of N are ﬁnite.
We employ this notion to state a suﬃcient condition for one set of natural
numbers to be larger than another:
OUTPACING. If x outpaces y, then x > y.
The general motivation behind this principle should be familiar. We extrapolate
from well understood ﬁnite cases to puzzling inﬁnite cases. But we should also
83
84 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
emphasize, again, that this extrapolation cannot be done in any straightfor
ward, mechanical way without risking contradiction. We cannot, for example,
strengthen the conditional to a biconditional, thus:
(1) x > y iﬀ x outpaces y.
This revised principle conﬂicts with CS, for outpacing is not a quasilinear
ordering. For example, neither [2n] nor [2n + 1] outpaces the other since each
initial segment ¦0, . . . , 2n + 1¦ of N contains n evens and n odds. But the two
are discernible under outpacing, since [2n] outpaces [2n + 2] while [2n + 1] does
not.
There is another point that underlines the need for care in extrapolating
from ﬁnite cases to inﬁnite cases: we cannot just use (2):
(2) If, given any ﬁnite subset z of N, x restricted to z is larger
than y restricted to z, then x > y.
Though (2) is true, its antecedent is only satisﬁed when y ⊂ x.
So, there are many statements that assert of inﬁnite cases what is true of
ﬁnite cases. Some of these conﬂict with one another. Others are too weak to
be helpful. It is doubtful whether there is any mechanical way to decide which
of these statements are true. The best we can do is propose plausible theories,
determine whether they are consistent, and see how far they go.
Deﬁnition 6.1.0. / is an outpacing model iﬀ
˙
/ = T(N)
/ BASIC, and
/ OUTPACING
There is a slight diﬃculty in saying that an interpretation of L
C<
satisﬁes
OUTPACING . Since OUTPACING involves the < relation over N, it cannot
be expressed in L
C<
. We shall ﬁnesse this problem by regarding OUTPACING
as the (very large) set of sentences
¦ b < a [ a outpaces b ¦
Fact 6.1.1. Every outpacing model satisﬁes the following
a. [2n] > [3n]
b. [3n] > [4n] > [5n] > . . .
c. If k > 0, then [kn] >
_
n
2
¸
Proof.
a. [2n] has at least (k−1)/2 members less than or equal to k for any given k.
[3n] has at most k/3+1 such members. If k > 4, then (k −1)/2 > k/3+1
6.1. THE OUTPACING PRINCIPLE 85
b. Similar to (1).
c. If m = k
2
, both [kn] and
_
n
2
¸
have exactly k members less than m. For
m > k(k + 1), N
[m]
will have more members in [kn] than in
_
n
2
¸
.
Fact 6.1.2. Every outpacing model satisﬁes the following
a. [2n] ≥ [2n + 1]
b. [2n + 1] ≥ [2n + 2]
c. If [2n] > [2n + 1], then [2n + 1] ∼ [2n + 2].
Proof.
a. By TRICH, it is suﬃcient to show that [2n] < [2n + 1]. If it were, then,
by REP
<
, there is a y such that y ∼ [2n] and y ⊂ [2n + 1]. But any
proper subset of [2n + 1] is outpaced by, and hence smaller than [2n]. Let
k be the least odd number not in y. Then [2n] leads y at k+1 and y never
catches up. So there is no y such that [2n] ∼ y ⊂ [2n + 1].
b. Similar to that of (1).
c. Note that [2n] = [2n + 2] ∪ ¦0¦ and that BASIC (*).
(*) (y ⊂ x ∧ z ≤ y ∧ Atom(z
) ∧ z ⊂ x ∧ x = z ∪ z
) → y ∼ z
Let x = [2n], y = [2n + 1], z = [2n + 2] and apply (*).
The two alternatives left open in 6.1.2 correspond to the possibilities that N
may be odd or even: if [2n] ∼ [2n + 1], then N is even, if [2n + 1] ∼ [2n + 2],
then N is odd. In section 6.2, we show that both of these possibilities can be
realized in standard models over T(N). Here, we generalize 6.1.2 to similar
cases, including other congruence classes.
Deﬁnition 6.1.3. ¸x, y) is an alternating pair iﬀ x and y are inﬁnite and
for all i > 0, x
i
< y
i
< x
i+1
.
Fact 6.1.4. If ¸x, y) is an alternating pair, then in any outpacing model:
x ∼ y ∨ x > y ∼ (x −x
1
)
Proof. The argument for 6.1.2 applies here since the only facts about [2n] and
[2n + 1] used hold by virtue of these sets forming an alternating pair.
Theorem 6.1.5. For a given k > 0, let A
i
= [kn +i] for each i < k. Then:
a. If 0 ≤ i < j < k, then ¸A
i
, A
j
) is an alternating pair.
86 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
b. There is a p, 0 < p ≤ k such that
(i) If i < j < p, then A
i
∼ A
j
.
(ii) If p ,= k, then A
0
∼ A
p
∪ ¦0¦.
(iii) If p ≤ i < k, then A
i
∼ A
p
.
(See example below).
Proof.
a. A
i
(n) = kn +i,A
j
(n) = kn +j, A
i
(n +1) = kn +i +k and i < j < k +i.
b. If A
0
> A
i
for some i, let p be the least such i; otherwise, let p = k.
(i) For 0 ≤ i < p, ¸A
0
, A
i
) is an alternating pair. So either A
0
> A
i
or
A
0
∼ A
i
by 6.1.4. But A
0
≤ A
i
by the selection of p, so A
0
∼ A
i
. (i)
follows by TRANS
∼
.
(ii) Immediate from 6.1.4 since ¸A
0
, A
p
) is an alternating pair and A
0
>
A
p
.
(iii) A
0
> A
p
≥ A
i
if i ≥ p. So A
0
> A
i
. Hence A
i
∼ A
0
−¦0¦ ∼ A
p
. So
A
i
∼ A
p
.
Example. Let k = 4, so A
i
= [4n +i] for i = 0, 1, 2, 3. Then one of the
following situations obtains:
A
0
∼ A
1
∼ A
2
∼ A
3
> [4n + 4]
A
0
> A
1
∼ A
2
∼ A
3
∼ [4n + 4]
A
0
∼ A
1
> A
2
∼ A
3
∼ [4n + 4]
A
0
∼ A
1
∼ A
2
> A
3
∼ [4n + 4]
6.2 Models of CS and Outpacing
In this section, we construct models of CS over T(N) that satisfy OUTPACING.
Outpacing models will be constructed out of ﬁnite models of CS by a tech
nique which is very much like the ultraproduct construction common in model
theory, though the application here demands some important diﬀerences.
Deﬁnition 6.2.1.
a. L
N
, the language of subsets of N, is the ﬁrst order language which
results from adding to L
C<
, as individual constants, a name for each
subset of N.
b. /
n
is the standard ﬁnite interpretation of L
N
over T(N
[n]
) in which:
/
n
(a) = a ∩ N
[n]
= a
[n]
for each a ⊆ N.
6.2. MODELS OF CS AND OUTPACING 87
Deﬁnition 6.2.2. (cf. [Monk, Def. 18.15, p318] If X is a set and F ⊆
T(X), then
a. F has the ﬁnite intersection property iﬀ the intersection of any
ﬁnite subset of F is nonempty.
b. F is a ﬁlter over X iﬀ
(i) F ,= ∅
(ii) If a ∈ F and a ⊆ b, then b ∈ F, and
(iii) If a ∈ F and b ∈ F, then a ∩ b ∈ F
c. F is an ultraﬁlter over X iﬀ
(i) F is a ﬁlter over X
(ii) X ∈ F, and
(iii) if Y ⊆ X, then either Y ∈ F or (X −Y ) ∈ F.
d. An ultraﬁlter, F, over X is principal iﬀ there is some x ∈ F such
that F = ¦ a ⊆ X [ x ∈ a ¦
Fact 6.2.3.
a. A nonprincipal ultraﬁlter contains no ﬁnite sets. [Bell, Ch.6, lemma
1.3, p.108]
b. A nonprincipal ultraﬁlter over X contains all coﬁnite subsets of X.
c. If F ⊆ T(X) and F has the ﬁnite intersection property, then there is
an ultraﬁlter over X which includes F. [Monk, Prop. 18.18, p.319]
d. If Y ⊆ X and Y is inﬁnite, then there is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter
over X which contains Y .
Deﬁnition 6.2.4. If F is an ultraﬁlter over N, then /
F
is the interpreta
tion of L
C<
in which
a.
˙
/
F
= T(N),
b. /
F
a < b iﬀ
_
k [ a
[k]
< b
[k]
_
∈ F, and similarly for other predicates.
c. Boolean symbols receive the usual interpretation.
Our main result is that if F is nonprincipal, then /
F
is an outpacing model.
Theorem 6.2.5. If F is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter over N, then
a. If τ is a term of L
N
, then
/
k
(τ) = /
F
(τ) ∩ A
k
= /
F
(τ)
[k]
88 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
b. If φ is a quantiﬁer free formula of L
N
, then
/
F
φ iﬀ ¦ k [ /
k
φ¦ ∈ F
c. If φ is a universal formula of L
N
and /
k
φ for every k, then
/
F
φ.
d. /
F
REP
<
.
e. /
F
BASIC.
f. /
F
ADIV
n
, for every n.
Proof.
a. By induction on the structure of τ:
(i) If τ is a constant, τ = a for some a ⊂ N. So A
k
(τ) = a
[n]
by 6.2.1b.
(ii) If τ = τ
1
∪ τ
2
,
/
k
(τ) = /
k
(τ
1
) ∪ /
k
(τ
2
)
= (/
F
(τ
1
) ∩ A
k
) ∪ (/
F
(τ
2
) ∩ A
k
)
= (/
F
(τ
1
) ∪ /
F
(τ
2
)) ∩ A
k
= /
F
(τ
1
∪ τ
2
) ∩ A
k
The proofs for intersections and relative complements are similar.
b. By induction on the structure of φ:
(i) If φ = a ⊂ b, then /
F
φ iﬀ a ⊂ b
If a ⊂ b, then there is a k ∈ b but not ∈ a. So if n > k, a
[n]
⊂ b
[n]
.
Hence, ¦ n [ /
F
φ¦ is coﬁnite and, by 4.2.3b, in F.
Conversely, if
_
n [ a
[n]
⊂ b
[n]
_
∈ F, then it is inﬁnite. So, there
cannot be a k in a but not in b; otherwise a
[n]
would not be included
in b
[n]
for any n greater than k. So a ⊆ b. But, clearly a ,= b, so
a ⊂ b.
(ii) If φ = a = b, then
/
F
φ iﬀ a = b
iﬀ a
[n]
= b
[n]
for all n.
iﬀ ¦ n [ /
n
a = b ¦ = N
iﬀ ¦ n [ /
n
a = b ¦ ∈ F
since if /
n
a = b and k > n, then /
k
a = b.
(iii) /
F
a < b iﬀ ¦ k [ A
k
(a < b) ¦ ∈ F. Immediate from 6.2.4b.
6.2. MODELS OF CS AND OUTPACING 89
(iv) If φ is nonatomic, then, since F is an ultraﬁlter:
/
F
φ
1
∧ φ
2
iﬀ /
F
φ
1
and /
F
φ
2
iﬀ ¦ k [ /
k
φ
1
¦ ∈ F and ¦ k [ /
k
φ
2
¦ ∈ F
iﬀ ¦ k [ /
k
φ
1
∧ φ
2
¦ ∈ F
/
F
φ iﬀ /
F
φ
iﬀ ¦ k [ /
k
φ¦ / ∈ F
iﬀ ¦ k [ /
k
φ¦ ∈ F
c.
Suppose /
k
∀xφ(x), for all k
then /
k
φ(a), for all a, for all k
So /
k
φ(a), for all k, for all a
So /
F
φ(a), for all a by (b)
So /
F
∀xφ(x)
d. Suppose /
F
(a < b). Construct a
, a subset of b, for which /
F
(a ∼ a
)
as follows:
Let K =
_
k [ a
[k]
< b
[k]
_
so, K ∈ F.
= ¦k
1
, . . . , k
i
, . . .¦ where the k
i
’s are in strictly increasing order.
Let a
0
= ∅
a
i+1
= a
i
∪
_
the n greatest members of b
[ki+1]
not in a
i
_
,
where n = [a
[ki+1]
[ −[a
i
[
a
=
_
a
i
Then a
⊂ b since each a
i
draws its new members from b.
Claim: If k ∈ K, then a
[k]
∼ a
[k]
.
Hence: /
F
a
∼ a since they are the same size over some set which
contains K and is, thus, if F.
e. Immediate from (c) and (d): BASIC is equivalent to a set of universal
sentences, together with ATOM and REP
<
. (/
F
ATOM because it
contains all singletons of natural numbers.)
f. For 0 < i ≤ n, x an inﬁnite subset of N, let x
i
= ¦ x
kn+i−1
[ k ∈ N¦.
The n sets, x
i
, partition x. Furthermore, these form an alternating n
tuple, in the manner of the congruence classes modulo n (see Theorem
6.1.5). As in 6.1.5, these sets are approximately equal in size and /
F
ADIV
n
(x).
90 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
Corollary 6.2.6. If F is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter over N, then
a. /
F
CAI, and
b. /
F
CSI
Proof.
a. Immediate from 6.2.5e and 6.2.5f.
b. Immediate from (a) and 5.3.3b.
The proof of 6.2.6 is modeled on the usual ultraproduct construction, but
is not quite the same. In the usual construction(see, for example, [Bell, pp.
8792]), a model is built by ﬁrst taking the product of all factors (in this case,
the /
k
), which results in a domain whose elements are functions from the index
set (N, here) to elements of the factors. These functions are then gathered
into equivalence classes (by virtue of agreeing almost everywhere, i.e. on some
member of the ﬁlter) and the reduced ultraproduct is deﬁned by interpreting
the language over these equivalence classes. The model so constructed, which
we’ll call
/
i
/F, has the handy property that it satisﬁes any formula which is
satisﬁed by almost all factors, and certainly any formula which is satisﬁed in all
the factors. This is handy because, given that each of the /
k
satisﬁes CS, we
can immediately conclude that
/
i
/F satisﬁes CS.
Unfortunately,
/
i
/F is not the model we wanted: its elements are not
subsets of N, but equivalence classes of functions from N to ﬁnite subsets of
N. There is, indeed, a natural mapping from subsets of N to such elements,
and this mapping would have allowed us to identify a model over T(N) as a
submodel of
/
i
/F; but only a submodel. So, had we constructed the reduced
ultraproduct, we would have then been able to infer that the part of that model
which held our interest satisﬁed all universal formulas of CS; we still would
have had to resort to special means to show that the nonuniversal formulas
were likewise satisﬁed.
Fortunately, these special means were available; the only nonuniversal ax
ioms of CAI could be veriﬁed in the constructed model more or less directly, and
the completeness proof of the last chapter allowed us to infer that all formulas
true in all of the factors are true in the model /
F
, after all.
For a given F, there will be many cases where /
F
a < b even though
b does not outpace a. This will happen whenever
_
k [ a
[k]
< b
[k]
_
∈ F but is
not coﬁnite. Consider a familiar example: Let a = [2n + 1] and b = [2n]. Then
a
[k]
< b
[k]
iﬀ k ∈ [2n], for if we count the even numbers and the odd numbers
up to some even number, there will always be one more even and if we count up
to some odd number, there will always be the same number of evens and odds.
[2n] is neither ﬁnite nor coﬁnite, so it may or may not be in F, If [2n] ∈ F,
/
F
[2n + 1] < [2n]. Otherwise, [2n + 1] ∈ F, so /
F
[2n + 1] ∼ [2n].
6.2. MODELS OF CS AND OUTPACING 91
The construction of a model /
F
from any nonprincipal ultraﬁlter, F, sug
gests that there are many outpacing models unless diﬀerent ultraﬁlters can yield
the same model. We will ﬁrst show that this qualiﬁcation is not needed.
Theorem 6.2.7. If F
1
and F
2
are distinct nonprincipal ultraﬁlters over
N, then /
F1
,= /
F2
.
Proof. (See below.)
To show this, we will show that the presence of a set in an ultraﬁlter makes a
direct, personalized contribution to the model /
F
. Putting this in another way,
there is a set of decisions that must be made in constructing an outpacing model;
each decision may go either way, though the decisions are not independent of
each other. Furthermore, each decision is made for a model /
F
by the presence
or absence of a particular set in F.
Deﬁnition 6.2.8. If x ⊆ N, then x
+
= ¦ i + 1 [ i ∈ x¦.
A pair of sets, ¸x, x
+
), can sometimes be an alternating pair, but this is not
always the case.
Fact 6.2.9. ¸x, x
+
) is an alternating pair iﬀ x is inﬁnite and there is no
n ∈ x such that (n+1) ∈ x. That is, no two consecutive numbers are in x.
Nevertheless, pairs ¸x, x
+
) are like alternating pairs in the following way:
Lemma 6.2.10. If x is inﬁnite, x1 = (x − x
+
), x2 = (x
+
− x), F is a
nonprincipal ultraﬁlter, and / = /
F
, then
a. ¸x1, x2) is an alternating pair.
b. / x ∼ x
+
or / x > x
+
∼ x −¦x
1
¦
c. / x > x
+
iﬀ x ∈ F.
Proof.
a. Let a run of x be a maximal consecutive subset of x. (So [2n] has only 1
membered runs, while N−[10n + 1] has only 9membered runs.) So, x
1
(n)
is the ﬁrst element in the nth run of x and x
2
(n) is the ﬁrst element after
the nth run of x.
b. We know from (a) that x
2
∼ x
1
or x
2
∼ x
1
−x
1
(1). But the disjoint union
of x ∩ x
+
with x
1
or x
2
, respectively, yields x or x
+
. So (b) follows from
DISJ
∪
.
c. We need only prove (*):
[x
[n]
[ > [x
+
[n]
[ iﬀ n ∈ x (*)
Informally: x
[n]
ﬁrst becomes greater than x
+
[n]
for n = x(1), since x(1) / ∈
x
+
because (x
1
−x
1
(1) ⊂ x). Throughout the ﬁrst run of x, x maintains
its lead, losing it only at the least n for which n / ∈ x (since (n−1) ∈ x, so
n ∈ x
+
). This pattern repeats during successive runs of x.
92 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
We can now prove our main result, Theorem 6.2.7:
Proof. Without loss of generality, we can suppose there is a set, x, such that
x ∈ F
1
and x / ∈ F
2
. By 6.2.10c, /
F1
x > x
+
and /
F2
x ∼ x
+
Theorem 6.2.7 allows us to improve upon some previous results. For example,
we can show that either of the alternatives in 6.2.10b can obtained for any
alternating pair.
Theorem 6.2.11.
a. If neither x nor y outpaces the other, then there is an ultraﬁlter F,
such that /
F
(x ∼ y).
b. If ¸x, y) is an alternating pair, then there is an ultraﬁlter F, such
that /
F
(x > y).
Proof.
a. Let J =
_
k [ [x
[k]
[ = [y
[k]
[
_
. Since neither x nor y outpaces the other, J
is inﬁnite. By 6.2.3d, let F be a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter which contains
J. Then /
F
x ∼ y.
b. If ¸x, y) is an alternating pair, so is ¸y, x −x(1)). So, by (a) there is an F
such that /
F
y ∼ (x −x(1). But then /
F
x > y.
Theorem 6.2.12. Every inﬁnite completion of CS has an outpacing model.
Proof. Recall that every inﬁnite completion of CS is equivalent to CSI
f
for
some total and congruous remainder function, f. (See 3.6.2.)
Given such an f, let G
k
= [kn +f(k) + 1] for each k > 0. Then (*) holds
for each k:
(*) G
k
=
_
n [ /
n
MOD
k,f(k)
_
Let G = ¦ G
k
[ k > 0 ¦.
The intersection of any ﬁnite subset, H, of G is inﬁnite. If H is a ﬁnite
subset of G, then H = ¦ G
k
[ k ∈ J ¦, where J is some ﬁnite subset of N
+
. So
H = ¦ n + 1 [ k ∈ J → n ≡ f(k) mod k ¦. But f is congruous, so the restriction
of f to the ﬁnite domain J has inﬁnitely many solutions (see 3.3.8a).
Since the intersection of any ﬁnite subset of G is inﬁnite, there is a non
principal ultraﬁlter F such that G ⊆ F. By (*), /
F
MOD
k,f(k)
, so /
F
CSI
f
.
6.2. MODELS OF CS AND OUTPACING 93
On the basis of 6.2.11 we noted that there are even and odd outpacing
models; we can now extend that observation to moduli other than 2. More
speciﬁcally, all of the possibilities listed in 6.1.5 for the relative sizes of the
kcongruence classes are obtainable in outpacing models.
This section has explored the existence and variety of outpacing models.
Three comments are in order before we turn to the common structure of out
pacing models.
First, even it T is an inﬁnite completion of CS, there is no unique outpacing
model which satisﬁes T. This would be true only if ﬁxing the congruence classes
determined whether x ∼ x
+
or x > x
+
for every x ⊆ N. That all such choices
are not determined by a remainder theory can be seen intuitively, perhaps, by
considering x =
_
n
2
¸
: any ﬁnite set of congruences has inﬁnitely many solutions
that are squares and inﬁnitely many that are not; so whether x ∈ F is an
independent choice. Also, there are only 2
ω
remainder functions while there are
2
2
ω
nonprincipal ultraﬁlters over N[Bell, Ch. 6, Theorem 1.5], each yielding a
diﬀerent outpacing model.
Second, it is not clear whether every outpacing model can be obtained by the
construction of 6.2.4. Lemma 6.2.10c may suggest that any outpacing model,
/, is /
F
for F
A
= ¦ x [ / x > x
+
¦, but it should not. To establish that / =
/
F
, both (1) and (2) are necessary.
(1) If / is an outpacing model, then F
A
is a nonprincipal ultra
ﬁlter.
(2) If F
A
= F
B
, then / = B
I have not been able to prove (1) or (2). If (1) is false, then clearly / ,= /
F
.
But even if (1) is true, two outpacing models may agree about all pairs ¸x, x
+
)
but disagree elsewhere. At most one of them is obtainable by our construction.
So (1) and (2) are open problems.
Finally, though it may be extraneous to show that OUTPACING is inde
pendent, we will do so.
Theorem 6.2.13. There are standard models of CS over T(N) which do
not satisfy OUTPACING.
Proof. Suppose that is a linear ordering under which N forms an ωsequence.
Then we could deﬁne x outpaces y as follows:
∃n∀m[n m → [ ¦ k [ k ∈ x ∧ k m¦ [ > [ ¦ k [ k ∈ x ∧ k n¦ []
and deﬁne the principle:
OUTPACING . If x outpaces y, then x > y.
Modifying 6.2.4, we could produce standard models of CS over T(N) which
satisfy OUTPACING and these will not, in general, satisfy OUTPACING.
94 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
Suppose, for example, that is the ordering:
p
1
, q
1
, . . . , p
k
, q
k
, . . .
where p is the set of prime numbers and q is its complement. In any model
of OUTPACING , p and q will be nearly the same size, as the evens and the
odds are in normal outpacing models. But the evens are much smaller than q,
so p > [2n] and OUTPACING is false in OUTPACING models.
6.3 Size and density
When number theorists talk about the sizes of sets of natural numbers, they do
not content themselves with speaking of the (Cantorian) cardinalities of these
sets. Since they often want to compare inﬁnite subsets of N, they need a more
discriminating notion.
One notion they use is asymptotic density. The asymptotic density of a
set, x, of natural numbers is the limit, if there is one, of [x
[n]
[ as n grows. For
example, the asymptotic density of [2n] is 1/2. From now on we shall use the
term ‘density’ for asymptotic density.
In this section, we compare the ordering of T(N) given by density to the
orderings given by CS and OUTPACING.
Deﬁnition 6.3.1.
a. ˆ x
i
=
x
[i]

i
, the fraction of numbers less than or equal to i that are
members of x.
b. If x ⊆ y ,= ∅, then ρ(x, y), the density of x in y, is the limit, if it
exists of
ω
lim
i=y1
ˆ x
i
/ˆ y
i
That is,
ρ(x, y) = r iﬀ ∀(δ > 0)∃n(∀i > n)(r −δ <
ˆ x
i
ˆ y
i
< r +δ)))
c. The density of x, ρ(x), is the density of of x in N, if x has a density
in N.
d. If x ⊆ y ,= ∅, then x converges in y, cvg(x, y), iﬀ x has a density in
y; otherwise, x diverges in y.
e. x converges, cvg(x), iﬀ x converges in N. x diverges iﬀ x diverges
in N.
Fact 6.3.2.
a. If x is ﬁnite, ρ(x) = 0.
6.3. SIZE AND DENSITY 95
b. If x is coﬁnite, ρ(x) = 1.
c.
ρ([2n]) = 1/2
ρ([4n] , [2n]) = 1/2
ρ([4n]) = 1/4
d. If cvg(x, y) and cvg(y, z), then cvg(x, z) and ρ(x, z) = ρ(x, y)ρ(y, z).
Fact 6.3.3.
a. There are divergent sets.
b. If 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, there is a set with density r.
c. If 0 ≤ r ≤ 1 and y is inﬁnite, there is a set with density r in y.
Proof.
a. Let x =
_
i [ ∃n(10
2n
≤ i < 10
2n+1
_
. So x contains all numbers between
0 and 9, between 100 and 999, between 10,000 and 99,999, and so forth.
If n > 1, then ˆ x
10
2n
≤ .1 and ˆ x
10
2n+1
≥ .9. So ˆ x
k
cannot have a limit.
b. Suppose r is given. Construct the set x as follows:
x
0
= ∅
x
i+1
=
_
x
i
, if ˆ x
i
≥ r;
x
i
; i + 1, otherwise.
x =
_
x
i
c. Modify the construction for (b) in the obvious ways.
Theorem 6.3.4. Suppose that both x and y converge in z. Then, if
ρ(x, z) < ρ(y, z), y outpaces x.
96 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
Proof.
Let b = (ρ(y, z) −ρ(x, z))/3
Let n
1
= the least n such that for i > n, −b < ˆ x
i
/ˆ z
i
−ρ(x, z) < b
and let n
2
= the least n such that for i > n, −b < ˆ y
i
/ˆ z
i
−ρ(y, z) < b
So for any i > n
1
+n
2
,
we have ˆ x
i
/ˆ z
i
< ρ(x, z) +b
and ˆ y
i
/ˆ z
i
> ρ(y, z) −b
But ρ(x, z) +b < ρ(y, z) −b,
So ˆ x
i
/ˆ z
i
< ˆ y
i
/ˆ z
i
So ˆ x
i
< ˆ y
i
So [x
[i]
[ < [y
[i]
[
We can use the relation between density and outpacing to draw conclusions
about densities that have nothing to do with outpacing, as in Theorem 6.3.5.
Theorem 6.3.5. If ρ(x, z
1
) < ρ(y, z
1
), and both x and y converge in z
2
,
then ρ(x, z
2
) ≤ ρ(y, z
2
)
Proof. Since ρ(x, z
1
) < ρ(y, z
1
), y outpaces x. But if ρ(x, z
2
) > ρ(y, z
2
), then x
outpaces y. So, ρ(x, z
2
) ≤ ρ(y, z
2
).
We cannot strengthen the consequent of 6.3.5 to say that ρ(x, z
2
) < ρ(y, z
2
):
Let z
1
be the set of primes, let x contain every third member of z
1
, and let y
be z
1
−x. Then ρ(x, z
1
) = 1/3 and ρ(y, z
1
) = 2/3, but ρ(x, N) = ρ(y, N) = 0.
Theorem 6.3.4 implies that in any outpacing model, sets with distinct den
sities will have distinct sizes. Even if two sets have the same density, they will
diﬀer in size if they have the same density in some common set. So, from Facts
6.3.b and (c), we can begin to appreciate how precise an ordering outpacing
models provide:
Fact 6.3.6. If / is an outpacing model, then
a. there are uncountably many sizes of sets in /, and
b. if 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, then even among sets with density r, there are uncount
ably many sizes in /.
Proof.
a. Immediate from Fact 6.3.3b and Theorem 6.3.4.
b. Let x be an inﬁnite set with density r, let y be an inﬁnite subset of x,
where ρ(y, x) = 0, and let z = x−y. There are uncountably many subsets
of y with distinct densities in y, though ρ(y
1
, x) = 0, for any y
1
⊂ y.
6.3. SIZE AND DENSITY 97
Suppose now that y
1
⊂ y, y
2
⊂ y, and ρ(y
1
) < ρ(y
2
). Then / y
1
< y
2
,
by 6.3.4. so / z ∪ y
1
< z ∪ y
2
, by DISJ
∪
.
But ρ(z ∪ y
1
) = ρ(z ∪ y
2
) = ρ(x), since z was obtained by removing from
x a set with density 0 relative to x.
6.3.1 The Convexity Problem
It’s tempting to infer from these results that the extremely ﬁne ordering of sets
by size (or, rather, any such ordering which is realized in an outpacing model)
is both a reﬁnement and a completion of the ordering suggested by density: a
reﬁnement because it preserves all diﬀerences in size which are captured by the
notion of density, a completion because all sets are located in a single, linear
ordering of sizes.
But the situation is really not so clear. It is evident that the size ordering
over T(N) in any outpacing is a reﬁnement of the ordering by cardinality: if
x has a smaller cardinal number than y, then x is smaller than y, though two
sets with the same cardinal number may have diﬀerent sizes. We can regard
the cardinality of a set in T(N) as determined by its size, though diﬀerent sizes
may yield the same cardinal number. We shall express this fact by saying that,
at least when we focus on T(N), cardinality is a function of size. (It is not at
all clear that this is true in any power set.)
Now, we want to know whether the density of a set is a function of its
size. It turns out that a negative answer is compatible with our theory (CS
and OUTPACING), while an aﬃrmative answer may or may not be consistent.
First, we will give a more precise formulation of this problem; second, we will
show that a negative answer is consistent; ﬁnally, we’ll discuss the consistency of
an aﬃrmative answer. In passing, we’ll explain why this is called the convexity
problem.
Consider (1) and (1a):
(1) If x ∼ y and ρ(x) = r, then ρ(y) = r.
(1a) If x ∼ y and ρ(x) = r and cvg(y), then ρ(y) = r.
(1a) is an immediate consequence of Theorem 6.3.4. For if y converges, there is
some r
2
= ρ(y); if r < r
2
, then x < y and if r > r
2
, then x > y. But x ∼ y, so
r
2
= r.
So, the questionable part of (1) can be expressed as (2):
(2) If x ∼ y and x converges, then y converges.
Theorem 6.3.4 insures that (1) just in case (2). Recalling that sets may have the
same density even though they diﬀer in size, we may consider two additional
formulations:
(3) If ρ(x) = ρ(y) and x < z < y, then ρ(z) = ρ(x)
98 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
(4) If ρ(x) = ρ(y) and x < z < y, then z converges.
(3) and (4) are equivalent for the same reasons that (1) and (2) are equivalent.
Fact 6.3.7. An outpacing model satisﬁes (1) iﬀ it satisﬁes (3).
Proof.
⇒ Suppose that x < y < z and ρ(x) = ρ(z).
By REP
<
, there are two sets, x
and y
, for which
x
⊂ y
⊂ z, x ∼ x
, y ∼ y
.
Since x ∼ x
and ρ(x) = ρ(z)
then ρ(x
) = ρ(z) by (1)
So ρ(z −x
) = 0
and ρ(z −y
) = 0
But y
= z −(z −y
)
So ρ(y
) = ρ(z)
So ρ(y) = ρ(z) by (1)
⇐ Suppose that x ∼ y and ρ(x) = r.
If x = ∅ or x = N, then y = x, so ρ(y) = ρ(x)
To apply (3), we need to ﬁnd two sets, x
1
and x
2
such that
ρ(x
1
) = ρ(x
2
) = r = ρ(x)
and
x
1
< y < x
2
Assuming that x ,= ∅ and x ,= N, let
x
1
= x −a, for some a ∈ x
and
x
2
= x ∪ b, for some b / ∈ x.
Then x
1
< x < x
2
, by SUBSET, and x
1
< y < x
2
, by INDISC
∼
.
Since adding or removing a single element has no eﬀect on the density of
a set,
ρ(x
1
) = ρ(x) = ρ(x
2
)
So, by (3), ρ(y) = r.
6.3. SIZE AND DENSITY 99
The question at hand is called the ‘convexity problem’ because of the for
mulation in (3). In geometry, a ﬁgure is convex if, given any two points in the
ﬁgure, any point between them (ie on the line segment from one to the other) is
also in the ﬁgure. Applying this notion in the obvious way to the size ordering,
(3) says that the class of sets having a given density is convex. By theorems
6.3.4 and 6.3.7, (1), (2) and (4) say the same thing.
We regret that the only thing we know about (3) is that it may be false:
Theorem 6.3.8. The negation of (1) is satisﬁed in some outpacing model.
Proof. Let x be a set with density r and let y be a divergent set which neither
outpaces nor is outpaced by x. Let K be
_
n [ x
[n]
= y
[n]
_
K is inﬁnite, so K is a member of some nonprincipal ultraﬁlter, F. /
F
x ∼ y,
so (1) is false in /
F
.
Open Problem: Is (1) consistent with CS and OUTPACING?
100 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS
Appendix
A Notation
A.1 Predicate Logic
The formal theories discussed in this thesis are theories with standard formal
ization, in the sense of [Tarski, p.5]. That is, they are formalized in ﬁrst order
predicate logic with identity and function symbols. The following notation is
used for the predicate calculus:
∧ and
∨ or
not
→ if ... then
↔ if and only if
= identical
,= not identical
∃x there is an x
∀x for all x
Conjunctions and disjunctions of sets of sentences are represented by:
... φ ...
φ
and
... φ ...
φ
A ﬁrst order language is determined by its nonlogical constant symbols,
in the usual way. These may be predicates, individual constants, or function
symbols. In most cases, the ranks of the symbols will accord with their familiar
uses and we do not stipulate them.
A schematic function is a function whose range is a set of formulae. DIV
n
,
for example, maps natural numbers into sentences (see 3.2.8). The arguments
of such functions are indicated by subscripts.
101
102 APPENDIX
A.2 Set Theory
For ﬁrst order languages with boolean operations and predicates, we use the
following notation:
I the universe
∅ the empty set
x ∪ y the union of x and y
x ∩ y the intersection of x and y
x −y the relative complement of y in x
x ⊆ y x is contained in y
x ⊂ y x is a proper subset of y
These symbols are also used for set theoretic relations, outside of ﬁrst order
languages.
In addition, we use the following:
x ∈ y x is a member of y
T(x) the power set of x
¦ x [ φ(x) ¦ the set of x’s which are φ
x; a the union of x and a
x
[n]
the members of x less than or equal to n
N the set of natural numbers: 0, 1, ...
N
+
N −0
Z the set of integers
ω the smallest inﬁnite cardinal
2
ω
2 to the ω
A.3 Arithmetic
For arithmetic, we use the following:
i +j i plus j
i −j i minus j
ij i times j
i
j
i to the jth power
i! i factorial
i [ j i divides j
gcd(i, j) greatest common divisor of i and j
n ≡ m mod j n is congruent to m modulo j
B. MODEL THEORY 103
We use the following notation for sets of natural numbers:
[...n...] = ¦ k [ ∃n(k = ...n...) ¦
For example:
[kn +j] = the set of numbers congruent to j modulo k
_
n
2
¸
= the set of squares of natural numbers
B Model Theory
This section lists the modeltheoretic notions and results assumed in the text
and presents our notation for these notions.
An interpretation, /, of a ﬁrst order language, L, consists of a domain,
˙
/,
and a function which assigns to each individual constant of L a member of
˙
/,
to each nplace predicate of L, a set of ntuples over
˙
/, and to each nargument
function symbol of L, an nary function deﬁned over and yielding values in
˙
/.
We assume the notion of satisfaction as deﬁned in [Chang, section 1.3] and
use
/ φ to mean that / satisﬁes φ .
Deﬁnition B.1. Familiar notions about models.
a. / is a submodel of B (/ ⊆ B).
b. B is an extension of / (/ ⊆ B).
c. The submodel of B generated by X, where X is a subset of
˙
B.
d. / is isomorphic to B (/ · B).
e. f is an isomorphic embedding of / into B.
f. B is an elementary extension of /.
g. ¦/
i
¦ is a chain of models.
h. / =
¦/
i
¦; the union of a chain of models.
Deﬁnition B.2. Notions about theories:
a. A theory is a set of ﬁrstorder sentences.
b. The language of a theory, L
T
.
c. T proves φ (T ¬ φ);
T proves T
2
(T ¬ T
2
).
d. T is complete.
e. T is consistent.
104 APPENDIX
f. T is categorical.
g. T is equivalent to T
2
(T ≡ T
2
).
Fact B.3. The following are well known facts:
a. If T ¬ φ, then some ﬁnite subset of T proves φ (compactness).
b. If T is complete and T; φ is consistent, then T ¬ φ.
c. If T is categorical, then T is complete.
Deﬁnition B.4. More familiar notions:
a. T is existential iﬀ it is equivalent to a set of prenex sentences, none
of which have universal quantiﬁers.
b. T is universal iﬀ it is equivalent to a set of prenex sentences, none
of which have existential quantiﬁers.
c. T is universalexistential iﬀ it is equivalent to a set of prenex sen
tences, each of which has all of its universal quantiﬁers preceding
any of its existential quantiﬁers.
d. φ is a primitive formula iﬀ φ is an existential formula in prenex
form whose matrix is a conjunction of atomic formulas and nega
tions of atomic formulas.
Fact B.5. Fairly familiar facts:
a. If T is existential, / T, and / ⊆ B, then B T.
b. If T is universal and / T, then any submodel of / also satisﬁes T.
c. If T is universalexistential and /
i
T, for all i > 0, then
¦/
i
¦ T.
C Model Completeness
This section presents the deﬁnition of model completeness and some basic
results needed in Chapters 4 and 5.
There are several ways to show that a theory is complete. We use only one,
which is based on A. Robinson’s notion of model completeness.
Deﬁnition C.1. T is model complete iﬀ T is consistent and for any two
models, / and B of T, / ⊆ B iﬀ / is an elementary submodel of B.
[Monk, p. 355].
A model complete theory is not necessarily complete, unless the theory has
a prime model.
Deﬁnition C.2. / is a prime model of T if / T and / can be embedded
in any model of T. [Monk, p.359]
C. MODEL COMPLETENESS 105
Fact C.3. If T is model complete and T has a prime model, then T is
complete.
To show that a theory is model complete we rely, directly or indirectly, on a
theorem of Monk’s (see 4.2.1a), which is based on some equivalent formulations
of model completeness:
Deﬁnition C.4.
a. The /expansion of L is the result of adding to L a constant for
each element of
˙
/.
b. The diagram of / is the set of atomic sentences and negations of
atomic sentences of the /expansion of the language of / which are
true in /.
Fact C.5. The following are equivalent [Monk, p. 356]:
a. T is model complete.
b. For every model, /, of T and every /expansion L
of L, the T ∪
L
diagram of L is complete.
c. If / and B are models of T, / ⊆ B, φ is a universal formula, x ∈ /,
and / φ(x), then B φ(x).
d. If / and B are models of T, / ⊆ B, φ is a primitive formula, x ∈ /,
and B φ(x), then / φ(x).
106 APPENDIX
Bibliography
[Bell] Bell and Slomson. Models and Ultraproducts. North
Holland Publishing Company, Amsterdam, 1971.
[Cantor] Cantor, G. Contributions to the Foundations of the The
ory of Transﬁnite Numbers. Dover Publications, New York,
1955.
[Chang] Chang and Keisler. Model Theory. NorthHolland Publishing
Company, Amsterdam, 1973.
[Dauben] Dauben, J.W. Georg Cantor: His Mathematics and Phi
losophy of the Inﬁnite. Princeton University Press, Prince
ton, New Jersey, 1979.
[Enderton] Enderton, H. A Mathematical Introduction to Logic. Aca
demic Press, Inc., Orlando, Florida, 1972.
[Frege] Frege, G. The Foundations of Arithmetic. Evanston, Illi
nois: Northwestern University Press, 1968.
[Griﬃn] Griﬃn, H. Elementary Theory of Numbers. McGrawHill,
New York, 1965.
[Kurosh] Kurosh, A.G. Lectures in General Algebra. Pergamon Press,
New York, 1965.
[Monk] Monk, J. D. Mathematical Logic SpringerVerlag, New York,
1975.
[Robinson] Robinson, A. and Zakon, E. Transactions of the American
Mathematical Society. 96(1960), pp. 222236.
[Russell] Russell, B. The Principles of Mathematics. George Allen
and Unwin, London, 1903. Second edition, reprinted by W.W.
Norton and Company, New York, 1937.
[Tarski] Tarski, A. Undecidable Theories. NorthHolland Publishing
Company, Amsterdam, 1968.
107
Index of Symbols
Logic
φ ∧ ψ, 101
φ ∨ ψ, 101
φ → ψ, 101
φ, 101
φ ↔ ψ, 101
∀xφ, 101
∃xφ, 101
Set Operations
x ∪ y, 102
x ∩ y, 102
x −y, 102
x; y, 102
x y, 102
T(x), 102
[x[, 102
x
[k]
, 102
ˆ x
k
, 94
Arithmetic
k [ n, 102
k!, 102
[in +j], 102
Size ordering
x ∼ y, 1
x < y, 1
x ≤ y, 1
x > y, 1
x ≥ y, 1
Model Theory
T ¬ φ, 103
T φ, 103
T
1
≡ T
2
, 103
/ φ, 103
/ φ , 103
/ ⊆ B, 103
Models and Domains
/, 103
˙
/, 103
B(/), 21
/
n
, 86
/
F
, 87
ˆ
/, 73
Q, 29
Q
f
, 67
Q
f,n
, 67
Q
n
, 29
Q
n
, 32
QC, 27
QC
n
, 27
N, 25
o
A
, 45
Z
A
, 54
´
Z
A
, 55
Sizing
˜ x, 45
C(x), 31
∆
1
(x), 31
∆
2
(x), 31
ρ(x), 32
δ(x), 32
θ(x), 32
θ
f
(x), 66
α(x), 31
β(x), 31
ρ(x, y), 94
σ
A
[x], 45
cvg(x, y), 94
108
INDEX OF SYMBOLS 109
cvg(x), 94
Node Construction
λ, 70
L(λ), 70
λ • m, 70
A
λ
, 70
a
λ
, 70
ˆ
/, 73
ι(λ), 75
q
λ
, 75
λ
n
, 76
Index of Theories
Languages
L
C
, 20
L
C<
, 20
L
<
, 20
L
N
, 86
Predicates
Abstract(x), 1
Atom(x), 20
Div
n
(x) , 36
Indisc(x, y), 10
Mod
n,m
(x), 36
Sm(x, y), 54
Sum(x, y, z), 20
Unit(x), 20
Times
n
(x, y), 36
Theories
ADIV
n
, 36
ASSOC, 46
ASSOC2, 54
ASYM
<
, 10
ASYM
F
, 10
ASYM
>
, 10
ATLEAST
n
, 23
BA, 22
BA
n
, 23
BAI, 23
BASIC, 24
BDIV
J
, 26
BDIV
n
, 26
CA, 38
CAI, 39
CAI
f
, 40
CORE, 13
CS, 21
CSI, 39
CANTOR
<
, 9
DEF
+
, 16
DEF
+
, 24
DEF
∼
, 13
DEF
>
, 10
DISJ
∪
, 24
DISJ
+
, 16
FUNC
+
, 16
DIV
J
, 26
DIV
n
, 25
EVEN, 9
EXACTLY
n
, 23
EXCORE, 18
INDISC
∼
, 10
IRREF
<
, 13
INF, 23
MAX, 46
MIN, 46
MOD
n,m
, 25
MONOT, 16
ODD, 9
OUTPACING, 83
PCA, 47
PCS, 46
PSIZE, 46
QUASI, 10
REF
∼
, 10
REP
<
, 9
RT
f
, 40
SIZE, 24
SYM
∼
, 10
T
f
, 40
TRANS
∼
, 10
TRANS
<
, 10
TRANS
>
, 10
TRICH, 13
110
INDEX OF THEORIES 111
UNIQ
−
, 54
UNIQ
+
, 54
UNIQ
∼
, 46
Zg, 51
Zgm, 51
Subject Index
/ﬁnite set, 74
/near, 74
abelian groups with identity, 51
alternating pair, 85
asymptotic density, 94
basis, 21
cancellable abelian semigroups with
identity, 51
categorical, 104
chain, 103
charmed nfactor, 68
class size, language of, 21
classes, language of, 20
common nfactor, 68
compactness, 104
complete, 103
completion, 38
congruence class, 27
congruous, 40
consistent, 103
converges, 94
density, 94
depth, 70, 75
diagram, 105
diverges, 94
elementary extension, 103
equivalent, 104
existential, 104
existential assumption, 49
expansion, 105
extends, 70
extension, 103
ﬁlter, 87
ﬁnite, 40
ﬁnite class model, 14
ﬁnite completion, 39
ﬁnite intersection property, 87
ﬁnite set model, 14
functional assumptions, 49
generated, 103
incongruous, 40
inﬁnite completion, 39
interpretation, 103
isomorphic, 103
isomorphic embedding, 103
language of
class size (L
C<
), 21
classes (L
C
), 20
size (L
<
), 21
subsets of N(L
N
), 86
language of a theory, 103
least common multiple, 36
length, 70
model complete, 104
molecule, 64
Monk mapping, 48
Monk’s Condition, 47
ncongruence class, 27
nquasicongruence class, 27
Nsemigroups, 52
near, 27
(n.m)partition, 68
nodal embedding, 77
node, 70
node atom, 70
112
SUBJECT INDEX 113
node atoms, 71
node set, 70
node sets, 71
oneone correspondence, 1
outpaces, 83
outpacing model, 84
partial, 40
PCA, 61
prime model, 104
primitive formula, 104
principal, 87
proves, 103
quasicongruence class, 27
quasilogical principles, 11
quasinodal, 74
reducible, 50
remainder function, 40
remainder theory, 40
representation principle, 12
roughly divisible, 25
run, 91
satisfaction, 103
schematic function, 101
shell, 70, 73
simple order, 51
simple translation, 48
simply reducible, 50
size, 30, 45, 66
size model, 45, 46
size, language of, 21
solution, 40
standard ﬁnite interpretation, 21
standard interpretation, 21
standard protomodel, 67
submodel, 103
subsets of N, language of, 86
τreducible, 50
theory, 103
theory of
abelian groups with identity, 51
cancellable abelian semigroups
with identity, 51
Nsemigroups, 52
Zgroups, Zg, 51
Zgroups modulo I, 52
total, 40
translation, 48
trichotomy, 12
ultraﬁlter, 87
uniformly τreducible, 50
union of a chain, 103
universal, 104
universalexistential, 104
Zgroups, Zg, 51
Zgroups modulo I, 52
0extends, 70
Fred M. Katz (fred@katz.com) Logic & Light, Inc. New York, NY 10028 USA
Sets and Their Sizes
Mathematics Subject Classiﬁcation (2001): 03E10, 54A25
c 1981, 2001 Fred M. Katz. All rights reserved. This work may not be translated or copied in whole or in part without the written permission of the publisher (Logic & Light, Inc. 400 East 84th Street, New York, NY 10028, USA), except for brief excerpts in connection with reviews or scholarly analysis. The author hereby grants to M.I.T. permission to reproduce and distribute copies of this thesis document in whole or in part.
Preface
Cantor’s theory of cardinality violates common sense. It says, for example, that all inﬁnite sets of integers are the same size. This thesis criticizes the arguments for Cantor’s theory and presents an alternative. The alternative is based on a general theory, CS (for Class Size ). CS consists of all sentences in the ﬁrst order language with a subset predicate and a lessthan predicate which are true in all interpretations of that language whose domain is a ﬁnite power set. Thus, CS says that less than is a linear ordering with highest and lowest members and that every set is larger than any of its proper subsets. Because the language of CS is so restricted, CS will have inﬁnite interpretations. In particular, the notion of oneone correspondence cannot be expressed in this language, so Cantor’s deﬁnition of similarity will not be in CS, even though it is true for all ﬁnite sets. We show that CS is decidable but not ﬁnitely axiomatizable by characterizing the complete extensions of CS. CS has ﬁnite completions, which are true only in ﬁnite models and inﬁnite completions, which are true only in inﬁnite models. An inﬁnite completion is determined by a set of remainder principles, which say, for each natural number, n, how many atoms remain when the universe is partitioned into n disjoint subsets of the same size. We show that any inﬁnite completion of CS has a model over the power set of the natural numbers which satisﬁes an additional axiom: OUTPACING. If initial segments of A eventually become smaller than the corresponding initial segments of B, then A is smaller than B. Models which satisfy OUTPACING seem to accord with common intuitions about set size. In particular, they agree with the ordering suggested by the notion of asymptotic density.
Acknowledgements
This dissertation has been made possible by Cantor — who invented set theory, Tarski — who discovered model theory, Abraham Robinson — who introduced modelcompleteness, and George Boolos — who made all of these subjects accessible to me. Prof. Boolos read several handwritten versions and as many typed versions of this thesis, with care and patience each time around. I owe i
typographical corrections. for directing me to some useful literature. and for his insistence on ﬁlling in mere details. and omissions of some elementary (but very long) proofs. Thesis Supervisor and Chairperson of the Department of Linguistics and Philosophy. whatever errors. this is the text of my dissertation. This dissertation was submitted in partial fulﬁllment of the requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology in April. Note Except for some minor wording changes. 1981 It was certiﬁed and accepted by Prof. Fred M. Nevertheless. and simply for being interested. 2001 . or infelicities remain are solely the responsibility of the author. Katz June.ii him thanks for ﬁnding (and sometimes correcting) my errors. George Boolos. The reader should join me in thanking him for his help with style and organization. gaps.
. . . .2 Addition of Set Sizes . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . .1 The Problem . . . . .1 The outpacing principle . . . . . . . Some models and theories . . . Remarks on showing that PCA axiomatizes PCS 45 45 47 53 61 . . . .2 4. . . . .3 4. . . . . 2 The General Theory 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 A Formal Theory of Class Size 19 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Pure Theory of Class Sizes Size models and PCS . . 5 Completeness of CA 63 5.2 Cantor’s argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Models of CS and Outpacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Cantor and the logicists 1. . . . . . .2 Prime models for CA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Model completeness of CA . 83 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Preface 1 Introduction 1. . .3 Size and density . . . . .1 CS . . .3 Remarks on showing that CA axiomatizes CS . . . . 63 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 The Theory CORE . . . . . . . . .The Theory of Class Size . . . . . . . . . . 38 4 The 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCA is model complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Axioms for CS . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . i 1 1 3 6 7 9 9 16 . . .3 Summary . . . . 79 6 Sets of Natural Numbers 83 6. . . . . . . . . 86 6. . . . . . .2 CA . . . . 20 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 iii . . . 1. . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Aims and outline . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 104 Bibliography Index of Symbols Index of Theories Subject Index 107 108 110 112 . . . . . . . . . . 103 C Model Completeness . . . . . . . . . 101 B Model Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv CONTENTS Appendix 101 A Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. x.... it is so clearly true that anyone who comes to the matter without prejudice will accept it.. −n −2n .. . so it needs both justiﬁcation and defense. I spend a lot of time defending the theory because no one who comes to the matter comes without prejudice. CANTOR< . −3 −6 −2 −4 −1 −2 1 0 0 1 2 2 4 3 6 .. Two sets are the same size just in case there is a oneone correspondence between them. is smaller than a set. n 2n .... For example. The prejudice stems from Cantor’s theory of set size. . .. . A set.. Fine and good. the standard theory says. The theory goes beyond intuitions. but not the same size as y itself.. Cantor’s theory consists of just two principles: ONEONE. I spend very little time justifying the theory... y. which is as old as sets themselves and so widely held as to be worthy of the name the standard theory. The standard theory also says that the set of even numbers is the same size as the set of integers since these two sets can also be paired oﬀ onetoone: .. naive and otherwise.1 The Problem This paper proposes a theory of set size which is based on intuitions. just in case x is the same size as some subset of y. A oneone correspondence between two sets is a relation which pairs each member of either set with exactly one member of the other. as theories will.1 Introduction 1.. the set of uppercase letters is the same size as the set of lowercase letters. the uppercase letters of the alphabet can be paired with the lowercase letters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz So.
INTRODUCTION Similarly. common sense holds that the set of integers is larger than the set of even integers. Though the set of primes is not contained in the set of even integers. item by item. • A and B are (or. The theory proposed here accommodates these bits of common sense reasoning. then the ﬁrst is larger than the second. • There are more α’s than β’s. • The size of A is smaller than the size of B. have) the same size. This is just to say that common sense seems to follow: SUBSET. ∼. c. • There are just as many α’s than β’s. A ∼ B is read as A is the same size as B. given the number theory. No doubt. it is still clear to common sense that the former is smaller than the latter. to the readings of the three predicates given above. it’s the only conclusion common sense allows. It maintains SUBSET and a few and far between principle and much else besides. In both of these cases. assuming that A is the set of α’s and B is the set of β’s: a. while the prime numbers are few and far between. • There are fewer α’s than β’s. To state this theory. common sense chokes on the standard theory. even into the inﬁnite. b. and >. If one set properly includes another. • The number of α’s is greater than the number of β’s. If A and B name sets.2 1. • The size of A is larger than the size of B. to use this reasoning. where it comes up against the standard theory. then • • • A < B is read as A is smaller than B. you need a little number theory in addition to common sense. The integers contain all of the even integers and then some. we use three twoplace predicates: <. the standard theory says that the set of positive even integers is the same size as the set of prime numbers: pair the nth prime with the nth positive even number. • The number of α’s is less than the number of β’s. So it’s just good common sense to believe there are more of the former than the latter. Common sense can make decisions without help from SUBSET. but. • The number of α’s is the same as the number of β’s. we assume throughout this thesis that the following schemata are equivalent. Incidentally. One out of every two integers is even. In the ﬁrst case. . and A > B is read as A is larger than B.
the continuum problem. I have identiﬁed the standard theory. Cantor’s. Whether or not similarity is coextensive with being the same size. (B). however. CANTOR’S ARGUMENT 3 Regarding this last group. depends on neither the particular elements it contains nor on how those elements are arranged: The cardinal number. nor that there are not really such things. This is true. Cantor used the terms power and cardinal number rather than size. In addition. is rarely used in connection with Cantor’s theory. the term cardinal number (sometimes just number ) is used most frequently.1. and (C). They use the term in just the way that we use size and slide freely among (A). per se. it’s cardinal number. we emphasize that we are not arguing that there really are such things as set sizes. of a set M (is the general concept which) arises from M when we make abstraction of the nature of its elements and of the order in which they are given. The relation picked out is well studied and well worth the study. it can also be taken as just a theory of oneone correspondences. The term size. so it might be wondered whether the standard theory is really so standard. But most mathematicians and philosophers do not use cardinal number as a mere abbreviation. Neither does it insure that two sets have the same cardinal number just in case they are in oneone correspondence. in particular. though we will not bother to do so. “We say that two sets have the same cardinal number just in case .2 Cantor’s argument Cantor bases his argument for ONEONE on the idea that the size of a set. saying that two sets are similar iﬀ they are in oneone correspondence can either be taken as a claim about size or be regarded as a mere deﬁnition. [Cantor. ”).86] But to say that the cardinal number of a set does not depend on certain things is not to say what the cardinal is. Hence. . Cantor reduces it to a second abstraction operator. In stating ONEONE and CANTOR< . one which works on the elements of sets rather than the sets . of Cantor. with two principles about set size. the deﬁnition is worth making. there is no point in discussing whether that person is right about size.g.2. To ﬂesh out this notion of double abstraction. and much else. he oﬀered an argument for this theory. who oﬀered ONEONE as a theory. Though Cantor’s theory is usually taken as a theory of set size. M . the theory has consequences which do not prima facie seem to have anything to do with size or similarity: the existence of transcendental numbers comes to mind. All of this is to say that the interest in oneone correspondence has not been sustained solely by its identiﬁcation with the notion of size. 1. . The technical brilliance of the theory attests to this: it has given us the transﬁnite hierarchy. denying that they are the same does not endanger the theory of oneone correspondences. If someone introduces cardinal number as a deﬁned predicate or as part of a contextual deﬁnition (e. Statements about sizes can be translated in familiar and longwinded ways into statements about sets. indeed. More speciﬁcally. p. In the literature.
if f is a oneone mapping from M onto N . p.2) (1.1) (1. says Cantor. and M  as the cardinal number of M . M .4 themselves: 1. m.88) . (p. So (1. Unit (x) as x is a unit.” [Cantor. (ONEONEa) (ONEONEb) M ∼ N → M  = N  M  = N  → M ∼ N ONEONEa is true. if we abstract from its nature becomes a unit.) [Cantor. of M with f (m) M transforms into N without change of cardinal number. because the cardinal number M  remains unaltered if in the place of one or many or even all elements m of M other things are substituted.80] and so. I can only make sense of his arguments insofar as he treats cardinal numbers as sets: he refers to them as ‘deﬁnite aggregates’. p. and employs mappings between cardinal numbers and other sets. is a set composed of units (which has existence in our minds as an intellectual image or projection of M . from which Cantor proves both ONEONEa and ONEONEb.3) M  = { y  ∃x ∈ M ∧ y = Abstract(x) } ∀x∃y(y = Abstract(x) ∧ Unit(y)) ∀M ∀y(y ∈ M  → Unit(y)) Abstract (x) is to be read as the result of abstracting from the element x.86] and so.86] According to Jourdain. m. then in replacing each element. concludes Cantor: The cardinal number. The following three statements seem to express Cantor’s intent: (1. in terms of the operation of abstraction. whereas its cardinal number is an abstract picture of it in our mind. supposes that they have elements.80] I have parenthesized the expressions above where Cantor describes cardinal numbers as mental entities. Cantor distinguised very sharply between an aggregate and a cardinal number that belongs to it: “Is not an aggregate an object outside us. p. [Cantor. [Cantor.1) gives a deﬁnition of cardinal number. INTRODUCTION Every element. Nevertheless. p.
by (1.4) are met and M  = N . . Abstract(b)} ∧ Abstract(a) = Abstract(b) (1. Generalizing this argument yields (1. one element is much the same as another.4) (a ∈ M ∧ b ∈ M ) / ∧ N = { x  (x ∈ M ∧ x ∈ a) ∨ x ∈ b } / → M  = N  The reasoning is clear: so far as the cardinal number of a set is concerned. so one is much the same as another. It is not the elements of a set. by the deﬁnition of M . A weak version of this principle is: M = {a.5). that enter into the cardinal number of a set.1). ONEONEb is true. this contradicts ONEONEb. That is. M  grows. So Cantor’s argument for ONEONEa only works by assigning all nonempty sets the same. the conditions of (1. So. So Abstract(a) = Abstract(b). since a set is similar to its cardinal number.2.1. CANTOR’S ARGUMENT 5 In its weakest form. Thus we can say that M ∼ M .5) These two arguments do one another in. But. a and b. the principle Cantor cites says that if a single element of M is replaced by an arbitrary element not in M then the cardinal number of the set will remain the same. consider an arbitrary pair of elements. the correspondence from M to its cardinal number will be manyone and not oneone. which entails (1. onemembered.6). distinct. But abstractions of elements are just units. So. Conversely.7) ∀x∀y(x = y → Abstract(x) = Abstract(y)) .6) ∀x∀y(Abstract(x) = Abstract(y)) For. . because . two sets with same cardinal number are similar.4) says that replacing an element of a set with any element not in the set does not aﬀect the cardinality. Let M = {a} and let N = {b}. the argument that a set is similar to its cardinal number relies on (1. this means that (1.e. so to speak. (1. out of M in such a way that from every element m of M a special unit of M  arises. Unless each element of a set abstracts to a ‘special’. b} ∧ a = b → M  = {Abstract(a). but only their abstractions.1). (1. (1. But. i. cardinal number. unit. and similarity is an equivalence relation. But M  = {Abstract(a)} and N  = {Abstract(b)}. Cantor says.
pp. [Frege. contra ONEONEa. . Russell displays similar caution about Cantor’s argument [Russell. We have shown that (1. and Cantor. Kossak. “that numerical equality or identiy must be deﬁned in terms of oneone correlation. then subsequently the concept of putting together (or collecting.6) or its negation. We start by calling the things to be numbered ‘units’ without detracting from their diversity. 1. “This opinion”.8). Frege spends an entire chapter of the Grundlagen mocking mathematicians from Euclid to Schroder for deﬁning numbers as sets of units. INTRODUCTION assuming only that any two objects can constitute a set. or uniting.8) must be true. then {a} and {b} have distinct cardinal numbers. the result is an agglomeration in which the objects remain still in possession of precisely those properties which serve to distinguish them from one another.6) and (1. for example. pp 5051] These misgivings about units do not prevent Frege from basing his deﬁnition of ‘number’ and his entire reduction of arithmetic on Cantor’s notion of oneone correspondence. p. But if we try to do it in the other way. .1). There is no way to repair Cantor’s argument. Frege cites Schroder. So ONEONE is false whether (1.8) ∃x∃y(Abstract(x) = Abstract(y)) So one of (1. . Rather than leading to a justiﬁcation of ONEONE. The negation of (1.305] and similar enthusiasm for his theory (see the quote at the beginning of Chapter 2. the result runs perpetually together into one and we never reach a plurality . or whatever we choose to call it) transforms itself into arithmetical addition. is true. (1. Similarly. by putting together identicals. if a and b have distinct abstractions. 7374]. then no two sets have the same cardinal number as deﬁned by (1. He neatly summarizes the diﬃculty with such views: If we try to produce the number by putting together diﬀerent distinct objects. The word ‘unit’ is admirably adapted to conceal the diﬃculty .6) contradicts ONEONEb. and that is not the number. neither accepted Cantor’s argument. Cantor’s deﬁnition of cardinal number is suﬃcient to refute the principle. seems in recent years to have gained widespread acceptance among mathematicians” [Frege. or annexing. {Abstract(a)} and {Abstract(b)}.6 1.3 Cantor and the logicists Though both Frege and Russell accepted Cantor’s theory of cardinality. while the concept word ‘unit’ changes unperceived into the proper name ‘one’.6) is: (1. (1. But if the abstractions of any two elements are distinct. despite the fact that they are in oneone correspondence.8) contradicts ONEONEa. .) . says Frege.
you have to identify each ordered pair with a set and deﬁne the relevant properties and relations among ordered pairs in terms of properties and relations among sets. relied upon the principle of abstraction to obtain a ‘formal deﬁnition’ of cardinal numbers. at the same time. in contrast to Cantor.” [Russell. but in the absence of an alternative theory of size they are less than convincing. we might feel tempted to add. In addition.1. But there are two speciﬁc reasons that they should have seized upon ONEONE and CANTOR< . So the notion of cardinality is born reduced. Frege and Russell cleaned up Cantor’s presentation of the theory. they can advance it as a great lesson for simple common sense. and mines this source for additional principles. for example. independent of its terms and their order. AIMS AND OUTLINE 7 Of course. known facts about ﬁnite sets). One of the relations that has to be maintained is identity . they both have the form of deﬁnitions. Chapter 3 reorganizes those principles into a tidy set of axioms. so each ordered pair must be identiﬁed with a distinct set. The logicists’ adoption of Cantor’s theory of cardinality needs no great explanation: it came with set theory and. Suppose. [Russell.4. 304305] So Russell. Russell. and similarly Frege. Such points may be interesting. you wish to reduce ordered pairs to sets. Second. as they would call it. p. to a large extent. that is to say. for example. the logicists have it both ways: adding ONEONE as a formal deﬁnition to set theory (or. 1. while some people regard Cantor’s ONEONE as just a deﬁnition and others embrace it as a theory. pp. Well. First.305] So. the relative sizes of sets of ordered pairs should be preserved under translation. This dissertation presents such an alternative. But. depending. who had “taken” number “to be a primitive idea” and had to rely on “the primitive proposition that every collection has a number. only upon their number. since the existence of oneone correspondences will be preserved under a oneone mapping. if ONEONE is the correct theory of size. Chapters 4 and 5 prove that the theory so obtained is . Cantor’s theory clears the way for other reductions. oﬀers an account of where the intuitions come from (viz. then this second condition follows from the ﬁrst. Chapter 2 canvasses common sense intuitions for some basic principles about set size. no matter how they are intended. notes that Cantor’s statement (1) is not a ‘true deﬁnition’ and merely presupposes that every collection has some such property as that indicated — a property. logic) they have no obligation to defend it and can steer clear of peculiar arguments about units .4 Aims and outline It would be naive to suppose that people’s faith in Cantor’s theory would be shaken either by refuting speciﬁc arguments for ONEONE or by associating the acceptance of that theory with a discredited philosophy of mathematics. motivated set theory and determined its research problems.
INTRODUCTION complete.8 1. Finally.e. together with the theory in Chapter 3. expressible in a particular language). Chapter 6 elaborates additional principles that concern only sets of natural numbers and demonstrates that these additional principles. in the sense that it embraces all facts about ﬁnite sets of a certain kind (i. . are satisﬁable in the domain of sets of natural numbers.
I argued that a coherent theory of cardinality has to contain some principles that refer to the kinds of objects in sets. pace Cantor. or is there a way of elaborating on common sense to get a plausible and reasonably adequate theory of cardinality? To be plausible. it must be confessed. In the Introduction. 358] Is common sense confused about set size. the second that there should not be too few principles. is here in a very sorry plight. To be reasonably adequate. how much can you say about smaller than without using predicates (other than identity ) which relate the members of the sets being compared? I shall begin by stating a number of principles and explaining why they are included in the general theory. a theory should at least avoid principles and consequences which violate common sense. In this chapter.2 The General Theory The possibility that whole and part may have the same number of terms is. Common sense. I want to see how far we can go without such principles. . I do not propose to help it. though it need not be complete. First. there is the SUBSET principle: The reason for including SUBSET should be obvious. it ought to commit suicide in despair. shocking to common sense .e. i. 2. it must choose between the paradox of Zeno and the paradox of Cantor. What has prompted the search for an alternative to the standard theory of cardinality is the conﬂict 9 . in the face of the proofs. then x is smaller than y. . however. [Russell.1 The Theory CORE SUBSET. If x is a proper subset of y. Plausibility and adequacy are conﬂicting demands: the ﬁrst says that there should not be too many principles (no false ones. consistency). a theory has to go beyond bare intuitions: it should not rest with trivialities and it should answer as many questions about set size as possible. as Russell says. p. therefore. since I consider that.
) . but that’s not what my argument depends on. husbands and wives. People’s intuitions about mathematics are notoriously unreliable. and what I’ve gotten. SUBSET. where one was a proper subset of the other. by and large. So. I do not think that such guile is needed to lead someone to agree to SUBSET. harping on this fact might engender some unwarranted skepticism about mathematics. say the odds and the evens. The suggestion is to see what happens with particular cases on which the principles conﬂict before you’ve lead someone to agree to either of the general statements.with the technical attractions that it provides. you might even convince someone that ONEONE is true for inﬁnite sets. I would not venture that this sort of technique. though it surely is not enough. not to mention inconstant. too. there’s a diﬀerence in the way that common sense supports these two principles. Of course. It’s clear that we need additional principles. With carefully chosen examples. Given just this principle. is what I expected: support for SUBSET. Now. if you want to ﬁnd out what common sense really thinks about SUBSET and ONEONE. you would present people with pairs of inﬁnite sets. What I am suggesting is that there might be a rational way of studying mathematical intuitions and that we should at least explore this possibility before proclaiming common sense to be hopelessly confused on mathematical matters. so we should opt for ONEONE. Now. asking people. All of the following seem worthy (where x < y is to be read as x is smaller than y. There is no doubt that you can lead an unsuspecting person to agree to ONEONE by focusing their attention on forks and knives.) Naturally. The argument hinges on a suggestion about how to resolve cases where mathematical intuitions seem to conﬂict. is any way to ﬁnd out which of SUBSET and ONEONE is true. ﬁnite sets. x ∼ y is to be read as x is the same size as y. in an unscientiﬁc way. THE GENERAL THEORY between ONEONE and SUBSET. I’ve actually tried this.e.10 2. But. (By and large because many people think that all inﬁnite sets have the same size: Inﬁnity. x > y as x is larger than y. and so forth: i. The Appendix gives a full account of the notations used throughout this thesis. it is often said that common sense supports both of these principles and that it is in doing so that common sense is confused. all by itself seems to be a plausible alternative to Cantor’s theory. So. it’s possible that one set is smaller than another just in case it is a proper subset of the other. From this it is supposed to follow that common sense cannot be relied upon.
It appears that every instance of this schema is true. If x is smaller than y. The other principles might be defended in the same way.1. that would be good reason to say that there is no . First. QUASILOGICAL (ASYM< ) (ASYM> ) (TRANS< ) (TRANS> ) (INDISC∼ ) (REF∼ ) (SYM∼ ) (TRANS∼ ) (DEF> ) x < y → ¬y < x x > y → ¬y > x (x < y ∧ y < z) → x < z (x > y ∧ y > z) → x > z x ∼ y → Indisc(x. possibly. withheld judgment on one or more of these principles. for example: is smaller than. ‘happy’. but not ‘unique’ or ‘brick’. there are some instances of the schemata that make for embarassing counterexamples: ‘further east than’ (in a round world) and ‘earlier than’ (in. for fear of inconsistency. taken together. This sentence can be regarded as an instance of the schema: ASYMF .1.g. a possible world). it might be that casting the principles above as instances of the appropriate schema would only explain why they are part of common sense. then y is not smaller than x. is larger than. though the schema for INDISC∼ would have to be restricted to triples of corresponding comparatives. it would require taking positions on many questions about logical form and grammatical form which would take us far aﬁeld and. THE THEORY CORE Theory 2. ‘tall’.2. that each is a logical truth. y) x∼x x∼y→y∼x (x ∼ y ∧ y ∼ z) → x ∼ z x>y↔y<x 11 where Indisc(x. for example. are inconsistent with SUBSET. is the same size as. ‘short’. It seems that if a case could be made that these statements. But to do so without good reason would be counterproductive. antagonize ﬁrstorder logicians.1. I can just barely imagine presenting a theory which. If x is F er than y. e. What remains clear is that a theory of cardinality which openly denied any of these principles would be implausible: it would be ridiculed by common sense and mathematical sophisticates alike. then y is not F er than x. y) abbreviates ∀z((z < x ↔ z < y) ∧ (z > x ↔ z > y)) We call the principles listed above quasilogical principles because it is tempting to defend them as logical truths. so it could be maintained that each is true in virtue of its form. where F is to be replaced by an adjective from which comparatives can be formed. in unregimented English: ASYM< . Second. But using such observations to support these principles would be problematic for two reasons. So. Consider the ﬁrst principle. I’m told.
While a theory of set size which excluded TRICH might escape ridicule. If REP< is true. this would undoubtedly be used to discredit them. Since my goal is to counter such a conclusion. Analogous statements about physical objects are neither intuitive nor very clearly true. it makes it easier to reduce the set of axioms already presented and it provides a basis for several principles not yet presented. THE GENERAL THEORY reasonably adequate alternative to Cantor’s theory. we get a model for our theory by assigning to < the relation of being a proper subset of. no one should condemn its residual caution about (1). then the ﬁrst is the same size as some proper part of the second. then x is the same size as some proper subset of y. there is the principle of trichotomy. (1) does not stand a chance of being regarded as true: (1) If one table is smaller than another. (REP< ) x < y → ∃x (x ∼ x ∧ x ⊂ y) which says that if a set. We shall now consider some principles which cannot be regarded as quasilogical. there is the representation principle. First. REP< may be open to doubt. Second. ﬁnite or inﬁnite. that the same size as is an equivalence relation. As long as we restrict ourselves to SUBSET and the quasilogical principles. if we are given any domain of sets. This would be impossible. the larger than is the converse partial ordering. So. this is a principle which common sense has no particular feelings about. consistency is no problem. For example.12 2.. there must be some additional principles to be extracted from common sense. then it seems to be an interesting and special fact about sets. if ‘part’ is taken to mean ‘leg or top or rim or . y. and assigning to ∼ the identity relation. Instead.’. it seems that the proper strategy is to include such seemingly obvious truths and to show that the resulting theory is consistent. assigning to > the relation of properly including. it would surely be regarded with suspicion. (TRICH) x<y∨x∼y∨x>y which says that any two sets are comparable in size. Now. what do the quasilogical principles say? Only that smaller than is a partial ordering. x. and that sets of the same size are indiscernible under the partial orderings. given that the principles are logically contingent. Since common sense knows that diﬀerent sets can be the same size. After all. is smaller than another.. but it is not . our approach is to canonize what common sense holds to be true about cardinality and show that the result is consistent and reasonably adequate. So the strategy here is not to adduce principles and argue for the truth of each. Even if common sense can be persuaded to take particles and arbitrary fusions of such as parts of tables. Indeed. REP< was originally included in this theory for technical reasons. if the principles of common sense were incompatible with TRICH.
some proper subset of y. Theorem 2. So x < y. then their being diﬀerent in size is attributable to the existence of some set which is either smaller than one but not smaller than the other. by TRICH. then x < y. say x .3.2. for it is entailed by Cantor’s deﬁnition of <: (CANTOR< ) x < y ↔ ¬(x ∼ y) ∧ ∃x (x ∼ x ∧ x ⊂ y) If CANTOR< is regarded as a principle instead of a deﬁnition. but before proceeding. But x < y. by INDISC∼ . then ¬(x ∼ y).1. So x < y or y < x. The entire set of principles already adopted are equivalent to the following.2. But ¬(x < x) and ¬(y < y). . which is logically equivalent to the conjunction of INDISC∼ and its converse ∼ INDISC: (INDISC∼ ) (∼ INDISC) ∼ x ∼ y → Indisc(x. We only need to show that ∼ INDISC is entailed by T . REP< . y) Indisc(x. Let T = QUASI. Then T ≡ CORE. by INDISC∼ . by SUBSET: so x < y . Second.1. I’d like to take stock of what we already have. then it is entailed by the principles we have already mentioned: If x < y. the core theory. By REP< . SUBSET. T CORE. if x ∼ x and x ⊂ y. which will be referred to as the core theory. Suppose ¬(x ∼ y). or larger than one but not larger than the other. (SUBSET) (DEF∼ ) (TRANS∼ ) (DEF> ) (IRREF< ) (TRICH) x⊂y→x<y x ∼ y ↔ Indisc(x. Theory 2. must be the same size as x. by SUBSET. First. y) (x ∼ y ∧ y ∼ z) → x ∼ z x>y↔y<x ¬(x < x) x<y∨x∼y∨x>y The only axiom in CORE that has not already been introduced is DEF∼ .1. I want to estimate how far we’ve gone. I want to reduce the principles mentioned above to a tidy set of axioms. THE THEORY CORE 13 a principle that Cantorians could complain about. CORE. by IRREF< . y) → x ∼ y INDISC says that if two sets fail to be the same size. by INDISC∼ and ASYM< . There are more principles to come. Proof. Conversely.
CORE is consistent. the ﬁnite cardinalities determine a quasilinear ordering of the sets in which any set is higher than any of its proper subsets. A is a ﬁnite class model with basis x iﬀ ˙ (i) A = P(x). If A is a ﬁnite set model. (ii) ASYM< . A is a ﬁnite set model iﬀ ˙ (i) A = { x  x is a ﬁnite subset of Y }. where x is ﬁnite. Deﬁnition 2. x < z. (ii) A (iii) A a ⊂ b iﬀ a ⊂ b a < b iﬀ a < b Models can be speciﬁed by stipulation the smaller than relation since larger than and same size as are deﬁned in terms of smaller than. a. If A is a ﬁnite class model. then x < y because y ∼ y. a. the only one that satisﬁes CORE. SYM∼ . In both cases. Suppose that A is a model such that . then x < x. contra IRREF< . two kinds of models satisfy CORE.6.1. So. But then x < z by DEF∼ .1. by SUBSET. THE GENERAL THEORY (i) TRANS< .1.4. for some inﬁnite Y . there is a y such that y ∼ y and y ⊂ z by REP< . (iii) TRANS> . So x ⊂ z and. then A b. Proof. by DEF∼ . TRANS∼ . If x < y. Fact 2. and IRREF> follow from the corresponding principles for < and DEF> . By adding TRICH we have ruled out all nonstandard interpretations of <. then A CORE. ASYM> . If x < y and y < x.5. by TRANS< . In fact. Theorem 2. in fact. (ii) A (iii) A a ⊂ b iﬀ a ⊂ b a < b iﬀ a < b b. If y < z. and REF∼ are logical consequences of DEF∼ .14 CORE T 2. there is an x such that x ∼ x and x ⊂ y . (iv) INDISC∼ . The normal ordering of ﬁnite sets is. CORE.
as follows: A (a < b) A (a ∼ a) for some a ⊂ b A a ⊂b a  ≤ n a ≤ n a = n + 1 A (a ∼ b) b ≥ n + 1 b > n + 1 b ⊂ b. a < b iﬀ a < b 15 Proof. We shall prove (*) by induction on n: (*) Suppose then But if then And if then So So If a = n. .1. then x is ﬁnite. suppose that (*) is true for all i ≤ n: If then Suppose So But if then So But if and then But if pick with So and So So a = b = n + 1 A (a ∼ b). If x ∈ A. ˙ ˙ b. b ∈ A. THE THEORY CORE ˙ a. then y ∈ A. contra our hypothesis. b  = n + 1 A (b < b) A (b ∼ a) A (a < b) b = n + 1 by (*).2. by condition (b) by SUBSET contra our supposition. by REP< by induction. and c. A Then A CORE. then A n=0 a=∅ b = 0 A (a ∼ b) b = 0 a⊂b A (a < b) A (a ∼ b) (a ∼ b) iﬀ b = n by REF∼ by SUBSET by INDISC∼ Now. If x ∈ A and y ⊂ x.
Addition Functionality of addition (a) (b) (c) Sum(x. z) is to be read as the size of z is the sum of the sizes of x and y . y . y.2. z) ↔ ∃x ∃y (x ∼ x ∧ y ∼ y ∧ x ∩ y = ∅ ∧ x ∪ y = z) DEF+ says that the extension of Sum is determined by the extension of <. We shall show this by proving that ADDITION and CORE entail DEF+ : (DEF+ ) Sum(x. THE GENERAL THEORY 2. z) → x < z ∨ x ∼ z x ∩ y = ∅ → Sum(x. though the interpretation of Sum does not agree with the intended reading. z) Sum(x. But FUNC+ and DISJ+ leave open the possibility that addition is cyclic: suppose we begin with a ﬁnite class model whose basis has n elements and assign to Sum those triples x. y. This condition must clearly be met if Sum is to be read as speciﬁed above. y. z where z = (x + y) mod (n + 1) Both FUNC+ and DISJ+ will be satisﬁed.1. z) Sum(x. z) → (y ∼ y ↔ Sum(x. z ) Addition for disjoint sets (DISJ+ ) Monotonicity of Addition (MONOT) Sum(x. Since the domains of our intended models contain only sets and not sizes of sets. x ∪ y) FUNC+ says that sets bear Sum relations to one another by virtue of their sizes alone. y.2 Addition of Set Sizes We shall now extend CORE to an account of addition of set sizes. z) → (z ∼ z ↔ Sum(x. we have to formulate our principles in terms of a threeplace predicate true of triples of sets: Sum (x. MONOT rules out such interpretations. DISJ+ tries to say what function on sizes the Sum relation captures by ﬁxing the function on paradigm cases: disjoint sets. y. y. z) → (x ∼ x ↔ Sum(x .16 2. y. y. . y. y. Given an interpretation of ’<’ over a power set there is at most one way of interpreting Sum which satisﬁes ADDITION. The following principles are suﬃcient for a theory of addition: Theory 2.
despite the fact that we have not yet introduced them.3. x ∪ y ) Sum(x . Theorem 2. x =z y = ∅. Suppose then and So So So (x ∼ x ∧ y ∼ y ∧ x ∩ y = ∅ ∧ x ∩ y = ∅) Sum(x. . (DISJ∪ ) (x ∼ x ∧ y ∼ y ∧ x ∩ y = ∅ ∧ x ∩ y = ∅) → (x ∪ y) ∼ (x ∪ y ) (Note: The proofs in this chapter will use boolean principles freely. then Sum has to be deﬁnable by DEF+ .2. ADDITION OF SET SIZES 17 A model of CORE must satisfy an additional principle. y . y. as before. y . if Sum is to be interpreted in a way compatible with ADDITION. x ∪ y) Sum(x . y. DEF+ by MONOT by DISJ+ by FUNC+ (a) by FUNC+ (b) by REP< . CORE + ADDITION Proof.2. y. z) Sum(x. CORE + ADDITION Proof. y . x ∪ y) Sum(x . (⇒) Suppose So But if Let and then So So And if pick with Let But Sum(x. DISJ∪ .) Theorem 2.2. x ∪ y) x∪y ∼x ∪y by DISJ+ by FUNC+ (a) by FUNC+ (b) by FUNC+ (c) DISJ∪ If the minimal conditions on addition are to be satisﬁed in a model of CORE.2. z) y ∼y x<z x ⊂z x ∼x y =z−x y ∼ y. y . Sum(x . z) x<z∨x∼z x ∼ z.2.
is CORE ∪ ADDITION. z) Sum(x. z) Sum(x. The proofs are elementary. y. the extended core. Fact 2.5. → x ∪ y1 ∼ x ∪ y2 → x ∪ y1 < x ∪ y2 → x1 ∪ y1 < x2 ∪ y2 → (z − y) < (z − x) → (z − y) ∼ (z − x) → ∃y (y ∼ y ∧ x ⊂ y ) → x − (x ∩ y) ∼ y − (x ∩ y) → x − (x ∩ y) < y − (x ∩ y) . The following are consequences of EXCORE: x ∩ y1 = x ∩ y2 = ∅ ∧ y1 ∼ y2 x ∩ y1 = x ∩ y2 = ∅ ∧ y1 < y2 x1 ∩ y1 = x1 ∩ y2 = ∅ ∧ x1 ∼ x2 ∧ y1 < y2 x⊂z∧y ⊂z∧x<y x⊂z∧y ⊂z∧x∼y x<y x∼y x<y Proof. y . THE GENERAL THEORY (x ∼ x ∧ y ∼ y ∧ x ∩ y = ∅ ∧ x ∪ y = z) Sum(x . EXCORE.2.4. y .18 (⇐) Suppose then So So 2. z) by DISJ+ by FUNC+ (a) by FUNC+ (b) Theory 2.2.
but we can 19 . for example. Insofar as both kinds of interpretation have quantiﬁers ranging over ﬁnite sets. Below. we may say that they demonstrate that EXCORE is true when it is construed as being about ﬁnite sets. For a particular principle. the domains of the interpretations were ﬁnite power sets. DISJ∪ . Call this theory T. In one case. Our goal is to show that this general theory of set size can be maintained for inﬁnite sets as well as for ﬁnite sets. the existence of the model does not rule out the possibility that T is incompatible with DISJ∪ . we searched for principles that accord with preCantorian ideas about sizes of sets. the domains consisted of all ﬁnite subsets of a given inﬁnite set. in this case DISJ∪ . So T just says that smaller than is a quasilinear ordering which extends the partial ordering given by the proper subset relation. since DISJ∪ is in EXCORE. It seems futile to try to rule out the need to resort to the third approach for any cases at all.3 A Formal Theory of Class Size In the preceding chapter. we may take one of three tacks: (1) add φ to T. we deal with DISJ∪ as in (1). φ. T has a model over P(N). We shall show this by constructing a model for the general theory whose domain is the power set of the natural numbers. But unless we have a guarantee that the model constructed will satisfy. Cantor’s principle ONEONE is dealt with as in case (2). Since any partial ordering can be extended to a quasilinear ordering. say. constituting EXCORE. then T should be maintained anyway. In the other case. and found two kinds of interpretations which satisﬁed these principles. Suppose. and show that T has a model over P(N). (3) acquiesce in ignorance of whether T and φ are compatible and argue that if they are incompatible. We produced several such principles. But the ability to construct such a model is interesting only to the extent that the general theory it satisﬁes is reasonably adequate. (2) show that φ is inconsistent with T and argue that T is somehow more fundamental or more intuitive than φ. obtaining T . that we oﬀered as a general theory of size the axioms of CORE other than REP< .
a. or a sort of Venn diagram set theory. This is not to say the axioms do not apply to relations.20 3. but only that they do not refer to these sorts of objects as such. the axioms in EXCORE. we need only list the individual constants. predicates. and operation symbols of the language and stipulate the rank. then. But. In the next section. Deﬁnition 3. 3.1. To specify the language in which a theory is expressed. the only set theory implicit in these axioms is boolean algebra. we might instead settle for all statements in L. By drawing statements only from this relatively weak language. relation. the possible existence of any such hierarchy is sheer speculation. Atom. we know that no statement in that language can arise as something which ought to be true over inﬁnite power sets but might be incompatible with our theory. such a language can be obtained by including a notion of the product of set sizes. In fact. we mention it only to emphasize that no claim is made here that we have the strongest possible general theory of set size. these axioms involve only boolean operations and inclusion relations among sets. LC . In short. we deﬁne a language just strong enough to express EXCORE. the two . We then construct a theory by taking all statements in that language which are true over all ﬁnite power sets. They do not use the notions ordered pair. the language of classes.1 CS . LC . though it would have to remain less expressive that the full language of set theory. as many plausible statements as possible. or number of argument places. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE reduce this need to the extent that we include in our general theory. since we include in the language all statements of the language which are true over any ﬁnite power set. At this point. or function. or other sets of ordered pairs. Other than size relations. T. is the ﬁrst order language with individual constants ∅ and I. for each predicate and each operation symbol. Consider. now.1.The Theory of Class Size The theories discussed in this paper will be formulated within ﬁrst order predicate logic with identity. To avoid ONEONE. but using the notion of all statements true for ﬁnite sets presupposes that we have some idea of the range of all statements. We cannot construct T by taking all statements which are true for ﬁnite sets. This in turn opens the possibility of a succession of richer languages and a corresponding succession of stronger theories of size. where L is some judiciously chosen language. To avoid the problems involved in speaking of all statements. the oneplace predicate. There remains the possibility that we could follow the same strategy with a more expressive language. T must fall short of the full expressive power of the language of set theory. Not only is ONEONE such a statement. we arrive at a theory which can be satisﬁed over inﬁnite power sets. functions.
1. a ∼ b iﬀ a = b..1. If LC ⊂ L. CS. By drawing only on principles which can be stated in LC< we have at least ruled out the most obvious danger of paradox. is the ﬁrst order language containing just the nonlogical constants in LC and L< . and the three place predicate Sum. B(A). the language of size. the twoplace predicates < and ⊂. is the ﬁrst order language with the oneplace predicate Unit.4.2. −. . the language of class size. even though it is true over any ﬁnite power set. b. ∩. L< . and c. the theory of class size. A(∅) = ∅.1. c. and (ii) A assigns the usual interpretations to all constants of LC : A(I) = x. A is a standard interpretation of LC< . for some x. and the two place operation symbols. is the set of all sentences of LC< which are true in all standard ﬁnite interpretations of LC< . b. a. LC< . Deﬁnition 3. CS . A has a ﬁnite basis. a ⊂ b iﬀ a ⊂ b A ˙ b. we deﬁne the theory of class size in terms of interpretations of LC< over ﬁnite power sets. A A A a < b iﬀ a < b.3.1. then x is the basis of A. then A is a standard interpretation of L iﬀ ˙ (i) A = P(x). If A is a standard interpretation and A = P(x). Following the strategy outlined above.THE THEORY OF CLASS SIZE 21 place predicate ⊂. and ∪. and Unit(a) iﬀ a = 1 Deﬁnition 3.3. Since the notion of onetoone correspondence cannot be expressed in this language. Deﬁnition 3. A is a standard ﬁnite interpretation of LC< iﬀ a. Cantor’s principle ONEONE will not be included in the theory CS.
To show this we need to draw on some established facts about the complete extensions of BA (in the language LC ). after a slight detour in Chapter 4. This will be done in several stages. must satisfy BA: Deﬁnition 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE Since CS has arbitarily large ﬁnite models. in which the universe is an inﬁnite power set.22 3. 151]. The key idea here is that complete extensions of BA can be obtained either by stipulating the ﬁnite number of atoms in a model or by saying that there are inﬁnitely many atoms. This proof is presented in Chaper 5. BA.2. since BA does not involve any size notions. 9. they must be atomic boolean algebras and. p.2. . it has inﬁnite models.Axioms for CS Here we shall develop a set of axioms. CA. for CS. Since all of the universes of the interpretations mentioned in the deﬁnition of CS are power sets. is the theory consisting of the following axioms: x∪y =y∪x x∩y =y∩x x ∪ (y ∪ z) = (x ∪ y) ∪ z) x ∩ (y ∩ z) = (x ∩ y) ∩ z) x ∩ (y ∪ z) = (x ∩ y) ∪ (y ∩ z) x ∪ (y ∩ z) = (x ∪ y) ∩ (y ∪ z) x ∩ (I − x) = ∅ x ∪ (I − x) = I x ⊂ y ↔ (x ∪ y) = y ∧ x = y Atom(x) ↔ (∀y)(y ⊂ x → y = ∅) x = ∅ → (∃y)(Atom(y) ∧ (y ⊂ x ∨ y = x) These axioms are adapted from [Monk.1 BA. In Chapter 6 we show that such models do exist. for the theory CS.1. so. 3. It is not obvious that CS has standard inﬁnite models. But BA does entail all the sentences in CS which do not themselves involve size notions.28. Section 2 develops a set of axioms. p. Def 9.3. CA.Axioms for atomic boolean algebra We’ll begin with the obvious.2 CA . the theory of atomic boolean algebras. 3. BA is clearly not a complete axiomatization of CS. 141 and Def. Section 3 outlines the proof that CA does indeed axiomatize CS. The present chapter is devoted to getting a clearer picture of the theory CS.
so BAI ¬φ. then ¬φ is consistent with BAI. p. there is a k such that BA ∪ { ATLEASTn  1 ≤ n ≤ k } φ So φ is true in any atomic boolean algebra with more than k atoms.3.AXIOMS FOR CS Deﬁnition 3.2. again. Proof. p. ∧ Atom(xn ) ∧ { xi = xj  0 < i < j ≤ n }) b.2. Theorem 21. BAn is categorical. 23 a. and φ ∈ LC . If BAI Proof.360] e. BA ∪ INF φ. ¬φ is true in some standard ﬁnite interpretation of LC and. φ ∈ CS. then ¬φ is true in A . For n ≥ 1. If A is ﬁnite. BAI = BA ∪ INF Fact 3. A.4. For n ≥ 1.2.2. φ.152] b. EXACTLYn is a sentence which says that there are exactly n atoms: ATLEASTn ∧ ¬ATLEASTn+1 c..30. If CS φ. For n ≥ 1. ¬φ is true in some ﬁnite model A of BA. But BAI is complete.4. so φ is not true in A and φ ∈ CS.24.. Prop. n ≥ 1. are the only complete. 9. [Monk. / If A is inﬁnite. / . (Immediate from above) c. then A is isomorphic to some standard ﬁnite interpration A of LC .2. Cor 9. an natom atomic boolean algebra is isomorphic to any standard ﬁnite interpretation of LC with an nelement basis. CA . ATLEASTn is a sentence which says that there are at least n atoms: ∃x1 . then BA φ.32.151] d.5.2. INF is a set of sentences which is satisﬁed in all and only inﬁnite models of BA: INF = { ATLEASTn  n > 1 } d. BAn = BA.∃xn (Atom(x1 ) ∧ . If BA φ. Hence. But. BA is complete. then. EXACTLYn e. [Monk. BAI and the theories BAn . [Monk. Fact 3..3. For n ≥ 1.. then φ is true in some ﬁnite model of BA. By 3.2. By compactness. p. a. Theorem 3. then ¬φ is true is some atomic boolean algebra. consistent extensions of BA. BAn is complete.
we’ll need some nonstandard models of BASIC. y) ¬(x < x) x<y∨x∼y∨x>y Unit(x) ↔ Atom(x) Sum(x. These models will be similar in that (1)their universes will be subsets of P(N). is deﬁned as: BA ∪ SIZE 3. however.2. z) ↔ ∃x ∃y ( x∼x ∧y ∼y ∧x ∩y =∅ ∧ x ∪ y = z) (DISJ∪ ) (x ∼ x ∧ y ∼ y ∧x ∩ y = ∅ ∧x ∪ y = z) → x ∪ y ∼ x ∪ y Combining the principles of boolean algebra and the size principles.24 3. BASIC. we obtain our ﬁrst serious attempt at a general theory of size: Deﬁnition 3. When we are done.3 Division principles BASIC is not a complete axiomatization of CS. In this section we shall exhibit an inﬁnite number of principles which need to be added to BASIC in order to axiomatize CS. we will have an eﬀective set of sentences. (2) their atoms will be singletons in P(N). we just gather the principles presented above as EXCORE: Theory 3. include diﬀerent subsets of N and assign diﬀerent size orderings to these sets.2.6. The models will. the Class Size Axioms. So.2. the basic theory. though we will not prove that CA ≡ CS until Chapter 5.2. in addition to the immediate purpose of establishing independence results. . these models of BASIC will reappear as submodels of various standard models of CS over P(N). In Chapter 6. and (3) all boolean symbols will receive their usual interpretations. CA. y. these models provide a glimpse of how sets of natural numbers are ordered by size. CORE SIZE consists of the following axioms: (SUBSET) (DEF> ) (DEF ) (IRREF< ) (TRICH) (DEF1 ) (DEF ) + ∼ x⊂y→x<y x>y↔y<x x ∼ y ↔ Indisc(x. To show that the new principles really do need to be added.7. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE 3.2 Size principles Here.
A. Deﬁnition 3. (EVEN∨ODD) says that the universe is roughly divisible by two: EVEN says that the universe is divisible by two without remainder. We now formalize this line of reasoning. But neither EVEN nor ODD is true in F.2. we can extend the model and again we can produce a statement of CS which is false in the resulting model. CA . But this model will still not satisfy CS. F is a model of BASIC.2. i. b ∈ F: F (a < b) iﬀ a and b are both ﬁnite and a < b or a and b are both coﬁnite and N − a > N − b or a is ﬁnite and b is inﬁnite. We can construct a similar statement that says the universe is roughly divisible by three — with remainder 0. To round out the result to a model of BASIC. If 0 ≤ m < n.3. Informally.8. But BASIC (EVEN ∨ ODD). for any two sets that are the same size are either both ﬁnite. or 2.e. in which case their union is also ﬁnite. this statement is in CS but is satisﬁed by neither our original model nor the model as amended. 1. but not entailed by BASIC. we also need to include all sets which are near the set of evens or the set of odds. So EVEN∨ODD is in CS. where. as we can see by generalizing the argument above. the new model will be closed under boolean operations and will satisfy BA. Consider the model F whose universe consists of all only the ˙ ﬁnite and coﬁnite subsets of N. As you might suspect. we can construct an inﬁnite model of BASIC . we can extend F to a model that satisﬁes EVEN by including the set of even numbers and the set of odd numbers and making them the same size. of LC< satisﬁes exactly one of the following: (EVEN) (ODD) ∃x∃y(x ∼ y ∧ x ∩ y = ∅ ∧ x ∪ y = I) ∃x∃y∃y(x ∼ y ∧ x ∩ y = x ∩ z = y ∩ z = ∅ ∧Atom(z) ∧ x ∪ y ∪ z = I) A EVEN if B(A) is even and A ODD if B(A) is odd. in which case they cannot be disjoint. those that diﬀer from the evens or odds by a ﬁnite set. (EVEN ∨ ODD). There is a (unique) way of ordering these added sets by smaller than that will satisfy BASIC: rank them according to the size and direction of their ﬁnite diﬀerence from the odds or the evens. With these additions made. for a. As with (EVEN ∨ ODD).AXIOMS FOR CS 25 Every standard ﬁnite interpretation. ODD says that there is a remainder of a single atom. Again. this is just the tip of the iceberg of principles missing from an axiomatization of CS. then . So. or both coﬁnite.
. . BASIC DIVn . The model. ∼ xn ∧ Atom(y1 ) ∧ . . So. ym ) = I) MODn.9. To demonstrate this. DIVn is the sentence MODn.0 ∨ . If 0 ≤ m < n and A is a standard ﬁnite interpretation of LC< .∃xn ∃y1 .2. . DIVJ = { DIVn  n ∈ J } b.11. If J is a set of natural numbers. . xn ) ∪ (y1 ∪ . BASIC Proof. . we need some independence results for sets of DIVn sentences. . . but it does not work. Deﬁnition 3.2. then a. we shall include sets which can be regarded as fractional portions of N. . .2. .10. BASIC CS. . ∨ MODn. BDIVj = BDIV{j} Our independence results will be obtained by constructing models of BASIC which satisfy speciﬁc sets of DIV sentences. .. . . MODn. . .m is the sentence 3.n−1 Fact 3.9c. ∃ym ( x1 ∼ x2 ∼ . If n > 1. for any n ﬁnite sets have a ﬁnite union and any two coﬁnite sets overlap.m says that the universe is divisible into n sets of the same size with m atoms remaining. . by 3. b. then (a) (b) (c) A A CS MODn. We did consider this. ym ) = ∅ ∧ (x1 ∪ . A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE ∃x1 . We could consider adding all DIVn sentences to BASIC in the hope that this would yield a complete set of axioms for CS. To build such models from subsets of N. ∧ Atom(ym ) ∧ 1≤i<j≤n (xi ∩ xj = ∅) (yi ∩ yj = ∅) 1≤i<j≤m ∧ ∧ (x1 ∪ . F deﬁned above satisﬁes BASIC but not DIVn .2.m iﬀ B(A) ≡ m mod n DIVn DIVn CS Theorem 3.26 a. BDIVJ = BASIC ∪ DIVJ c. xn ) ∩ (y1 ∪ .
QCn = { x  x is an nquasicongruence class } f. c. N is an nquasicongruence class for every n > 0: N = [nk + 0] ∪ . b.2. x is an ncongruence class iﬀ x = [nk + m] for some m. then N − x is the union of the remaining (n − m) ncongruence classes.14. x is an nquasicongruence class iﬀ x is the union of ﬁnitely many ncongruence classes. b. n>0 QCn Deﬁnition 3. x is a congruence class iﬀ x is an ncongruence class for some n. Proof. c. a. If x is the union of m of these classes. d. If x ∈ QCn and y ∈ QCn . . where 0 ≤ m < n. NEAR(x.12. .3.AXIOMS FOR CS Deﬁnition 3. . then x ∪ y ∈ QCn . For n ≥ 0. ak ∪ b1 ∪ . bj . . x is near y. If x ∈ QCn . [2n]. e. b. ∪ [nk + n − 1] Fact 3. a. and the set of odds. are 2congruence classes.2. .y). QC = Examples. N is a 1congruence class.2. x is a quasicongruence class iﬀ x is an nquasicongruence class for some n. ak and y = b1 ∪ .13. iﬀ x − y and y − x are both ﬁnite. 27 a. . Fact 3. Suppose x = a1 ∪ . The set of evens. x is near y iﬀ there are ﬁnite sets. bj . . a. [2n + 1]. Then x ∪ y = a1 ∪ . . N itself is the union of ncongruence classes. CA . d.2. then N − x ∈ QCn . .2. .15. b. . w1 and w2 such that x = (y ∪ w1 ) − w2 . [3k + 2] is a 3congruence class.
then x1 ∪ y1 is near x2 ∪ y2 . so x − y and y − x are ﬁnite. since x − x = ∅. c. b. so (x − y) is ﬁnite. Similarly. is ﬁnite. If x1 is near x2 and y1 is near y2 . so (y − x) is ﬁnite.2. If x is near y. which is ﬁnite. Suppose x is near y and y is near z. If x1 ⊆ x ⊆ x2 . A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE ⇒ Let w1 = x − y and let w2 = y − x. Proof.16. Since x1 ⊆ x. But (y − x1 ) is ﬁnite. x is near z. So the union. Note that (z − x) = ((z ∩ y) − x) ∪ ((z − y) − x) But (z − y) − x is ﬁnite because (z − y) is ﬁnite and ((z ∩ y) − x) is ﬁnite because ((z ∩ y) − x) ⊆ (y − x). (x − z) = ((x ∩ y) − z) ∪ ((x − y) − z) where ((x ∩ y) − z) ⊆ (y − z) and ((x − y) − z ⊆ (x − y). NEAR is an equivalence relation. . then x1 ∪ y is near x2 ∪ y. (y − x) ⊆ (y − x1 ).18. Fact 3. Fact 3. and x2 is near y. b. If x1 is near x2 . then x is near y. If x is near y. (z − x). (x − y) ⊆ (x2 − y). x1 is near y. Fact 3.17. ⇐ Suppose x = (y ∪ w1 ) − w2 . c. which is ﬁnite. a. x is near x.2. 3. a. then y is near x. So (x − z) is also ﬁnite. Since x ⊆ x2 .2. Immediate. Proof.28 Proof. Hence. Then x − y ⊆ w1 and y − x ⊆ w2 . But (x2 − y) is ﬁnite. then N − x is near N − y Proof.
then x ∪ y ∈ A. then x ⊆ N.142] Theorem 3. {Qn } = N. (N − x) − (N − y) = y − x and (N − y) − (N − x) = x − y.20: a. a. Q2 = { y ⊆ N  y is ﬁnite. p. since N ∈ {Qn } and if x ∈ Qn .13b by 3. We can now deﬁne the domains of the models we will use to establish the independence results.3. by transitivity. where I is interpreted as A.2.2. But (x1 ∪ y) − (x2 ∪ y) ⊆ (x1 − x2 ) and (x2 ∪ y) − (x1 ∪ y) ⊆ (x2 − x1 ) 29 b. Qn = { y  y is near an nquasicongruence class } b. So x1 ∪ y1 is near x2 ∪ y2 .2. c. near [2n] or near [2n + 1] }. Q1 = { y ⊆ N  y is ﬁnite or coﬁnite }. then A forms a boolean algebra under the usual settheoretic operations.2.20. Q2 is the domain of the model constructed above to satisfy DIV2 . x1 ∪ y1 is near x2 ∪ y1 . By (a). by 3.4. CA . b.2. b. Deﬁnition 3. If n > 0. Def. a. x1 − x2 and x2 − x1 are ﬁnite. If x ∈ A and y ∈ A. 9. If x ∈ Qn . coﬁnite.AXIOMS FOR CS a. then Qn forms an atomic boolean algebra under the usual settheoretic operations. and n>0 Qn b.141 and Corr 9. then c.21. which is near x2 ∪ y2 . Using Fact 3. Since x1 is near x2 .19.2.1. So if x and y are near each other. Proof. If A is a class of sets such that a. A − x ∈ A. If x ∈ A. then Suppose and So and So x is near y y ∈ QCn N − y ∈ QCn N − x is near N − y N − x ∈ Qn . Fact 3. [Monk. so are their complements. A ∈ A.18b . Q = Examples. p.2.
δ2 are sizes. (ii) θ1 + θ2 = ρ1 + ρ2 . b.23. δ1 and θ2 = ρ2 . The sizes assigned to sets are ordered pairs. Fact 3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE x ∈ QCn for some x y is near y y ∈ QCn for some y x ∪ y ∈ QCn x ∪ y is near x ∪ y x ∪ y ∈ QCn by 3. A size is an ordered pair ρ.2. Suppose and then and and and But then and So x ∈ Qn y ∈ Qn x is near x 3. δ1 + δ2 Only some of these sizes will actually be assigned to sets. We now deﬁne a size function on all sets which are near quasicongruence classes. Our intention in assigning sizes to sets is as follows: Suppose x is near an nquasicongruence class. First. ρ. So Qn is an atomic boolean algebra. then δ ≤ 0. if ρ = 0. Speciﬁcally. δ .2. Moreover. then (i) θ1 < θ2 iﬀ ρ1 < ρ2 or (ρ1 = ρ2 ∧ δ1 < δ2 ). Moreover. a. If θ1 = ρ1 .13a by 3.30 c. So x is the union of k ≤ n nquasicongruence classes. Deﬁnition 3. where ρ is rational and δ is an integer. . The deﬁnitions and facts below formalize this intention and demonstrate that the assignment of sizes to sets is welldeﬁned. The ﬁrst member is a rational between 0 and 1 which represents the density of the set. The δ value assigned to x is the ﬁnite number of elements added to or removed from x to obtain x. x . a size will be assigned to a set only if 0 ≤ ρ ≤ 1. Qn is a boolean algebra.2.22. assigned to x. every singleton is in Qn since all singletons are near ∅. The set x has density k/n and this is the value. then δ ≥ 0 and if ρ = 1. The second member is an integer which represents the ﬁnite (possibly negative) deviation of a set from average sets of the same density.18b Thus. we deﬁne the ordering and arithmetic for these sizes with the intention of inducing the size ordering and Sum relation for sets from the assignment of sizes to sets.2.
3. y ∈ QC. β(x) = the unique k such that x is the disjoint union of k α(x)congruence classes. ∪ xj and y = y1 ∪ . b. / xi = yj . the two would have to be near each other. . Let n be the least number such that x ∈ QCn and y ∈ QCn So each is a disjoint union of ncongruence classes: x = x1 ∪ . for any y. ∆2 (x) = C(x) − x. ∆1 (x) and ∆2 (x) are ﬁnite and x = (C(x) ∪ ∆1 (x)) − ∆2 (x) Deﬁnition 3. b. since NEAR is transitive. ∆1 (x) = x − C(x). But this is impossible by (a). If x were near two quasicongruence classes. . C(x) is the quasicongruence class near x. a. c. . if a ∈ y − x. Any set is near at most one quasicongruence class. since xi is inﬁnite Similarly.) b. no two quasicongruence classes are near each other.2. ∪ yk Suppose then But So So So a∈x−y a ∈ xi for some i. . then y − x is inﬁnite. If x is near a quasicongruence class. α(x) = the least n such that x ∈ QCn . for any j xi ⊆ x − y x − y is inﬁnite. and x = y. If x ∈ QC. If x ∈ QC. Deﬁnition 3.25. then a.24. then x is not near y. . a ∈ yj .2. then a.2. (That is. CA . b. Proof.AXIOMS FOR CS 31 a.
32 Examples.
3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE
a. If x = [2n + 1], α(x) = 2 and β(x) = 1. b. If x = [4n + 1] ∪ [4n + 2], α(x) = 4 and β(x) = 2. c. If x = [4n + 1] ∪ [4n + 3], α(x) = 2 and β(x) = 1, since x = [2n + 1]. Deﬁnition 3.2.26. If x ∈ Q, then ρ(x) = β(C(x)) α(C(x)) δ(x) = ∆1 (x) − ∆2 (x) θ(x) = ρ(x), δ(x)
We can, at last, deﬁne the models to be used in our independence proof. Deﬁnition 3.2.27. For n > 0, Qn is the interpretation Q of LC< in which boolean symbols receive their usual interpretation and ˙ Q = Qn x < y iﬀ θ(x) < θ(y) x ∼ y iﬀ θ(x) = θ(y)
Q
Q Q Q Unit(x) iﬀ θ(x) = 0, 1 Sum(x, y, z) iﬀ θ(z) = θ(x) + θ(y)
To show that the models Qn satisfy BASIC, we will need the following facts about congruence classes. Fact 3.2.28. a. If x = [an + b] and a2 = ac, then x=
0≤i<c
[a2 n + (ia + b)]
b. If x ∈ QCn and m = kn, then x ∈ QCm . c. If x ∈ QC and y ∈ QC, there is an n such that x ∈ QCn and y ∈ QCn . Proof. a. If k ∈ [a2 n + (ia + b)] for some i, 0 ≤ i < c, then, for some n1 , k = a2 n1 + ia + b = a(cn1 ) + ia + b = a(cn1 + i) + b So k ∈ x.
3.2. CA  AXIOMS FOR CS
33
If k ∈ x, there is an n1 such that k = an1 + b. Let n2 be the greatest n such that a2 n ≤ k and let k = k − a2 n2 . Since and then So But So k ≡ b mod a a2 n2 ≡ 0 mod a k ≡ b mod a k = ia + b, where 0 ≤ i < c k = a2 n2 + k = a2 n2 + ia + b k ∈ [a2 n + (ia + b)]
b. By (a), each ncongruence class is a disjoint union of mcongruence classes. c. Suppose x ∈ QCn1 and y ∈ QCn2 . Then, by (b), both x and y are in QCn1 n2 .
Theorem 3.2.29. For any n > 0, Qn
BASIC
Proof. By 3.2.21, Qn is an atomic boolean algebra; so Qn BA. The <relation of Qn is induced from the linear ordering of sizes; so it is a quasilinear ordering and IRREF< , TRICH, and DEF∼ are satisﬁed. As for the remaining axioms: a. SUBSET: Suppose x ⊂ y. If C(x) = C(y) then ρ(x) = ρ(y) and ∆1 (x) ⊆ ∆1 (y) and ∆2 (x) ⊆ ∆2 (y), where at least one of these inclusions is proper. So δ(x) < δ(y). But if C(x) = C(y), then C(x) ⊂ C(y), so ρ(x) < ρ(y). In either case, θ(x) < θ(y), so Qn x < y.
b. REP< : Suppose Qn x < y. So θ(x) = k1 /n, δ1 , θ(x) = k2 /n, δ2 , and either k1 < k2 or δ1 < δ2 . We want to ﬁnd some x ⊂ y such that Qn x∼x. If k1 = k2 > 0, then y must be inﬁnite; so, x can be obtained by removing δ2 − δ1 atoms from y. If k1 = k2 = 0, then 0 ≤ δ1 < δ2 ; so, again, x can be obtained by removing δ2 − δ1 atoms from y. If k2 > k1 > 0, then let y1 be the union of k1 ncongruence classes contained in C(y). So y − y1 is inﬁnite and y1 − y is ﬁnite. Let y2 = y1 − (y1 − y) = y1 ∩ y. So θ(y2 ) = k1 /n, −δ3 where δ3 = y1 − y. Finally, let δ4 = δ3 + δ1 and x = y2 ∪ y3 , where y3 ⊆ y1 − y with y3  = δ4 . If k1 = 0, then x is ﬁnite. If k2 > 0, then y is inﬁnite, so there is no problem. If k2 = 0, then y is ﬁnite, but has more members than x, since δ1 < δ2 . So, let x be any proper subset of y with δ1 members.
34
3. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE c. DISJ∪ : It is enough to show that if x and y are disjoint, then θ(x ∪ y) = θ(x) + θ(y). We need the following three facts: (i) C(x ∪ y) = C(x) ∪ C(y). (See Fact 3.2.18b.) (ii) ∆1 (x ∪ y) = (∆1 (x) ∪ ∆1 (y)) − (C(x) ∪ C(y)). If z ∈ x ∪ y but a ∈ C(x ∪ y), then a ∈ ∆1 (x) or a ∈ ∆1 (y); any / element of ∆1 (x) is also in ∆1 (x ∪ y) unless it is in C(y); any element of ∆1 (y) is also in ∆1 (x ∪ y) unless it is in C(x). (iii) ∆2 (x ∪ y) = (∆2 (x) ∪ ∆2 (y)) − (∆1 (x) ∪ ∆1 (y)). Note that if x ∈ Q, y ∈ Q, and x ∩ y = ∅, then C(x) ∩ C(y) = ∅; otherwise, C(x) and C(y) have an inﬁnite intersection.
Hence, if then or And if unless And if unless
a ∈ C(x) ∪ C(y) − (x ∪ y) a ∈ C(x) − x = ∆2 (x) a ∈ C(y) − y = ∆2 (y) a ∈ ∆2 (x), then a ∈ ∆2 (x ∪ y) a ∈ ∆1 (y) a ∈ ∆2 (y), then a ∈ ∆2 (x ∪ y) a ∈ ∆1 (x)
. From (ii) we obtain (iia): (iia) ∆1 (x ∪ y) = ∆1 (x) ∪ ∆1 (y) − (∆1 (x) ∪ ∆1 (y) ∩ (C(x) ∪ C(y))
and from (iii) we obtain (iiia): (iiia) ∆2 (x ∪ y) = ∆2 (x) ∪ ∆2 (y) − ∆1 (x) ∪ ∆1 (y) ∩ (∆2 (x) ∪ ∆2 (y)) But ∆1 (x) and ∆1 (y) are disjoint, since x and y are disjoint. So: (iv) ∆1 (x) ∪ ∆1 (y) = ∆1 (x) + ∆1 (y) = δ1 (x) + δ1 (y)
Since ∆2 (x) and ∆2 (y) are contained, respectively, in C(x) and C(y), which are disjoint, they are also disjoint. So: (v) ∆2 (x) ∪ ∆2 (y) = δ2 (x) + δ2 (y)
by (i). DEF+ : Suppose So Clearly Assume then So Let Assume then and Let So Claim For But So Qn Sum(x. y. For any n > 0.2.2. y = ∅ to satisfy DEF+ θ(x) < θ(z) Qn x ∼ x x ⊂ z for some x y =z−x z=x y y∼y by DISJ∪ θ(y) = θ(y ) so Qn since Qn REP< θ(x ) + θ(y ) = θ(z) θ(x ) = θ(x) θ(y ) = θ(z) − θ(x) = θ(y) (Cancellation is valid for sizes because it is valid for rationals and integers. Qn Proof. z) θ(z) = θ(x) + θ(y) θ(x) ≤ θ(z) θ(x) = θ(z) θ(y) = 0.AXIOMS FOR CS So. δ1 (x ∪ y)−δ2 (x ∪ y) = (δ1 (x) + δ1 (y)) − (δ2 (x) + δ2 (y)) = (δ1 (x) − δ2 (x)) + (δ1 (y) − δ2 (y)) = δ(x) + δ(y) 35 Since ρ(x ∪ y) = ρ(x) + ρ(y). .3. we know that θ(x ∪ y) = θ(x) + θ(y). If and and then θ(z) = θ(x ) + θ(y ) θ(x ) = θ(x) θ(y ) = θ(y) θ(z) = θ(x) + θ(y) Theorem 3.30. CA . 0 y=∅ x = z.) Conversely. d. DIVm iﬀ m  n.
the product is greater than µ(J). If BDIVJ DIVm . let Ai = [nk + i]. then Ai ∩ Aj = ∅ and Qn 1/n. Such sentences can be produced by generalizing the notion of divisibility to all sets instead of applying it only to the universe.2. Immediate from (b). group the n sets Ai into m collections with p members in each: B1 . If BDIVn b. we have bj ∈ Qn and θ(bj ) = p/n. . b . then m  n. bm = N.2. µ(J) always exists since the product of all members of J is divisible by each member of J. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE ⇒ θ(N) = 1. ⇐ For each i.32. then m  µ(J). .3. If J = ∅ and J is ﬁnite. 0 . (Ai ∼ Aj ) since θ(Ai ) = θ(Aj ) = Letting p = n/m. But if x ∈ Qn . 0 = Furthermore. if m disjoint sets of the same size exhaust N. Usually. If J is ﬁnite. b1 ∪ .2. then Qµ(J) DIVm . If m n. Qµ(J) BDIVJ since it satisﬁes DIVj for each j ∈ J. Corollary 3.20: a. ¬DIVm b. 0≤i<n Ai .33. Based on Theorem 3. DIVm . So N = If i = j. But. if m µ(J). 0 . Bj for 1 ≤ j ≤ m. Hence. DIVm . We are now ready to show that BDIVn CS by ﬁnding a sentence in CS which entails inﬁnitely many DIVn sentences. 0 . c. .31. is the least k which is divisible by every member of J. . Deﬁnition 3. There are only ﬁnitely many m for which BDIVJ Proof. for integral a and b. then Qn BDIVn . So b = 0 and a = n/m.36 3. 0 ≤ i < n. . 0 . Deﬁnition 3. µ(J). they must each have size 1/m. then θ(x) = a/n. since only ﬁnitely many m divide µ(J). then the least common multiple of J. Bm Letting bj = 1/m. . Remark. . then a. c.
.2. CA . we have partitioned x into nk n sets of the same size and nk j + i atoms.0 (z) ∨ . for all m b.35. Each nonatomic set in the partition can be further partitioned into n sets of the same size and atoms. and all ﬁnite sets are roughly divisible by every n. DIVnm .34. Every set in every standard ﬁnite interpretation is a ﬁnite set.2. Proof. so ADIVn ADIVnm . . xi )] Timesn (x. w) ∧ Sum(v. If 0 ≤ n.n−1 (z) d. We have taken this opportunity to formulate the divisibility predicates purely in terms of size predicates. . ∨ Modn. ∃xn [x0 = ∅ ∧ xn = y ∧ 1≤i≤n 37 Sum(xi−1 . for all m. . A T . Proof. ADIVn is the sentence ∀xDivn (x) Remark. y) is the formula: ∃x0 .m (I) and DIVn ≡ Divn (I) Fact 3.2. DIVn .AXIOMS FOR CS a. But nk n = nk+1 and. y) says that y is the same size as the Sum of n sets. A ADIVnk+1 .m ≡ Modn. then nm = n. Notice that in the presence of BASIC. Hence. x. nk j + i < nk+1 . for every n.m (z) says that z can be partitioned in n sets of the same size and m atoms. where j < n. and x ∈ A. Fact 3. then x can be partitioned into nk sets of the same size and i atoms. MODn. c. If 0 ≤ m < n. b. ADIVnm . z)] Modn. By induction on m: if m = 1. then Modn. and c. then Timesn (x. ADIVn : a. where i < nk . v) ∧ Unit(y) ∧ T imesm (y. Divn (z) is the formula Modn. . Thus. ˙ If T ADIVnk .m (z) is the formula: ∃x∃y∃v∃w[T imesn (x. w. each the same size as x. BASIC.3. since i < nk and j < n. a. CS ADIVn .
A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE c.3. Theorem 3. T has a consistent. by Lindenbaum’s lemma. we are left with a theory weaker than CS. Deﬁnition 3. BDIVN ADIVn for any n > 1.e.36. Proof. CA ≡ BASIC ∪ { ADIVn  n > 0 } The remainder of this chapter and the next two are devoted to showing that CA is. (Lindenbaum’s lemma) Every consistent theory has a consistent. Proof. T is a completion of T iﬀ T is a complete. p. ¬φ is consistent. a. Since this weakness has arisen in the case of ADIV sentences. then T2 T1 . then by compactness there is a ﬁnite set J such that BDIVJ ADIVn . which says that BDIVJ entails only ﬁnitely many DIVn sentences. a. by Fact 3.2.38 b. If BDIVN ADIVn . complete extension. T . b. Since T2 ⊆ T .3 Remarks on showing that CA axiomatizes CS We know that CS CA and we want to show that CA ≡ CS. i. But then BDIVJ DIVnk for every k.1. To do so. But T is not consistent with T1 . If every consistent.32.2. But this contradicts Fact 3.2.2. complete extension of T2 . . Suppose that T1 φ. 3. that CA CS. consistent extension of T . even if we add all of the DIV sentences to BASIC. Then T = T2 .13. Fact 3. it is reasonable to attempt an axiomatization of CS as follows: Deﬁnition 3.35c. Obvious. complete extension of T2 is consistent with T1 .2. So. T2 φ.200] b. a complete set of axioms for CS. indeed. T is also a consistent. it will be suﬃcient to show that every consistent extension of CA is consistent with CS. Immediate from (a) and (b). Theorem 11. 3. [Monk. complete extension.3.37.
Every ﬁnite completion of CA is equivalent to CA. a. . b. T is a ﬁnite completion of T iﬀ T is true in some ﬁnite model of T. T EXACTLYn . Remainder theories specify. . Since T is complete. What. CAI = CA ∪ INF b. Proof.4. REMARKS ON SHOWING THAT CA AXIOMATIZES CS 39 To prove that every completion of CA is consistent with CS. If T is a completion of T and BA ⊆ T . T .EXACTLYn .6. So T ¬ATLEASTn+1 and has no inﬁnite models.3.1. CSI = CS ∪ INF So.) Proof. we may now concentrate on showing that every completion of CAI is consistent with CSI. a. b. EXACTLYn is a standard ﬁnite interpretation. Deﬁnition 3. T is an inﬁnite completion of T iﬀ T is true in some inﬁnite model of T .5. for each n.3. the number of atoms remaining when the universe is divided into n disjoint sets of the same size. BASIC is categorical in every ﬁnite power. The model A of CA.3. for some n. a.3.n−1 Any completion. then (T is a ﬁnite completion of T iﬀ T is not an inﬁnite completion of T . to show that every completion of CA is consistent with CS. ∨ MODn. ⇒ Suppose A is a ﬁnite model of T with n atoms. then. ⇐ T ATLEASTn for every n. where DIVn is MODn. Fact 3. Fact 3. CA BASIC and. T has to entail one of the disjuncts. Deﬁnition 3.3. we deﬁne two kinds of completions of a theory.6. by Theorem 2. of CAI has to solve the disjunction DIVn for each n.0 ∨ .3. so T has no ﬁnite models. . b. are the completions of CAI? Recall that CA entails DIVn for every n > 0. a. So A CS.3. Every ﬁnite completion of CA is consistent with CS.
In this section. f is congruous iﬀ every ﬁnite restriction of f is congruous.80] b. There are congruous f without any solutions. then gcd(i. Hence. By compactness. j ∈ Dom(f ). f is congruous by 3. Since CS. Fact 3. The remainder theory speciﬁed by f . of f . of f is congruous.3.8a. Any solution would have to be larger than every prime. φ is consistent. a. otherwise. Proof.3. n is a solution for f iﬀ for any i ∈ Dom(f ). (⇐)Every ﬁnite restriction. f is ﬁnite iﬀ Dom(f ) is ﬁnite. a. a. If f is ﬁnite. Tf = T ∪ RTf . then CSf is consistent iﬀ f is congruous. (⇐)If f is congruous.3. (Let f (p) = p − 1. c. f has a solution.m  f (n) = m }. f is congruous by 3. b.8b.8.3. hence. is the set of sentences { MODn. CSf is consistent iﬀ f is congruous. Chapter 5 will show that if f is total. f. Theorem 511. c. j)  f (i) − f (j). f is congruous iﬀ for any i. then f has a solution iﬀ f is congruous iﬀ f has inﬁnitely many solutions.) Theorem 3.7. f is total iﬀ Dom(f ) = N+ . then.40 3. f is incongruous. otherwise f is partial. e. CAIf is complete and that these are the only complete extensions of CAI. So An CS. . If T is a theory. [Griﬃn. we will show that CAIf is consistent just in case CSIf is consistent. φ b. for all primes p. p. RTf . (⇒)Let φ = RTf . By (a). (⇒)For every ﬁnite restriction. So CSg is consistent. by (a). CSf is consistent. d.) b.9. CSIf is consistent iﬀ f is congruous. g. there is some n such that An φ. c. (Henceforth f ranges over remainder functions. g. Remainder functions and remainder theories a. CSg is consistent. g.3. So n is a solution of f and. f : N+ → N is a remainder function iﬀ 0 ≤ f (n) < n for all n ∈ Dom(f ). n ≡ f (i) mod i. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE Deﬁnition 3. If f is ﬁnite. n. each such g is congruous.
n c1 .1 . .p → MODm. . Lemma 3. then CA MODm. a1. 41 (⇐)By compactness. . . .q . . If n  m. . T is consistent.3.1 . . . then CA MODm. by (b).n ∪ 1≤j≤k2 aj. . 0 ≤ q < n. j ≤ n.p → ¬MODm. Suppose A MODm.3. by 3.10. cq For 1 ≤ i ≤ n. then T ⊆ CSg ∪ { AT LEAST i  i < n } for some n and some ﬁnite restriction.n bk1 . b2. for 1 ≤ i. So. let Bi = 1≤j≤k1 bj. a2. So g has arbitrarily large solutions and CSg has ﬁnite models large enough to satisfy T . A MODn.1 .q . bk1 . Hence. b1. and p ≡ q mod n. B(A) can be partitioned into m sets of the same size b1. cq ) So. (⇒)If CSIf is consistent. B(A) = 1≤i≤n Bi ∪ (c1 . so is CSf . . ak2 . So.p . To do this. and p = k2 n + q. Since f is congruous. . A Bi ∼ Bj . our proposed axiomatization of CS.q . We now want to prove a similar theorem for CA. . If 0 ≤ p < q < m. . g. it is suﬃcient to show that every ﬁnite subtheory.1 . Furthermore. we must ﬁrst establish that certain sentences are theorems of CA. g is as well. of f .1 . . if T is such a theory.n Since A DISJ∪ .n a2. . .1 . .n ak2 . Proof.11. of CSIf is consistent. f is congruous.3. Lemma 3.3. But. .3. T .n b2.8b. REMARKS ON SHOWING THAT CA AXIOMATIZES CS c. k1 = m/n.n and p atoms a1.
So yi < xi for 1 ≤ i ≤ m. then X ∪ A ∼ Y ∪ B and if x1 < y1 . Proof. c. But A ∼ B. Then: A A x1 ∪ . by RC∼ . then CAf is consistent iﬀ f is congruous. Thus (I − A) ∼ (I − B). Theorem 3. and k such that k = gcd(i. by RC∼ . (⇒)Supposing that f is incongruous. .3. then X ∪ A < Y ∪ B. We will show that (*) CA ¬(MODi.q .42 Proof. . Let and So and zi = xi − yi Y = yi ∪ · · · ∪ ym Y ∪Z =X =I −A Y ∪ B = I − B. j. ap = I y1 ∪ . But Z must be larger than B . But Y ∼ Y . j) and k (f (i) − f (j)). so Y ∪ Z ∼ Y ∪ B . . b. there is a component of Y of the same size.f (i) ∧ MODj. Since A REP< . for B is the union of fewer than m atoms while Z is the union of m nonempty sets. . since for each component of Y . Let X = x1 ∪ · · · ∪ xm Y = y1 ∪ · · · ∪ ym A = a1 ∪ · · · ∪ ap B = b1 ∪ · · · ∪ bp B = bp+1 ∪ · · · ∪ bq We claim that y1 < x1 . If f is ﬁnite. . . a. neither is possible since Y ∪ B ⊂ I = X ∪ a. So Z ∼ B . ym ∪ b1 ∪ .f (j) ) .p ∧ ¬MODm. if y1 ∼ x1 . CAIf is consistent iﬀ f is congruous. . there is a proper subset yi of xi which is the same size at yi . For.12. a. . CAf is consistent iﬀ f is congruous. So. Suppose A 3. xm ∪ a1 ∪ . the original supposition entails a contradiction. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE MODm. bq = I where the a’s and b’s are atoms and the x’s (y’s) are disjoint sets of the same size in A. since each is the disjoint union of p atoms. there exist i.
11 yields (3) CA MODk. See proof of 3. then CAIf is complete.3. .3. REMARKS ON SHOWING THAT CA AXIOMATIZES CS from which it follows that CAf is inconsistent. Since k f (i) − f (j).3.9b. So (2) is a consequence of (3). We already know that the ﬁnite completions of CA are consistent with CS (see 3. q < k. See proof of 3.12). we have (1) (2) CA MODi. CAIf is consistent iﬀ CSIf is consistent.10.1b. So lemma 3. and (3) we may conclude (*). and CA MODj. (⇐)Follows from 3.3.3.9c and 3.q From (1).q 43 since k  i and k  j. c. It might help to review our strategy before presenting the diﬃcult parts of the proof that CA ≡ CS. Let p and q be such that 0 ≤ p. (2). and f (j) ≡ q mod k By lemma 3.3.f (i) → MODk. p = q. f (i) ≡ p mod k.12c.3.3.p . then T ≡ CAIf for some total. (4) If f is total and congruous.13.9a since CAf ⊆ CSf .p → ¬MODk. Immediate from 3. (1) (2) CA CS Every completion of CA is consistent with CS.3.3. then CSIf is also consistent (see 3. (3) If T is a completion of CAI.f (j) → MODk.3.9c.3. Proof. congruous f . it is suﬃcient to prove (4) because every completion of CAI entails CAIf for some total f .3. To establish (3). which follows from (2) by 3. The main objective is (1). b.5c) and that if CAIf is consistent. Corollary 3.
which deals only with sizes of sets and ignores boolean relations. Chapter 4 formulates PSIZE and establishes that it is model complete. we can infer (6) from (7). Finally. we consider a simpler theory. then CAIf has a prime model. Fact C7a). Fact C.3). So (4) follows from (5) and (6).44 3. a result we need for showing that CAI is model complete. we invoke the prime model test: If T is model complete and T has a prime model. CAIf is model complete. (5) (6) If f is total and congruous. The proof outlined here will be carried out in Chapter 5. (7) CAI is model complete. But ﬁrst. since any extension of a model complete theory is also model complete (see Appendix. PSIZE. . So (1) follows from (5) and (7). then T is complete (see Appendix. A FORMAL THEORY OF CLASS SIZE To prove (4). For any f .
A. Deﬁnition 4. L< . then PCS is our version of number theory. PCS is the set of statements true in SA for any standard ﬁnite model. 4. here.1. of BASIC. Sizes. PCA. If x is a member of A. then σA [x] is the size of x in A: σA [x] = { y  A 45 (x ∼ y) } . section 4 indicates how PCA could be shown to axiomatize PCS.we only give a sketchy treatment of PCS itself. This method is the same outlined in chapter 3 to show that CA ≡ CS. SA .4 The Pure Theory of Class Sizes CS is about sets. PCS (the pure theory of class sizes). Finally. but only about sizes of sets. Suppose A ˙ a. But our main reason for introducing PCS is to aid the proof that CA is model complete. Section 1 deﬁnes PCS and develops a set of axioms.1 Size models and PCS BASIC. This is done by reducing PCA to the theory Zgm. which holds in SA whenever A BASIC and a set of divisibility principles. as follows: for each model. which is not about sets. consists of equivalence classes ˙ drawn from A under the same size relation. Using some results about model theory in section 2. the main result of this chapter and the only result needed for subsequent proofs. A. for it. For this reason. we identify a theory. for if number theory is the theory of cardinal numbers.1. whose models are Zgroups taken modulo some speciﬁc element. it makes claims about sets in terms of their boolean relations and their size relations. PCS is worth examining in its own right. PCS is formulated in the language of size relations. the size model. In this chapter. Section 3 establishes that PCA is model complete. PCA consists of a theory. PSIZE. are equivalence classes of sets which have the same size.
consists of the following axioms: Order axioms (IRREF< ) (TRANS< ) (UNIQ∼ ) (MAX) (MIN) (TRICH) Unit axioms Unit(x) ↔ (y < x ↔ y = 0) ∃xUnit(x) ¬(x < x) x<y∧y <z →x<z x∼y↔x=y x≤I 0≤x x<y∨x∼y∨y <x . PSIZE. y. is the interpretation of L< whose domain ˙ is σA [x]  x ∈ A where SA σA [x] ∼ σA [y] iﬀ A SA σA [x] < σA [y] iﬀ A Sum(σA [x]. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES b. SA .2. I) These interpretations are well deﬁned because the predicates are satisﬁed ˙ by elements of A in virtue of their sizes.1.46 4.3. and Atom(x) SA c. y. the theory of sizes. y. z) and A z ∼ z . z ). Deﬁnition 4. if A Sum(x. then A Sum(x. z). y. consists of all sentences of L< which are true in the size model of every standard ﬁnite interpretation of LC< . The oneplace operator x is to be read as the complementary size of x: ˜ SA (y = x) iﬀ SA ˜ Sum(x. PCS. the size model for A.1. σA [y]. the pure theory of class sizes. For example. Deﬁnition 4. σA [z]) iﬀ A SA Unit(σA [x]) iﬀ A x∼y x<y Sum(x.
2. then SA PCS. then the elements of SA can be regarded as the sequence 0. z. where SA Unit(x) iﬀ x = 1 and SA Sum(i. is deﬁned as: PSIZE ∪ { ADIVn  n > 0 } Fact 4. z) ∧ y2 ≤ y1 → ∃zSum(x. then SA PCA If A is a standard ﬁnite interpretation of BASIC with n atoms. x.z2 ) → (x1 < x2 ↔ z1 < z2 ) Sum(x. . z1 ) ∧ Sum(x2 . MONOT rules out the interpretation in which Sum(i. z. Theorem 4. y. y. z) Sum(x1 . 0. . If T satisﬁes Monk’s Condition.5.2. k) iﬀ (i + j) = k ≤ n Once n is ﬁxed. y. n with the usual ordering. PCA. SOME MODELS AND THEORIES Sum axioms (IDENT) (COMM) (MONOT) (ASSOC) (EXIST+ ) (EXIST− ) (COMP) Fact 4. then T is model complete. We oﬀer PCA as an axiomatic version of PCS: Deﬁnition 4.1a to show that PCA is model complete and Theorem 4. . PSIZE 47 Proof. 4. x.1. . In particular. this is the only interpretation allowed by the axioms PSIZE. z) Sum(x.2 Some models and theories We shall use Theorem 4. w2 ) → Sum(x. w1 ) ∧ Sum(w1 .1. k) is satisﬁed just in case (i + j) ≡ k mod n + 1. y. j.2. w2 .4.7. a. PSIZE fails to axiomatize PCS for the same reason that BASIC fails to axiomatize CS: the lack of divisibility principles. .6. y1 . z) x ≤ z → ∃ySum(x. If A CA. w) ∧ Sum(y.1. I) ˜ BASIC. w) ∃zSum(x. x) Sum(x. that CAI is model complete. z) ↔ Sum(y.4.1.1. y2 . PSIZE Sum(x. the pure class size axioms. in chapter 5. If A Fact 4. j.2. y.1b to show.
of L2 with exactly (n + 1) free variables. If LT has no function symbols. suppose C contains a1 . assigns to each nplace predicate. then f (x) = x. τP . assigns to each nplace function symbol.48 4. If A T . in L12 a (quantiﬁer free) formula.355] Deﬁnition 4. . To establish the model completeness of PCA. O. . and C is a ﬁnitely generated submodel of B. . f is a Monk mapping. φ3 is a primitive formula. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES Monk’s Condition. In chapter 5. τ∀ . of L2 with exactly one free variable. p. then there is an isomor˙ ˙ phism. So.2. . b. [Monk. then any ﬁnitely generated structure over ˙ ˙ LT is ﬁnite. . A ⊆ B. Let φ1 be the diagram of C and obtain φ2 from φ1 by substituting the variable xi for each constant ai and the variable yi for each constant bi . . . If T is model complete and LT has no function symbols. in L12 a (quantiﬁer free) formula. . then T2 is also model complete. then T satisﬁes Monk’s Condition. B φ3 (a1 . and L is an expansion of L by adjoining new individual constants. . . ∃ym φ2 So. .2. B T . . Suppose L1 and L2 are ﬁrst order languages and L12 = L1 − L2 . which: a. Finally. A translation (simple translation) of L1 into L2 is a function. then T is model complete in L . So. assigns to the universal quantiﬁer a (quantiﬁer free) formula.359] b. . P . to obtain the desired isomorphism. τO . map ˙ the ai ’s into themselves and map the bi ’s into a sequence of elements of A which can stand in for the existentially quantiﬁed variables of φ3 . so A does as well.2. a. and c. we use Monk’s Theorem to infer the model completeness of the theory CA from that of PCA. . of L2 with exactly n free variables. we use Fact 4.2. f : C → A such that if x ∈ C ∩ A. τ . a. .5d in the Appendix. p. b.3.2. If T1 is model complete and T1 T2 . by Fact C. If T is model complete in L. bm ˙ ˙ (from BA). Proof. Fact 4. b. an (from A) and b1 . [Monk. an ). let φ3 be ∃y1 .
6.2. . The existential assumption of a translation says that that subdomain is nonempty. . A translation from L2 into L1 induces a mapping from interpretations of L2 into interpretations of L1 . b.4.5.2. . . A interprets all predicates and function symbols common to L1 and L2 in the same way that B does. If τ is a translation from L1 into L2 and B is an interpretation of L2 which satisﬁes the existential and functional assumptions of τ . The functional assumptions of τ are the sentences: ∀x1 . then a. . .4. . b. . then τ extends to all formulae of L1 as follows: a. b. SOME MODELS AND THEORIES 49 Deﬁnition 4. If τ is a translation of L1 into L2 . xn . If τ is a translation of L1 into L2 . Deﬁnition 4.2. . ∀xn (τ∀ (x1 ) ∧ . τ (φ ∨ ψ) = τ (φ) ∨ τ (ψ) τ (φ ∧ ψ) = τ (φ) ∧ τ (ψ) τ (¬φ) = ¬τ (φ) τ (∀xφ) = ∀x(τ∀ (x) → φ) τ (∃xφ) = ∃x(τ∀ (x) ∧ φ) Deﬁnition 4. then τ (B) is the interpretation A of L1 such that: ˙ ˙ a. Predicates and function symbols of L2 are translated into themselves.2. A is the set of elements of B which satisfy τ∀ . y2 ) ↔ y1 = y2 )) where O is a function symbol in L1 but not in L2 . ∧ τ∀ (xn )) → ∃y1 (τ∀ (y1 ) ∧ ∀y2 (τO (x1 . The existential assumption of τ is ∃xτ∀ (x) The functional assumptions of a translation say that the formulas which translate function symbols yield unique values within the relevant part of the domain when given values in the relevant part of the domain. Notice that the existential and functional assumptions of a translation are sentences of L2 . The relevant part of the domain is the set of elements which satisfy the interpretation of universal quantiﬁer.
∃yn φ (x) where φ (x) is a conjunction of atomic formulae and negations of atomic formulae. .2. . . . . Suppose that T1 is τ reducible to T2 and that A1 = τ (A2 ). of L1 and any sequence. for any primitive formula. . there exist models A2 and B2 such that A2 T2 and B2 T2 . Lemma 4. .9. Suppose φ(x) = ∃y1 . . If T2 is model complete. yn )) iﬀ A2 τφ (x) Theorem 4. A interprets all predicates and function symbols in L12 in accordance with the translations assigned by τ . τ . ∃yn φ (x.7. such that A1 T1 and B1 T1 . and A2 ⊆ B2 A1 = τ (A2 ) and B1 = τ (B2 ). bn ) ∃y1 . A1 and B1 . A P (x) iﬀ B y = O(x) iﬀ B τP (x) τO (x.2. . for bi ∈ A φ(x) iﬀ A2 τφ (x) τφ (x. ∃yn (τ∀ (y1 ) ∧ . . y1 . c. . . τ is a simple translation from LT1 to LT2 . . . T1 is uniformly τ reducible to T2 iﬀ for any models. . Deﬁnition 4. . and T1 is uniformly τ reducible to T2 .2. bn ). b1 . A1 Proof. φ. If τ is a translation from L1 to L2 . . for which T1 is τ reducible to T2 .8. . . b1 . then T1 is also model complete. y) A The following condition on theories allows us to infer the model completeness of one from the model completeness of the other. Then A1 φ(x) iﬀ A1 iﬀ A1 iﬀ A2 iﬀ A2 ∃y1 . T1 is reducible (simply reducible) to T2 iﬀ there is a (simple) translation. and A1 ⊆ B1 . b. . THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES c. x ∈ A1 . . yn ) ˙ φ (x. .50 4. a. . then T1 is τ reducible to T2 iﬀ for every model A of T1 there is a model B of T2 such that A = τ (B). y1 . . . ∧ τ∀ (yn ) ∧ φ (x. Then.
SOME MODELS AND THEORIES 51 Proof. and (3) above and: (4 ) x+y =x+z →y =z c. it is enough to show that given models A1 and B1 of T1 . The axioms of simple order are: (5) (6) (7) (8) x≤y∧y ≤z →x≤z x≤y∧y ≤x→x=y x≤x x≤y∨y ≤x d.5d in the Appendix. where A1 = τ (A2 ) and B1 = τ (B2 ) Since then So and B1 B2 A2 A1 φ(x) τφ (x) τφ (x) φ(x) by assumption by lemma 4.4.8 since T2 is model complete by lemma 4. (2).2. a.2. where A1 ⊆ B1 and a primitive formula. The theory of cancellable abelian semigroups with identity consists of (1).10. (ii) The axioms for simple order. The theory of Zgroups. By Fact C. Zg . which will serve in showing that our theory of size is model complete.2.8 We shall now deﬁne several theories. φ: If then B1 A1 ˙ φ(x) for x ∈ A φ(x) Since T1 is uniformly τ reducible to T2 .2. there are models of T2 . all more or less familiar. Deﬁnition 4. The theory of abelian groups with identity has the following axioms (1) (2) (3) (4) x + (y + z) = (x + y) + z x+y =y+x x+0=x ∃y(x + y = 0) b. . A2 ⊆ B2 . has the following axioms (i) The axioms for abelian groups with identity.
Zg is model complete. The theory of Zgroups modulo I is model complete. Zg is the complete theory of Z. (ii) The axioms for simple order (iii) Axioms (10) and (11) of Zg. 291] Fact 4. ∨ ny = x + (n − 1)) for each positive n. +. . THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES (iii) The following additional axioms: (9) (10) (11) y ≤z →x+y ≤x+z 1 is the least element greater than 0 ∀x∃y(ny = x ∨ . and (iv) The additional axiom: (12) 0≤x f.[Robinson] Theorem 4.2.12. and (iv) The following additional axioms (13) (14) (y ≤ z ∧ x ≤ x + z) → x + y ≤ x + z) x≤I The theory of Zgroups is taken from [Chang. 1.52 4. Zgm. consists of the following axioms: (i) The axioms for abelian groups with identity. [Chang. p. The theory of Zgroups modulo I. b. a.2. axiom (12) from the theory of Nsemigroups. a. p. . where ny stands for: y + ··· + y n times e. 0. (iii) Axioms (9) and (10) of Zg. The theory of Nsemigroups is model complete. (ii) The axioms of simple order. ≤ .11. . The theory of Nsemigroups has the following axioms: (i) The axioms for cancellable abelian semigroups with identity.291] b.
where τ is the following translation. It is clear from the construction in [Kurosh] that if the semigroup is ordered. Moreover. We claim that the theory of Zgroups modulo I is uniformly reducible to this new theory by the following translation: τ∀ = x ≤ I τ+ = x + y = z ∨ x + y = I + z (The construction: given a model of Zgm. 53 a. First.2b.2.12) and Theorem 4.11).2. we shall show that every model of PCA is the τ image of a model of Zgm.2. besides the constant symbols in the original theory. so is the former. an individual constant. I. The result is an Nsemigroup and the original model is isomorphic to the ﬁrst copy of itself. Chapter 5 uses Monk’s Theorem to show that CA is model complete. 4448]. by 4.9. b. the (rough) divisibility of the elements in the semigroup will be carried over to the group. consider the theory of Nsemigroups in the language which contains. The theory of Nsemigroups is modelcomplete in this language.2.3. pp.9 to show that PSIZE is model complete. by reducing it to the theory of Zgroups modulo I. PCA IS MODEL COMPLETE Proof. Consequently. Speciﬁcally. 4. the theory of Nsemigroups is uniformly reducible to the theory of Z groups by the translation: τ∀ = 0 ≤ x Since the latter is model complete. the theory of Zgroups with addition taken modulo some constant (see 4. Every abelian semigroup with cancellation can be isomorphically embedded in an abelian group [Kurosh.9.) In the next section. .4. we shall reduce it to Zgm. The model completeness of PCA then follows from the model completeness of Zgm (Fact 4. assigning interpretations in the obvious way.2. we use Theorem 4. the abelian group in which it is embedded may also be ordered and that the elements of the semigroup will be the positive elements of the group. by 4.2. stack up ω many copies of the model.3 PCA is model complete To show that PCA is model complete.
3. Let τ be the translation from LPSIZE to LZgm where: τ∀ = x = x τSum(x.3.3.3. we can construct a model. ZA . ) . y. The following are theorems of PSIZE.3.6 veriﬁes some connections between A and ZA .2 gives Sum a functional interpretation. Theorem 4.3.3. 4. Fact 4. z). a. w) ∧ Sum(w. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES Deﬁnition 4.3.54 4. (Sm(x.z) = τUnit(x) = τx = ˜ τx<y = τ∅ = x+y =z∧x≤z x=1 x+y =I x≤y∧x=y x=0 Given a model. z ) x ˜ ˜ (f) ZA (x = 1) iﬀ A Unit(x) Fact 4.3j establishes that 4. y. then ZA is the interpretation of LZgm in (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) ZA ˙ Z˙A = A ZA (x ≤ y) iﬀ A (x < y ∨ x = y) ZA (I) = A(I) ZA (0) = A(0) (x + y = z) iﬀ A Sum(x. of Zgm directly: Deﬁnition 4.3. y) abbreviates ∃zSum(x. y .3. on the basis of the intervening facts: 4. of PCA.2.4 deals with the corresponding model ZA .3 deals with the model A of PSIZE.1.y. z) or A ∃a∃wUnit(a) ∧ Sum(˜. A. If A which: PSIZE. 4.8 establishes that ZA Zgm.
by 4.3. y. z2 ) → (z1 = z2 = I) x ˜ ˜ ∃z1 Sum(x. y2 .4.3. a. Given a model A of PSIZE. y. a. z2 )) x ˜ ˜ Proof. y ) ˜ ˜ Sum(x. z1 ) ↔ ¬∃a∃w∃z2 (Unit(a) ∧ Sum(˜. y . y. w)) ˜ x=x ˜ x<y↔y<x ˜ ˜ x<y∧y <y →x<x ˜ ˜ Sm(x. w1 ) & Sum(w1 . then ZA ⇒ If then But So ZA 0 + y = 0 A Sum(∅. y . The proofs are elementary. Given a model A of PSIZE: for each x in Z˙A . w) ∧ Sum(w. We shall state these in terms of the model ZA . z1 ) ∧ Sum(˜. ∅) A Sum(∅. ZA is the expansion of ZA induced by the deﬁnitions in 4. z) → y1 = y2 (UNIQ+ ) (UNIQ− ) Sum(x. y ) x ˜ Sum(x. ∅) ZA y = 0 x + y = 0 iﬀ y = 0. w) → (ASSOC2) ∃w2 (Sum(y. ∅.3. y. y.3. y1 . we require a battery of tedious facts about the model ZA . y) ∨ Sm(˜. z. there is a unique y such that: ZA x + y = 0 Proof. which interprets two additional operators. z2 ) → z1 = z2 Sum(x. w2 . z. If x = 0. z) ∧ Sum(x. an expansion of both A and ZA .3. y.3.2e by IDENT by UNIQ− . w2 ) ∧ Sum(x. z1 ) ∧ Sum(x. z) → Sum(˜. In addition to the theorems of PSIZE listed in 4. x) z ˜ Sum(x. y. z . as follows: Deﬁnition 4. z) → Sum(x. y.4.2 together with (a) and (b): (a) (b) ZA ZA y = −x iﬀ ZA z = x − y iﬀ ZA x+y =0 z = x + −y Remark. y. PCA IS MODEL COMPLETE 55 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h1) (h2) (i) (j) Sum(x.
a. b) c. w) x ˜ A Sum(w. 0) by COMP and UNIQ− by 4. there is a unique y which satisﬁes (*) Sum(˜. ZA satisﬁes the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Proof. c) ∧ 0 < a → Sum(−c. y . b) ↔ Sum(a. −c. ˜ ∅) A A A A ˜=I ∅ w=a ˜ Sum(˜. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES b. a) x ˜ ˜ Sum(˜. y) x x + y = 0 iﬀ A (*). y . −a) −(x + y) = −x + −y −(x − y) = y − x (x + y) − y = x −(−x) = x x = 0 ∧ x < y → −y < −x . y . a.5.3. a + b) b.3. c ≤ b ↔ Sum(c. a) x ˜ ˜ Sum(˜. y). −b) Sum(a.3. Sm(a. since A Sum(x.2e Fact 4. b.3h2 by COMP by 4.6. ZA satisﬁes the following: a. where Unit (a) x UNIQ+ . If x > 0. a. a. b − c. Sum(a.3. Omitted. b. y. since there is a unique unit and A But ZA ⇒ If then and But So So So ⇐ If then and So A A A ZA (*) Sum(˜. ˜ a ∅) x+y =0 ZA x + y = 0 A Sum(˜. c) ∧ 0 < b → Sum(a. Fact 4.3. b.3d and h2 by 4.56 ⇐ Obvious 4. b.
a. b. w.4. −c) a=0 Sm(a. PCA IS MODEL COMPLETE d. b. (⇒) Suppose then So So So So (⇐) Suppose But So So c. ¬Sm(a. −b) ∨ b = −a) Proof. b − c. b) Sum(a. b − c.3. (⇒) Suppose So So So Sm(a.3. b) by EXIST− by (a) and UNIQ+ by 4. Suppose and then So So So So But if then And if then Sum(a.5c by (a) by IDENT by MONOT and UNIQ+ . 0. c) 0<b c = (a + b) c − b = (a + b) − b c−b=a −b=a−c Sum(a.3. b. a + b) 57 by 4. b) for some w b=c+w b − c = (c + w) − c b−c=w Sum(c. −c) a=0 a < c.3. since 0 < b Sum(c. b) → (Sm(−a.3. w) for some w (a + b) = w Sum(a. b.2e (⇐)Obvious. −c. −b) if Sm(a.5c by 4.5c by IDENT by MONOT and UNIQ+ by MIN by (a) and UNIQ+ by 4. b) Sum(c. c) 0 ≤ (b − c) ↔ b ≤ c b≤c c≤b Sum(c.
a) ˜ Sm(a.3. a + b).3. −b) (a + b) = 0 b = −a by by by by by by by by 4. b) b = (a + b) − a.3. a.3. Sum(−a.3.5c (a) (b) TRICH 4.5e 4.7. Suppose But So So So But if then So So But So So And if then − c < −a −c≤a ˜ Sm(a. We need the following lemma.5c We can now show that ZA Zgm. b) and c ≤ b We know and So So and So Sum(b − c.3. −b. b) Sum(b. (−a + −b) − (−a) = −b. −a + −b) Sm(−a. c. ¬Sum(a. w) ∧ Sum(b − c.3. a + b) ∃w(Sum(c.6a by ASSOC2 by 4. a. We shall work through successively more general cases: a.3. (a + b) − a.3. w. a + b) w =c+a a + b = (b − c) + (c + a) a + b = (a + c) + (b − c) by 4.5e 4. The only real diﬃculty arises in verifying that addition is associative.6b by 4. − a < −a + −b.4 IDENT EXIST+ ¬Sm(a.3. Lemma 4. ZA (a + c) + (b − c) = a + b Proof. (a + b) < a. (a + b) = 0 − a < −(a + b). −a + −b). THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES by by by by 4.5a (b) 4. Sum(−a.6a and UNIQ+ by 4. When Sm(a. −c) 4.3.6a and UNIQ+ .58 So So But So d. (−a + −b) − (−a). ¬(a ≤ a + b).
b − c) Sum(−c.3.3. −c. b) and Sm(a. Case (a) applies directly b<c a + c = (a + b) + (c − b) (a + c) − (c − b) = a + b (a + c) + −(c − b) = a + b (a + b) + (b − c) = a + b 59 by by by by Case (a) 4. c) Case (b) applies ¬Sm(a.3.5b by 4. b) by ASSOC by 4. b. −c) or c = −a since ¬Sm(a. b.3. −c) Sum(−a. −c.3.6c 4.3. a + b) Sum(a + c. Whenever Suppose ¬Sm(a. c − b. c) If So assume then So So So c. b) If So assume So and So So So Either Assume then So and So So Assume then and Hence and and So So d. b.5a by 4.3. When Sm(a. b).4b 4.6b MONOT 4.6c by 4.3.4. −c.5b by by by by by (c1) EXIST+ 4. −c.3. −(−a)) Sum(a + c. Sm(a.5c 4. b − c) Sm(−a.3. −c.5d (c2) by (c2) by (c1) since Sm(a. c) Sm(−a. −(c − b)) Sum(b. c) 0<c−b Sum(b.6d by 4. −(a + c)) 0 < −a Sum(−(−(a + c)). −c. b − c) Sum(a. a) c = −a a+c=0 a = −c Sum(a + c.6a . for otherwise case c applies.6a by 4. a) Sum(−c. PCA IS MODEL COMPLETE b. a + b) (a + c) + (b − c) = a + b c ≤ b. Sm(a. c) and thus b < c Sum(b. −a + −c) Sum(−a.3.3. −c. b − c.3.
x + y) A x+y ≤x+z ZA x + y ≤ x + z by EXIST+ by MONOT .60 Either Assume then and 4.5a 4. −b) − a + −b = (−a + −c) + (−b − −c) − (a + b) = −(a + c) + −(b − c) − (a + b) = −((a + c) + (b − c)) a + b = (a + c) + (b − c) by 4.3. The only axiom for abelian groups that needs further veriﬁcation is associativity.8.3. x + z) ZA y < z A Sum(x.3. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES Sm(−a. −b) or b = −a b = −a a+b=0 b − c = (−a) − c = −a + −c = −(a + c) (a + b) + (b − c) = (a + c) + −(a + c) =0=a+b Sm(−a.5a 4. ZA satisﬁes axioms (12). ZA satisﬁes axiom (10) of Zgm because A satisﬁes the UNIT axiom of PSIZE.3. Similarly. by 4.3. A PSIZE.5d Theorem 4. and (14) of Zgm because A satisﬁes MIN and MAX.7 = (x + y) + z. z.5c The ordering axioms of Zgm are satisﬁed in ZA because ZA uses the same ordering as A. ZA Zgm Proof.3. and PSIZE includes the same ordering axioms. Axiom (13) of Zgm is: y ≤z∧x≤x+z →x+y ≤x+z If then Since then and So ZA x ≤ x + z A Sum(x.3.6d So Assume then So So So by by by by case c 4.7: x + (y + z) = (x + y) + ((y + z) − y). The divisibility of elements in ZA required by axiom (11) of Zgm is guaranteed by the fact that A satisﬁes the divisibility principles of PCA. We prove this using lemma 4.3. y. by 4.
9. (1) (2) PCA PCS Every completion of PCA is consistent with PCS. 4. PCA is model complete. Theorem 4. (3a) (3b) If PCAIf is consistent.4. EXACTLYn is true in SA . we PCA is τ reducible to Zgm. which follows from (2) by 3. (2a) (2b) Every ﬁnite completion of PCA is consistent with PCS. then T ≡ PCAIf . so we need only prove (1).2. b.3. PCA satisﬁes Monk’s condition. . REMARKS ON SHOWING THAT PCA AXIOMATIZES PCS 61 So. where A is the standard ﬁnite interpretation of LC< containing n atoms. But PCA. we would have to deﬁne EXACTLYn in terms of units rather than atoms. EXACTLYn . Proof. we may conclude that PCA is model complete. a.) Letting PCAI = PCA + INF and PCSI = PCS + INF. We already know that PCS PCA. Immediate from (a) and 4. But (2) is equivalent to the conjunction of (2a) and (2b). So.3. a.1b.2. Apply Theorem 4.4 Remarks on showing that PCA axiomatizes PCS To prove that PCA ≡ PCS. b. the ﬁnite completions of PCA are consistent with PCS.1(b). Every inﬁnite completion of PCA is consistent with PCS. for some f . If T is a completion of PCAI. then PCSIf is consistent.4.9. we could follow the method outlined at the end of chapter 3 for showing that CA ≡ CS. The reduction is uniform since each model A of PCA has the same domain as its Zgmmodel. The ﬁnite completions of PCA are the theories PCA. So. (2b) is a consequence of (3a) and (3b). (Formally.
(4) If f is total. THE PURE THEORY OF CLASS SIZES To prove (3a). .3. It’s apparent that the size models of the prime models for CAIf would do nicely. because every completion of PCAI entails PCAIf for some total f . so only (5) remains to be shown.62 4. We will not construct prime models for the extensions of PCAI. This seems straightforward. it is suﬃcient to demonstrate (4).13 for PCA and PCS. Alternatively. then PCAIf is has a prime model. (5) If f is total and congruous. then PCAIf is complete.3. but tedious.9 through 3. To prove (3b). But PCA is model complete. we would have to prove analogues of 3. the construction could be duplicated in this simpler case. The trick is to show that enough axioms about size have been incorporated in PCA to establish the entailments among MOD statements.
and C is a ﬁnitely generated Theorem 5.1. where ˙ ˙ f (x) = x if x ∈ C ∩ A The Monk mappings for PCA can serve as a guide in constructing Monk mappings for CA. given Assumption 5. f : C → A. Strictly speaking. There is an isomorphic embedding. So. a ﬁnitely generated submodel of SB . so we cannot apply Monk’s Theorem directly. 63 .1.5 Completeness of CA 5.2. where ˙ ˙ g(σB [x]) = σA [x] for all x ∈ C ∩ A.2. There is an isomorphic embedding.1).3: Fact 5.1. DISJ∪ and REP< then allow us to ﬁnd elements with those sizes that ﬁt together in the right way. Assumption 5. g : SC → SA .3.1. we want to prove 5. clearly. so we may conclude 5. B CA. CA. The existence of Monk mappings for PCA tells us that we can ﬁnd elements with the right sizes.1.1. A ⊆ B . let SB (X) = the submodel of SB whose domain is { σB [x]  x ∈ X } Then. and SB (C). Monk’s Theorem applies directly to SB (A).1 Model completeness of CA We shall show that CA is model complete by showing that it satisﬁes Monk’s criterion (see 4. and SB (C).1.1. But. SA is not a submodel of SB . SB . A substructure of B. SA SC SB (A) ⊆ SB .3.
64
5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
That is to say, the sizes of elements in C can be embedded in the sizes of elements in A. It remains to be shown that the elements of C themselves can be mapped into A by a function which preserves boolean relations as well as size relations. C is a ﬁnite, and hence atomic, boolean algebra, though its atoms need not be atoms of B; indeed, if B is inﬁnite, there must be some atoms of C which are not atoms of B since the union of all atoms of C is the basis of B. ˙ ˙ Deﬁnition 5.1.4. d is a molecule iﬀ d ∈ C ∩ A and no proper subset of d ˙ ∩ A. ˙ is in C ˙ ˙ C ∩ A is a boolean algebra whose basis is the same as the basis of C. So every atom of C is included in some molecule. The embedding f has to map each molecule to itself. Moreover, f has to be determined by its values on C since f must preserve unions. In fact, the atoms of C can be partitioned among the molecules. So, if d = b1 ∪ . . . ∪ bn where d is a molecule and b1 , . . . , bn are the atoms of C contained in d, then d must also be the (disjoint) union of f (b1 ), . . . , f (bn ). If this condition is satisﬁed, f will preserve boolean relations. f must also select images with appropriate sizes. Proof. Proof of 5.1.2 Given a molecule, d, let b1 , . . . , bn be the atoms of C contained in d. For each bi , let ci be some member of g(σB [bi ]) These elements ˙ ˙ will be elements of A, since g yields sizes in A whose members are in A. These elements have the right sizes, as we will show below, but they are in the wrong places. We have no guarantee that they are contained in the molecule d. So we ˙ still need to show that there are disjoint elements of A, a1 , . . . , an whose union is d and whose sizes are the same as those of b1 , . . . , bn , respectively. Well, Suppose So So So So d = b1 ∪ . . . ∪ bn C Sum(b1 , . . . , bn , d) SC Sum(σB [b1 ], . . . , σB [bn ], σB [d]) SA Sum(g(σB [b1 ]), . . . , g(σB [bn ]), g(σB [d])) SA Sum(c1 , . . . , cn , d)
since each ci ∈ g(σB [bi ]) and d ∈ g(σB [d]) = σA [d]. So, the existence of a1 , . . . , an , as above, is guaranteed because A DEF+ . Now, let f (bi ) = ai for each bi in the molecule d. Repeating this procedure ˙ for each molecule yields a value of f for each atom of C. Finally, if x ∈ C is nonatomic, then x = b1 ∪ . . . ∪ bk where each bk is atomic. So let f (x) = f (b1 ) ∪ . . . ∪ f (bk )
5.1. MODEL COMPLETENESS OF CA
65
f satisﬁes the requirements of Theorem 5.1.2: Boolean relations are preserved by f because the function is determined by its values on the atoms of C; f maps elements of C ∩ A into themselves because the set of atoms contained in ˙ each of these molecules is mapped into a disjoint collection of elements of A whose union is the same molecule; so, we need only show that f preserves size relations. To do so, we invoke lemma 5.1.6, below: (a) (b) (c) (d) C C C x < y iﬀ A x ∼ y iﬀ A f (x) < f (y) f (x) ∼ f (y) Sum(f (x), f (y), f (z)) Unit(y)
Sum(x, y, z) iﬀ A C Unit(x) iﬀ A
Proof of (a): (The others are similar).
C
x < y iﬀ iﬀ iﬀ iﬀ
SB σB [x] < σB [y] SA g(σB [x]) < g(σB [y]) SA σA [f (x)] < σA [f (y)] A f (x) < f (y)
by 5.1.6
So, we may conclude: Theorem 5.1.5. CA is model complete. ˙ Lemma 5.1.6. For all x in C, σA [f (x)] = g(σB [x]) Proof. Suppose x = b1 ∪ · · · ∪ bn ˙ where each bi is an atom of C. So So So But So But So So B Sum(b1 , . . . , bn , x) SB Sum(σB [b1 ], . . . , σB [bn ], σB [x]) SA Sum(g(σB [b1 ]), . . . , g(σB [bn ]), g(σB [x])) g(σB [b]) = σA [f (b)] SA Sum(σA [f (b1 )], . . . , σA [f (bn )], g(σB [x])) A Sum(f (b1 ), . . . , f (bn ), f (x)) SA Sum(σA [f (b1 )], . . . , σA [f (bn )], σA [f (x)]) g(σB [x]) = σA [f (x)] since B DISJ∪
since SA ⊆ SB by the choice of f (b). since A since SA DISJ∪ UNIQ+
66
5. COMPLETENESS OF CA
5.2
Prime models for CA
For each total, congruous remainder function, f , we want to ﬁnd a prime model, Qf , for CAIf . All of these prime models can be deﬁned over the class, Q, of sets near quasicongruence classes (see section 3.2). For diﬀerent remainder functions, we need to assign diﬀerent size relations over Q. Section 5.2.1 deﬁnes the structures Qf and veriﬁes that each satisﬁes the respective theory, CAIf . Section 5.2.2 deﬁnes, for each model of CAIf , a submodel, or shell. Section 5.2.3 shows that Qf is isomorphic to the shell of any model of CAIf .
5.2.1
The standard protomodels
The construction here is a more elaborate version of the construction of Q in chapter 3 (see 3.2.19). Q turns out to be Qf , where f (n) = 0 for all n. As in the case of Q, the models Qf and their copies in arbitrary models of CAI are unions of chains. The sizes assigned to elements of Q to induce Qf for a total, congruous remainder function, f , are more elaborate than those used in the deﬁnition of Q (see 3.2.22), but they are employed in substantially the same way: Deﬁnition 5.2.1. a. A size is an ordered pair ρ, δ , where both ρ and δ are rational. b. If θ1 = ρ1 , δ1 and θ2 = ρ2 , δ2 are sizes, then (i) θ1 < θ2 iﬀ ρ1 < ρ2 or ρ1 = ρ2 and δ1 < δ2 . (ii) θ1 + θ2 = ρ1 + ρ2 , δ1 + δ2 (cf 3.2.22) To assign sizes for Qf we rely on the representation of sets in Q deﬁned in 3.2.24. Qf , unlike Q, assigns diﬀerent sizes to the ncongruence classes for a given n. Deﬁnition 5.2.2. If f is total and congruous, then a. If x is an ncongruence class, x = [nk + i], then θf (x) =
1 n−f (n) n, n 1 −f (n) , n , n
,
if i < f (n), if f (n) ≤ i.
b. If x ∈ QCn , so that x is the disjoint union of ncongruence classes, x1 ∪ . . . ∪ xk then θf (x) = θf (x1 ) + · · · + θf (xk )
2.n θf (x) ρf (x) δf (x) for for for for Qn . then Qf.2.n is the submodel of Qf whose domain is Qn . δ . then the standard protomodel for f is Qf .3. then Qf. Fact 5.n BASIC. ρ(x). the ﬁrst f (n) ncongruence classes are each one atom larger that the remaining (n − f (n)) ncongruence classes.2. ∆1 (x) − 0.2.2. θ(x).2.2. ∆1 (x) − ∆2 (x) 67 Intuitively. y. as in Q. The proof can be obtained from the proof of Theorem 3. Deﬁnition 5.29 by substituting: Qf. Instead. If f is total and congruous. and δ(x) . then θf (x) = 0. then θf (x) = θf (C(x)) + θf (∆1 (x)) − θf (∆2 (x)) = θf (C(x)) + 0. all ncongruence classes are assigned sizes 1/n. If x is ﬁnite. If f is total and congruous. ∆2 (x) = θf (C(x)) + 0. If x ∈ Q. Proof.5.27) To verify that the structure Qf is a model of CAIf . PRIME MODELS FOR CA c. z) iﬀ θf (z) = θf (x) + θf (y) Qf (cf 3.4. 1 Sum(x. If f is total and congruous and n > 0. so that x can be represented as (C(x) ∪ ∆1 (x)) − ∆2 (x) as in 3. where ˙ Q{ = Q Qf x < y iﬀ θf (x) < θf (y) Qf x ∼ y iﬀ θf (x) = θf (y) Qf Unit(x) iﬀ θf (x) = 0. we exhibit each such model as the union of a chain of models. x d. but δ is no longer 0 in all cases. for total and congruous f .5.24. The desired models of CAI may now be deﬁned: Deﬁnition 5.
3 is not an extension of Qf. f (6) ∈ {0. Suppose that f (2) = 0. ˙ Deﬁnition 5. . COMPLETENESS OF CA The following notion is helpful in understanding our constructions. then xi ∩ xj = ∅. If n > m.2 [2n] is one atom larger than [2n + 1] Here. and easier. If 0 < i ≤ m.7. since f is congruous. xi is a common nfactor of x. Proof. x ∈ A. then Qf. . so Qf.68 5. If f (6) = 2. If f (6) = 4. . for any f . then all of the 3congruence classes are charmed except for [6n + 4] and [6n + 5]. [2n] contains exactly one more charmed congruence class than [2n + 1]. xn . . 3. a. . xj ). as C(x).6.6 [2n] ∼ [2n + 1] Suppose. since size relations are determined by the representations of each set. then [6n] and [6n + 1] are the only charmed 3congruence classes.n! ⊆ Qf. Letting n = 2 and m = 3. The xi are approximately the same size: (i) If 0 < i < j ≤ m. Then an (n. xi is called a charmed nfactor of x. so that Qf. for i > m. 4}. For example Qf. [2n] will include the same number of charmed 3congruence classes as [2n + 1]. x. It will be clearer. then xi ∼ xj . ∆1 (x). (iii) If 0 < i ≤ m < j ≤ n.2. then xi ∼ xj . we want to show that the 2congruence classes have the same size relations in Qf.6 [2n] is one atom larger than [2n + 1] So it goes in general. If 0 < i < j ≤ n. to establish this by example rather than by formal proof. . But this sequence does harbor a chain of models: Fact 5. then all of the 6congruence classes are common.2 [2n] ∼ [2n + 1] Since f is congruous. The sequence Qf. then Sum(xi .2 .2. .2 . and c. 5}.m)partition of x in A is a sequence x1 . and 0 ≤ m < n. The other elements of Qf. x is partitioned among n pairwise disjoint sets which are roughly the same size: each of the ﬁrst m is one atom larger than each of the remaining n − m. (ii) If m < i < j ≤ n.6 as they do in Qf. so that Qf.n does not constitute a chain of models. ∪ xn b. however that f (2) = 1. and ∆2 (x). for any atom a. so Qf. where a.6 will then fall into place. x = x1 ∪ . 2.m! . In any case. f (6) ∈ {1. In other words. In any case. Suppose A BASIC. If f (6) = 0.
and x23 whose union is x2 . d. to include in B. if the basis of A is in B and B CAI. the exact size relations will be determined by which MOD principles are satisﬁed in A. Fact B.f (n) . since the symbol I must refer to the same set in the ˙ submodel as it does in the model. x11 .1 .2. of CAIf . x12 . x21 . we must ﬁnd a smallest submodel. Qf Proof. b. (b). Since MODn. x22 . also guarantees that x0 is divisible by 3: the three unions x11 ∪ x21 . Clearly. a. Qf c. x12 ∪ x22 . the basis of A. Insuring that x1 and x2 are each divisible by 3.2 Shells of models To embed the model Qf into an arbitrary model.n MODn. must be included in B. then a.9. Qf. then Qf = n>0 69 Qf. BASIC ADIVk .2. The existence of such sets is assured because A ADIV3 .f (n) is an existential sentence. c. Each ncongruence class can be partitioned into k nkcongruence classes. for n > 0 CAIf 5. But.n! Fact 5. Immediate from (a). A. B.8. so it is preserved under unions of chains.7 allows us to regard Qf as the union of a chain of models: Fact 5. for k > 0 MODn. Qf b. Again.2. ˙ B must also satisfy ADIV3 . We can aim for this by placing in B three disjoint sets. x0 . and x13 whose union is x1 and another three disjoint sets. and (c). of A which satisﬁes CAI. Whether these are exactly the same size or diﬀer by an atom depends on whether A MOD2. x1 and x2 .5).5. Pick such a pair.f (n) .2. PRIME MODELS FOR CA Fact 5.2. If f is total and congruous. call it x0 . and x13 ∪ x23 will be roughly the same size and will exhaust x0 .0 or A MOD2. (See Appendix. by deﬁnition. . it is preserved under extensions. Qf d. BASIC is a universalexistential theory. If f is total and congruous. ˙ must contain two disjoint sets of roughly the same size whose union is then B ˙ the basis of A.
then λ(i) = ni .2. but this would still not be an atomic boolean algebra.e. (ii) If 1 ≤ i ≤ k. we show that the shell of A is isomorphic to Qf . This will produce an inﬁnite tree. assigns a node set Aλ and a node atom. λ 0extends κ iﬀ λ extends κ and. be the basis of A. We leave the solution of this problem to the formal construction. A boolean algebra could be obtained by including both the node sets and their ﬁnite unions. aλ . nor will it be closed under ﬁnite unions. If λ = n1 . for 1 ≤ i ≤ L(κ). . we present the construction which.11. which is what we are looking for. Third. First. and let a 0 . congruous be any atom of A. where k > 0 and for all i ≤ k. the set of nodes on which we shall hang both the components of the successive partitions described above and the atoms of the submodel being constructed. Nodes constitute the vertices of an inﬁnite tree in which 0 is the root and λ dominates κ iﬀ κ extends λ. . A node is a ﬁnite sequence n1 . The number of immediate descendants of a node grows as the depth of the node increases. given a model A of CAIf . we deﬁne the shell of A as the submodel of A generated by the collection of node sets and node atoms. of λ. λ(i) = 0. .) b. we deﬁne a tree. . We shall now assign a set to each node by repeatedly partitioning the basis of A. (iii) λ • m = n1 .2. (The variables λ and κ range over nodes. the smaller the set it bears and the greater the number of successors among which this set will be partitioned. the tree: Deﬁnition 5. m c.70 5. must be countable. Deﬁnition 5. In the next section. COMPLETENESS OF CA We can continue this process indeﬁnitely. nk . to each node. L(λ) is k. then (i) The length. d. a. . to be a prime model. . . λ(i) = κ(i). . This great tree of sets will not form a boolean algebra. where f is a total. i. λ extends κ iﬀ L(λ) > L(κ) and. The deeper a node is in this tree. bearing sets.10. We cannot correct for this problem ˙ by including in B all atoms of A: A may have uncountably many atoms while B. At the same time we shall assign an atom to each node. . or depth. . Given A = Af remainder function: a. Second. dividing each set introduced at stage n into n + 1 roughly equal subsets at stage n + 1. . for L(κ) < i ≤ L(λ). The formal proof proceeds as follows: First. Let A 0 CAIf . . nk . λ. ni < i. nk .
In either case.k (x) f (nm) − f (n) n ˙ b. suppose that each common nfactor has k charmed mfactors and m − k common mfactors. c. Every charmed nfactor of A has an (m. Every common nfactor of A has an (m. k)partition. . All common nfactors are the same size and satisfy the same Modm.3. m > 0.2. . Fact 5.k (x) says that x has an (m. k)partition. Suppose A CAIf .2. In all. . Suppose that Aλ and aλ have been chosen. Proof. Let Aλ•0 . let aλ•i be any atomic subset of Aλ•i . PRIME MODELS FOR CA b. k + 1)partition.12. and k= Then a. Let m = L(λ) and let k= f ((m + 1)!) − f (m!) m! 71 Since f is congruous. k + 1) partition of Aλ if Aλ is charmed. .7e). The sets Aλ will be referred to as node sets and the atoms aλ as node atoms. the charmed mfactors of the nfactors are the charmed nm factors of A and the common mfactors of the nfactors are the common nm factors of A. If 0 < i ≤ m. So. Aλ•m be an (m + 1.12 guarantees that such partitions exist. there are (n − f (n))k + f (n)(k + 1) =nk + f (n) . k)partition iﬀ A Modm. n > 0. ˙ c.2. Fact 5. a. choose Aλ•0 so that it contains aλ .5. Modm. A has f (n) charmed nfactors and n − f (n) common nfactors. k) partition of Aλ if Aλ is common or an (m + 1. Partitioning each of the nfactors into m subsets of roughly the same size yields an nmpartition of A. This is always possible because Aλ contains aλ . By (a). x has an (m. Each of the common n factors has k charmed mfactors and each of the charmed nfactors has k + 1 charmed mfactors. Let aλ•0 = aλ .k predicate. b. k is an integer (see Deﬁnition 3.
hence. node sets) of depth n. since every charmed nfactor is one atom larger than each common nfactor. f (n!))partition of the basis of A.72 5. Every node set contains inﬁnitely many node atoms.2. We demonstrate (k) by induction on n. so.0)partition of itself. f (n!) = 0. Assume that (k ) holds for n. then κ = λ. e. and Aλ 0 is the basis of A. by (a) again. f. b. So (k ) holds because any set is a (1. There are n! nodes (and. j. . Immediate from (b). Then (k ) also holds for n + 1: each node set of depth n has n + 1 immediate descendants.13. the node sets of depth n form an (n!. a. Each node set is the disjoint union of all of its descendants at any given depth.2. If i = j. then Aλ•i ∩ Aλ•j = ∅. The facts listed in 5. Proof.13 should clarify this constuction. g.: If n = 1. h. there are f (nm) charmed nmfactors of A. k. then n! = 1. aλ ⊂ Aκ iﬀ λ extends κ. Fact 5. Each node set is the disjoint union of its immediate descendants. Any two node sets of the same depth are disjoint. aλ = aκ iﬀ one of λ and κ 0extends the other. Aλ ⊂ Aκ iﬀ κ extends λ or κ = λ. If Aλ = Aκ . COMPLETENESS OF CA charmed mfactors among the nfactors of A. there are (n!)(n + 1) = (n + 1)! node sets of depth n + 1. For any n. But. d. All of them can be established by induction on the depth of nodes. i. c. So f (nm) = nk + f (n) k = (f (nm) − f (n))/n and c.
aλ } . the n + 1 factors of the nfactors of the basis form an ((n + 1)!. {Aλ . ˆ d. a model of CAIf .12. the shell of A is the submodel of A generated by {Aλ . PRIME MODELS FOR CA 73 Furthermore. from a model. Aλ . By Fact 5. Deﬁnition 5. a total. Then. aλ . congruous remainder function b. c. Suppose f is total and congruous.5. A. f . k + 1)partition and each common nfactor has an (n + 1. f ((n + 1)!))partition of the basis.2.2.14. that A CAIf and Aλ and aλ are the node sets and nodeatoms of A produced by construction 5.12. the number of charmed nfactors is: (k + 1)f (n!) + k(n! − f (n!)) = kf (n!) + f (n!) + n!k − f (n!)k = f (n!) + n!k = f (n!) + f ((n!)(n + 1)) − f (n!) = f (n!)(n + 1)) = f ((n + 1)!) So. we will regard as ﬁxed: a. of A which is isomorphic to Qf . there are (k + 1)f (n!) charmed n + 1 factors from the charmed nfactors and k(n! − f (n!)) charmed n + 1 factors from the common nfactors In all. That is to say. So. each charmed nfactor has an (n + 1. a set of node sets and nodeatoms produced by the construction above. aλ }. where k= f (n!(n + 1)) − f (n!) n! f ((n + 1)!) − f (n!) n! = (substituting n! for n and n + 1 for m). A. B. (k ) holds for n + 1. we can now construct a submodel. A. the shell of A generated from {Aλ . k)partition. f (n!) of the nfactors are charmed and n! − f (n!) are common. then . and nodeatoms. Given a collection of node sets.1. aλ }. For the remainder of this chapter. of CAIf .2.
2.2. so it must also contain sets obtained by adding or removing Aﬁnite sets from quasinodal sets.15 through 3. each of which preserves Anearness to quasinodal sets. ˆ a.18 obtain for Anearness.143. ˆ (⇐)A must contain ﬁnite unions of node sets as well as Aﬁnite sets. If x ∈ A. . Fact 5. Proof. If x ∈ A and y ∈ A. both of which are Aﬁnite sets. Analogues of 3. ˙ ˆ c. Recall from 3.15.24 that each member.2. b.18) ˙ ˆ Still following in the footsteps of chapter 3.74 5. then x is Anear y iﬀ both x − y and y − x are Aﬁnite sets. x. ∆1 (x) and ∆2 (x) are ﬁnite sets and ∆1 (x) ∩ C(x) = ∅ ∆1 (x) ∩ ∆2 (x) = ∅ ∆2 (x) ⊆ C(x) ˆ We can obtain a similar representation for elements of A: the node sets play the role of (some of) the congruence classes. (cf. we can characterize A as the collection of sets Anear quasinodal sets. ﬁnite unions of node sets correspond to the quasicongruence classes. x is an Aﬁnite set iﬀ it is a ﬁnite set of node atoms. a. x is a quasinodal set of A iﬀ it is the union of ﬁnitely many node sets (iﬀ it is the union of ﬁnitely many node sets at a given depth). ˆ b. ﬁnite sets of nodeatoms correspond to the ﬁnite subsets in Q. Deﬁnition 5. c. 3. A is an atomic boolean algebra whose atoms are the nodeatoms aλ . COMPLETENESS OF CA ˆ To show that A Qf .16. x ∈ A iﬀ x is Anear some quasinodal set of A.2. ˙ ˆ a. then x has a unique representation as (C(x) ∪ ∆1 (x)) − ∆2 (x) where C(x) is a quasinodal set disjoint from ∆1 (x) and including ∆2 (x).2. we need a sharper characterization of the elements ˆ of A. of Q has a unique representation as (C(x) ∪ ∆1 (x)) − ∆2 (x) where C(x) is a quasicongruence class.2. (⇒)A is generated from node sets and node atoms via the boolean operations.2.
2. a. we are stipulating which (n. Suppose λ is a node. but with two differences: ﬁrst.0 Q 0. nk .5.1. Deﬁnition 5. we are performing the construction 5.1. 5.2. then Qλ = [k!n + m] where k m= i=1 λ(i)(i − 1)! b. This latter condition guarantees that the shell of Qf will be Qf itself.3 The embeddings To embed Qf into A.23). and.12 on Qf . . If λ = n1 .18.19.2 = [n] = [2n] = [2n + 1] = [6n + 1] = [6n + 4] = [6n + 5] Deﬁnition 5. . m)partitions to use at each level. qλ = {ι(λ)} Fact 5. Examples.2. PRIME MODELS FOR CA b.2. . Let C(x) be the quasinodal set which is Anear x (see 3.2. we are selecting node atoms so that every singleton in Q is the node atom for some node. In eﬀect. Then a.2. If L(λ) = k.21 exactly. Let ∆1 (x) = x − C(x).17.1 Q 0. a. The proof parallels that of Theorem 3. second. The depth of Qλ is L(λ).2. 75 c. Q0 Q 0.0 Q 0. b. ι(λ) = the least n ∈ Qλ .2 Q 0.2. .0. we ﬁrst describe Q in terms of node sets and node atoms. then k ι(λ) = i=1 (i − 1)!ni . let ∆2 (x) = C(x) − x.
c. suppose ﬁrst that x ∈ QC.2. For every n. deﬁne the embedding of Qf into A: ˙ ˆ Fact 5. There is at most one such y. λ. c.76 5. We may. λι(λn ) = λn d.2. If x ∈ Q.20. we can associate with each natural number a shortest (i. n. there are inﬁnitely many λ such that n = ι(λ). a.2.23. If ι(λ) = k.e. the ι(λ) take on all and only values less than n!.2.13k holds. Though for a given natural number n.16. To show that there is such a y. For every n.2. d. ι(λn ) = n b. λ extends λι(λ) c. then all nodes along the leftmost branch descending from λ also have the value k. λn = the shortest λ such that ι(λ) = n. Fact 5. Then there is some n such that x = x1 ∪ · · · ∪ xk . These are the only nodes below λ with the value k.2. there’s a λ such that n = ι(λ). ι(λ) = ι(κ) iﬀ λ = κ or one 0extends the other. At each depth.13 hold for the sets Qλ and qλ .) Each of the points listed in Fact 5. Every natural number is the value of all and only those nodes along the leftmost branch descending from some node. Deﬁnition 5.22. there is a unique y ∈ A such that ∀λ(qλ ⊆ x ↔ aλ ⊆ y) Proof. there’s a λ such that n = ι(κ) iﬀ κ = λ or κ 0extends λ. ﬁnally. That is to say. e. that 5. by Fact 5. the Qλ can be regarded as node sets and the qλ as node atoms for any model Qf . shallowest) node for which ι(λ) = n. COMPLETENESS OF CA b. λι(λ) = λ iﬀ λ =< 0 > or λ(L(λ)) = 0 (ie a node. For every n. Notice. there will be inﬁnitely many nodes λ for which ι(λ) = n. a. will be the highest node with a certain value just in case λ is not the leftmost immediate descendant of its parent.21. especially.2. b. Fact 5.
a. and let y = (y ∪ { aλ  qλ ⊆ ∆1 (x) }) − { aλ  qλ ⊆ ∆2 (x) } ˙ Deﬁnition 5. If x ∈ Q. so x = x .2.2..2.13h 77 ˙ ˆ where x is a quasicongruence class. ˙ ˆ c. as described above. Immediate from the proof of 5.25. for some i iﬀ λ extends λi iﬀ aλ ⊂ Aλi iﬀ aλ ⊂ y.2.23. then g(x) = (g(C(x)) ∪ g(∆1 (x))) − g(∆2 (x)) b. The nodal embedding of Q into A is deﬁned by letting ˙ ˆ g(x ∈ Q) be the y ∈ A such that ∀λ(aλ ⊆ y ↔ qλ ⊆ x) Fact 5. g is oneone. let y = Aλ1 ∪ · · · ∪ Aλk ˙ ˆ So y ∈ A and: qλ ⊂ x iﬀ qλ ⊂ Qλi . a. If x is not a quasicongruence class. Let y be the element of A corresponding to x .2. . b. Proof. Suppose g(x) = y = g(x ).5.24. then x = (x ∪ ∆1 (x)) − ∆2 (x) by 5. So x = Qλ1 ∪ · · · ∪ Qλk Now. PRIME MODELS FOR CA where each xi is an (n!)congruence class and hence a node set in Qf . g maps Q onto A. Then ∀λ(qλ ⊆ x ↔ aλ ⊆ y ↔ qλ ⊆ x ) But every integer is ι(λ) for some λ.
and proper subsets.2. And let n. n) − (g(∆1 (y)) − g(∆2 (y))) since Qλ is charmed iﬀ Aλ is charmed and g preserves boolean relations iﬀ A g(x) ∼ g(y) ˆ iﬀ A g(x) ∼ g(y) d. Let nc(z. below. unions. c. be the least k such that x and y are both unions of node sets of depth k. n) − (∆1 (y) − ∆2 (y)) iﬀ nc(g(x). Qf x ⊆ y iﬀ ∀λ(qλ ⊂ x → qλ ⊂ y) iﬀ ∀λ(aλ ⊆ g(x) → aλ ⊆ g(y)) ˆ iﬀ A g(x) ⊆ g(y) (by 5.2. INDISC∼ ˆ since A ⊆ A . Qf x ∼ y iﬀ θf (x) = θf (y) iﬀ nc(x. of Q into A is an isomorphism ˆ of Qf onto A.78 c. n) − (∆1 (x) − ∆2 (x)) = nc(y.16) b.2. relative complements.24) (by 5. COMPLETENESS OF CA Theorem 5. I.26. 5. As in (a). g can be shown to preserve ∅. n) − (g(∆1 (x)) − g(∆2 (x))) = nc(g(y). g. Qf x < y iﬀ Qf iﬀ A iﬀ A ˆ iﬀ A x∼x ⊂y for some x ∈ Q g(x) ∼ g(x ) ⊂ g(y) g(x) < g(y) g(x) < g(y) since A ˆ since A ⊆ A since Qf REP< by (b) and (c) SUBSET. a. n) be the number of charmed node sets of level n contained in C(z). Proof. The nodal embedding. Obvious. intersections.
z) iﬀ Qf (x ∪ y = z ∧x∼x ∧y ∼y ∧ x ∩ y = ∅) ˆ iﬀ A (g(x ) ∪ g(y ) = g(z) ∧ g(x) ∼ g(x ) ∧ g(y) ∼ g(y ) ∧ g(x ) ∩ g(y ) = ∅) iﬀ A (g(x ) ∪ g(y ) = g(z) ∧ g(x) ∼ g(x ) ∧ g(y) ∼ g(y ) ∧ g(x ) ∩ g(y ) = ∅) iﬀ A ˆ iﬀ A Sum(g(x). It T is a completion of CAI. Proof. and has a prime model.3. T would be inconsistent. then CAIf has a prime model. SUMMARY e.i for exactly one i. then T ≡ CAIf . . .3. CAIf is consistent because f is congruous.3 Summary We can now draw our ﬁnal conclusions about CA.i for each such i.27.3. 0 ≤ i < n.n−1 ). ∧ ¬MODn. g(z)) Sum(g(x).6. each model of CAIf has a submodel isomorphic to Qf . Since CAIf is model complete.5. by 5. for some congruous f .12c. by 3.j (see Lemma 3.2.i → ¬MODn. Qf Sum(x. Hence T MODn. by 5. Proof. congruous remainder function.3) applies. and their completions.i and T MODn. for CA MODn.i or T ¬MODn.11). Corollary 5. 0 ≤ i < n: Since T is complete. If f is a total. So CAIf is complete. But if T (¬MODn. then T is inconsistent. and we may conclude: Corollary 5.0 ∧ . Fact C. Theorem 5. For each n > 0.j where 0 ≤ i = j < n. But suppose T MODn. Again.3.3. the prime model test (Appendix. g(z)) since Qf 79 DEF+ by (b) and (c) since A DEF+ ˆ since A ⊆ A So.1. CS. g(y).27. If f is total and congruous.i for at least one one i.2. T MODn.2. y.1. g(y). 5. . then CAIf is consistent and complete. T MODn. since T CAI and CAI DIVn .
80 So. a. b. For n > 0.3.13. By Lindenbaum’s lemma.2 and 3. To determine whether CS φ.3.m .3. Corollary 5. But An is a ﬁnite model. φ is consistent and T has only inﬁnite models.3. b. But CAIf is complete. There are 2ω remainder functions whose domain is the set of prime numbers. CA ≡ CS Proof. Each such function is congruous. (⇐)To calculate f (n). EXACTLYn φ iﬀ An φ. For total f .3. so each corresponds to a consistent extension of CSI. a. given that CS CA. a. let f (n) = m iﬀ T complete. each of these extensions has a consistent and complete extension.4. b. b.3. CSI has 2ω completions. b. b. . Then T CAIf and. Theorem 5. a.2b. φ. Every completion of CA is consistent with CS. There is no sentence. CS. so it is decidable. alternate between generating theorems of CA and testing whether An ¬φ.5. then CAIf is recursively enumerable. CSIf is decidable iﬀ f is decidable.3. Corollary 5. (⇒)If f is decidable. Theorem 5. Proof. COMPLETENESS OF CA MODn. since CAIf is a. Follows from (a) and 3. CS is decidable. EXACTLYn is decidable. determine which MODn. Follows from 5. CAIf T .m sentence is in CSIf . 5. CS. a. such that T = CA.3. Proof.6.
But by (3). But CA ≡ CS. so ¬φ ∈ CS. φ is inconsistent. A φ CS. (BASIC ∪ T ) φ for some ﬁnite set of ADIVn principles. So CA φ and. Let A be a model with domain k∈K Qk . CS is not ﬁnitely axiomatizable. Theorem 5. Let K = { n  every prime factor of n is a member of J }. deﬁned in 3.5.2. We claim the following without proof: (1) (2) (3) By (1) and (2). Hence (BASIC ∪ T ).3. Suppose CS φ.26. so A . T = { ADIVn  n ∈ J }. A A A BASIC ADIVj for all j ∈ J ADIVk φ. SUMMARY 81 Proof. If φ is true only in inﬁnite models of CA. then ¬φ is true in all ﬁnite models of CA.7. θ. A CS. Proof. by compactness.3. in which size relations are determined in accordance with the size function. so CA.
COMPLETENESS OF CA .82 5.
An ordering of P(N) that satisﬁes CS will not necessarily appear reasonable. So CS . in section 1. 6. OUTPACING mentions the natural ordering of N and applies only to subsets of N.13). In this chapter we will show that CS has inﬁnite standard models over P(N). some such orderings say that there are fewer even numbers than prime numbers (see below 6. We extrapolate from well understood ﬁnite cases to puzzling inﬁnite cases. x outpaces y just in case the restriction of x to any suﬃciently large initial segment of N is larger than the corresponding restriction of y. OUTPACING does not ﬁx the size relations over P(N). We employ this notion to state a suﬃcient condition for one set of natural numbers to be larger than another: OUTPACING.1.6 Sets of Natural Numbers CS has standard ﬁnite models since it consists of sentences true in all such models. then x > y. that is. x and y will range over P(N). It has inﬁnite models Qn and Qf .1. For example.2. Section 2 establishes that OUTPACING can be satisﬁed jointly with any consistent extension of CS in a model whose domain is P(N). If x outpaces y. OUTPACING. The general motivation behind this principle should be familiar.1 The outpacing principle Throughout this chapter. But we should also 83 . we introduce a principle. Deﬁnition 6. To rule out such anomalies. iﬀ: ∃n∀m(m > n → x[m]  > y [m] ) Notice that the size comparison between the two restricted sets will always agree with the comparison of their normal cardinalities since all initial segments of N are ﬁnite.
Deﬁnition 6. strengthen the conditional to a biconditional. If k > 4. then (k − 1)/2 > k/3 + 1 . then x > y. given any ﬁnite subset z of N. Though (2) is true. and A OUTPACING There is a slight diﬃculty in saying that an interpretation of LC< satisﬁes OUTPACING . . Every outpacing model satisﬁes the following a. . [2n] > [3n] b. The best we can do is propose plausible theories.1. . again. This revised principle conﬂicts with CS. its antecedent is only satisﬁed when y ⊂ x. . and see how far they go. [3n] > [4n] > [5n] > . So. . for outpacing is not a quasilinear ordering. c. We shall ﬁnesse this problem by regarding OUTPACING as the (very large) set of sentences { b < a  a outpaces b } Fact 6. [2n] has at least (k − 1)/2 members less than or equal to k for any given k.1. neither [2n] nor [2n + 1] outpaces the other since each initial segment {0. x restricted to z is larger than y restricted to z.1. it cannot be expressed in LC< . It is doubtful whether there is any mechanical way to decide which of these statements are true. 2n + 1} of N contains n evens and n odds. Others are too weak to be helpful. there are many statements that assert of inﬁnite cases what is true of ﬁnite cases. For example. mechanical way without risking contradiction. since [2n] outpaces [2n + 2] while [2n + 1] does not. If k > 0. for example. There is another point that underlines the need for care in extrapolating from ﬁnite cases to inﬁnite cases: we cannot just use (2): (2) If. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS emphasize. Since OUTPACING involves the < relation over N. Some of these conﬂict with one another. We cannot. that this extrapolation cannot be done in any straightforward. then [kn] > n2 Proof.84 6. A is an outpacing model iﬀ ˙ A = P(N) A BASIC. a. [3n] has at most k/3 + 1 such members. But the two are discernible under outpacing. determine whether they are consistent.0. . thus: (1) x > y iﬀ x outpaces y.
Fact 6. So there is no y such that [2n] ∼ y ⊂ [2n + 1]. N[m] will have more members in [kn] than in n2 . The two alternatives left open in 6. Aj is an alternating pair. In section 6. x. there is a y such that y ∼ [2n] and y ⊂ [2n + 1]. then [2n + 1] ∼ [2n + 2]. Fact 6. it is suﬃcient to show that ¬ [2n] < [2n + 1]. a. By TRICH. Let k be the least odd number not in y. Note that [2n] = [2n + 2] ∪ {0} and that BASIC (*) (*). If 0 ≤ i < j < k. Deﬁnition 6. we generalize 6. b. For m > k(k + 1). y is an alternating pair iﬀ x and y are inﬁnite and for all i > 0.2. If it were. by REP< . 85 c.4.1. THE OUTPACING PRINCIPLE b.2 applies here since the only facts about [2n] and [2n + 1] used hold by virtue of these sets forming an alternating pair.1. Then: a. then Ai .1.2 to similar cases.1.3. But any proper subset of [2n + 1] is outpaced by.1.5. If [2n] > [2n + 1]. Then [2n] leads y at k + 1 and y never catches up. then. we show that both of these possibilities can be realized in standard models over P(N). including other congruence classes. (y ⊂ x ∧ z ≤ y ∧ Atom(z ) ∧ z ⊂ x ∧ x = z ∪ z ) → y ∼ z Let x = [2n]. z = [2n + 2] and apply (*). then N is odd. c. Every outpacing model satisﬁes the following a. and hence smaller than [2n]. Similar to that of (1). if [2n + 1] ∼ [2n + 2]. Proof.1. then N is even. . If x. The argument for 6.2.1. y is an alternating pair. y = [2n + 1]. If m = k 2 .2 correspond to the possibilities that N may be odd or even: if [2n] ∼ [2n + 1]. Here. For a given k > 0. [2n] ≥ [2n + 1] b. Theorem 6.6. Similar to (1). xi < yi < xi+1 . then in any outpacing model: x ∼ y ∨ x > y ∼ (x − x1 ) Proof. both [kn] and n2 have exactly k members less than m. let Ai = [kn + i] for each i < k.1. [2n + 1] ≥ [2n + 2] c.
then A0 ∼ Ap ∪ {0}. b. 0 < p ≤ k such that (i) If i < j < p. b. 3. An is the standard ﬁnite interpretation of LN over P(N[n] ) in which: An (a) = a ∩ N[n] = a[n] for each a ⊆ N. a. Example. let p = k. If A0 > Ai for some i.1. LN . 2. Then one of the following situations obtains: A0 A0 A0 A0 ∼ A1 > A1 ∼ A1 ∼ A1 ∼ A2 ∼ A2 > A2 ∼ A2 ∼ A3 ∼ A3 ∼ A3 > A3 > [4n + 4] ∼ [4n + 4] ∼ [4n + 4] ∼ [4n + 4] 6. (i) follows by TRANS∼ . Proof. let p be the least such i. we construct models of CS over P(N) that satisfy OUTPACING. a. So Ai ∼ Ap . Let k = 4. So A0 > Ai . is the ﬁrst order language which results from adding to LC< . then Ai ∼ Aj .4 since A0 . Ai (n + 1) = kn + i + k and i < j < k + i. . Ap is an alternating pair and A0 > Ap . So either A0 > Ai or A0 ∼ Ai by 6. so A0 ∼ Ai .2.1. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS (ii) If p = k. (iii) A0 > Ap ≥ Ai if i ≥ p. 1. Ai is an alternating pair. as individual constants.86 b.Aj (n) = kn + j. Deﬁnition 6.1. There is a p. 6. (See example below). (ii) Immediate from 6. (iii) If p ≤ i < k. the language of subsets of N. A0 . (i) For 0 ≤ i < p. a name for each subset of N. so Ai = [4n + i] for i = 0. Ai (n) = kn + i. though the application here demands some important diﬀerences. otherwise. But A0 ≤ Ai by the selection of p. Hence Ai ∼ A0 − {0} ∼ Ap . then Ai ∼ Ap .2 Models of CS and Outpacing In this section.4. Outpacing models will be constructed out of ﬁnite models of CS by a technique which is very much like the ultraproduct construction common in model theory.
[Monk.18. then a. If τ is a term of LN . over X is principal iﬀ there is some x ∈ F such that F = { a ⊆ X  x ∈ a } Fact 6. p318] If X is a set and F ⊆ P(X). then either Y ∈ F or (X − Y ) ∈ F . b. then AF is an outpacing model. then there is an ultraﬁlter over X which includes F . p. and (iii) If a ∈ F and b ∈ F . c. Def.3. and similarly for other predicates. then b ∈ F . p. If F is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter over N. then Ak (τ ) = AF (τ ) ∩ Ak = AF (τ ) [k] .2.3. Deﬁnition 6. then AF is the interpretation of LC< in which a.5.6.2.15. AF a < b iﬀ k  a[k] < b[k] ∈ F . A˙F = P(N). An ultraﬁlter.4. F has the ﬁnite intersection property iﬀ the intersection of any ﬁnite subset of F is nonempty.2. then a ∩ b ∈ F c. and (iii) if Y ⊆ X. b. d. lemma 1. Theorem 6.319] d.2.2. If F ⊆ P(X) and F has the ﬁnite intersection property. Ch. If F is an ultraﬁlter over N.6. 18. If Y ⊆ X and Y is inﬁnite. Our main result is that if F is nonprincipal. Boolean symbols receive the usual interpretation. [Monk. A nonprincipal ultraﬁlter over X contains all coﬁnite subsets of X. F is a ﬁlter over X iﬀ (i) F = ∅ (ii) If a ∈ F and a ⊆ b. Prop. A nonprincipal ultraﬁlter contains no ﬁnite sets. F . [Bell. 18. MODELS OF CS AND OUTPACING 87 Deﬁnition 6. (cf.108] b. then a. F is an ultraﬁlter over X iﬀ (i) F is a ﬁlter over X (ii) X ∈ F .2. then there is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter over X which contains Y . c. a.
. b.88 6. But. clearly a = b. then there is a k ∈ b but not ∈ a. so a ⊂ b. then AF φ iﬀ { k  Ak φ} ∈ F φ for every k. then AF φ iﬀ a ⊂ b If a ⊂ b. If φ is a quantiﬁer free formula of LN . in F . then AF φ iﬀ a = b iﬀ a[n] = b[n] for all n. AF f. otherwise a[n] would not be included in b[n] for any n greater than k. If φ is a universal formula of LN and Ak AF φ. By induction on the structure of τ : REP< . iﬀ { n  An a = b } = N iﬀ { n  An a = b } ∈ F since if An (iii) AF a = b and k > n. AF e.4b. for every n. Immediate from 6. Ak (τ ) = Ak (τ1 ) ∪ Ak (τ2 ) = (AF (τ1 ) ∩ Ak ) ∪ (AF (τ2 ) ∩ Ak ) = (AF (τ1 ) ∪ AF (τ2 )) ∩ Ak = AF (τ1 ∪ τ2 ) ∩ Ak The proofs for intersections and relative complements are similar. By induction on the structure of φ: (i) If φ = a ⊂ b . then c. Conversely. a[n] ⊂ b[n] .3b. then Ak a = b. by 4. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS b. (i) If τ is a constant.2. (ii) If τ = τ1 ∪ τ2 .1b. So Ak (τ ) = a[n] by 6. So. { n  AF φ } is coﬁnite and. Hence. if n  a[n] ⊂ b[n] ∈ F . there cannot be a k in a but not in b. a. AF Proof. τ = a for some a ⊂ N.2. BASIC. So a ⊆ b. then it is inﬁnite. (ii) If φ = a = b .2. ADIVn . a < b iﬀ { k  Ak (a < b) } ∈ F . So if n > k. d.
5).1.2. in the manner of the congruence classes modulo n (see Theorem 6. if F . Let a0 = ∅ ai+1 = ai ∪ the n greatest members of b[ki+1 ] not in ai . for all a. Claim: If k ∈ K. then a [k] ∼ a[k] . (AF ATOM because it contains all singletons of natural numbers. Suppose then So So So d. these form an alternating ntuple. K ∈ F . (a ∼ a ) = {k1 .5.1. . .6. thus. e.) f. The n sets. where n = a[ki+1 ]  − ai  a = ai Then a ⊂ b since each ai draws its new members from b. for which AF k  a[k] < b[k] so. these sets are approximately equal in size and AF ADIVn (x). xi . for all a ∀xφ(x) by (b) (a < b). together with ATOM and REP< . . Furthermore. Suppose AF as follows: Let K = Ak Ak Ak AF AF ∀xφ(x). . MODELS OF CS AND OUTPACING (iv) If φ is nonatomic. for all k. partition x. As in 6. . for all a φ(a). let xi = { xkn+i−1  k ∈ N }. For 0 < i ≤ n. for all k φ(a). Hence: AF a ∼ a since they are the same size over some set which contains K and is. . . for all k φ(a). ki . x an inﬁnite subset of N. since F is an ultraﬁlter: AF φ1 ∧ φ2 iﬀ AF φ1 and AF φ2 iﬀ { k  Ak φ1 } ∈ F and { k  Ak iﬀ { k  Ak φ1 ∧ φ2 } ∈ F AF ¬φ iﬀ AF φ iﬀ { k  Ak iﬀ { k  Ak 89 φ2 } ∈ F φ} ∈ F / ¬φ } ∈ F c. a subset of b. Immediate from (c) and (d): BASIC is equivalent to a set of universal sentences. then. .} where the ki ’s are in strictly increasing order. Construct a .
but only a submodel. Consider a familiar example: Let a = [2n + 1] and b = [2n].e. we can immediately conclude that Ai /F satisﬁes CS. The model so constructed. Immediate from (a) and 5. CAI. Then a[k] < b[k] iﬀ k ∈ [2n]. Otherwise. If F is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter over N. and the completeness proof of the last chapter allowed us to infer that all formulas true in all of the factors are true in the model AF . In the usual construction(see. had we constructed the reduced ultraproduct. So. These functions are then gathered into equivalence classes (by virtue of agreeing almost everywhere. which results in a domain whose elements are functions from the index set (N. For a given F . then a. [2n + 1] ∈ F .6 is modeled on the usual ultraproduct construction. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS Corollary 6. which we’ll call Ai /F . and CSI The proof of 6.6. given that each of the Ak satisﬁes CS. [Bell.3. pp. Immediate from 6. for example. here) to elements of the factors. AF Proof.3b. so it may or may not be in F . Ai /F is not the model we wanted: its elements are not subsets of N. a natural mapping from subsets of N to such elements.2. these special means were available. Unfortunately.5e and 6. but equivalence classes of functions from N to ﬁnite subsets of N. This will happen whenever k  a[k] < b[k] ∈ F but is not coﬁnite.2. a model is built by ﬁrst taking the product of all factors (in this case. a. on some member of the ﬁlter) and the reduced ultraproduct is deﬁned by interpreting the language over these equivalence classes. there will always be one more even and if we count up to some odd number. there will always be the same number of evens and odds. There is. [2n] is neither ﬁnite nor coﬁnite. the Ak ). Fortunately. has the handy property that it satisﬁes any formula which is satisﬁed by almost all factors.2. we would have then been able to infer that the part of that model which held our interest satisﬁed all universal formulas of CS. . the only nonuniversal axioms of CAI could be veriﬁed in the constructed model more or less directly. This is handy because. so AF [2n + 1] ∼ [2n]. indeed. for if we count the even numbers and the odd numbers up to some even number. b. AF [2n + 1] < [2n]. AF b. 8792]). we still would have had to resort to special means to show that the nonuniversal formulas were likewise satisﬁed.90 6. after all.5f. but is not quite the same. there will be many cases where AF a < b even though b does not outpace a. and certainly any formula which is satisﬁed in all the factors. i.2. and this mapping would have allowed us to identify a model over P(N) as a submodel of Ai /F . If [2n] ∈ F .
) So. there is a set of decisions that must be made in constructing an outpacing model. If x is inﬁnite.2. losing it only at the least n for which n ∈ x (since (n − 1) ∈ x. can sometimes be an alternating pair. x1. then a. suggests that there are many outpacing models unless diﬀerent ultraﬁlters can yield the same model. x1 (n) is the ﬁrst element in the nth run of x and x2 (n) is the ﬁrst element after the nth run of x. b. a. x. MODELS OF CS AND OUTPACING 91 The construction of a model AF from any nonprincipal ultraﬁlter.  iﬀ n ∈ x [n] Informally: x[n] ﬁrst becomes greater than x+ for n = x(1). while N−[10n + 1] has only 9membered runs. c.2. x+ are like alternating pairs in the following way: Lemma 6.2. x2 is an alternating pair.2. Furthermore. then AF1 = AF2 . each decision is made for a model AF by the presence or absence of a particular set in F . This pattern repeats during successive runs of x.) To show this. F . personalized contribution to the model AF . Theorem 6. pairs x. each decision may go either way. We need only prove (*): (*) x[n]  > x+ [n] x ∼ x+ or A x > x+ ∼ x − {x1 } x > x+ iﬀ x ∈ F . but this is not always the case. and A = AF .10. x+ is an alternating pair iﬀ x is inﬁnite and there is no n ∈ x such that (n + 1) ∈ x. no two consecutive numbers are in x. we will show that the presence of a set in an ultraﬁlter makes a direct. Proof.9. so / n ∈ x+ ). We will ﬁrst show that this qualiﬁcation is not needed. A c. yields x or x+ . x.6. x+ . Throughout the ﬁrst run of x. Let a run of x be a maximal consecutive subset of x. Putting this in another way. Deﬁnition 6. That is.8. We know from (a) that x2 ∼ x1 or x2 ∼ x1 − x1 (1). x maintains its lead. then x+ = { i + 1  i ∈ x }. A pair of sets. A Proof. If F1 and F2 are distinct nonprincipal ultraﬁlters over N. Nevertheless. since x(1) ∈ / x+ because ¬(x1 − x1 (1) ⊂ x).7. F is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter. x2 = (x+ − x). x1 = (x − x+ ).2. But the disjoint union of x ∩ x+ with x1 or x2 . respectively. (See below. So (b) follows from DISJ∪ . b. If x ⊆ N. . Fact 6. (So [2n] has only 1membered runs. though the decisions are not independent of each other.
H.2.10c. By (*). such that x ∈ F1 and x ∈ F2 . Then AF x ∼ y. then there is an ultraﬁlter F . . AF MODk. x. a. J is inﬁnite. so the restriction of f to the ﬁnite domain J has inﬁnitely many solutions (see 3. such that AF (x ∼ y). of G is inﬁnite. there is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter F such that G ⊆ F . y is an alternating pair. Theorem 6. If x. Proof. Theorem 6. x − x(1) . So H = { n + 1  k ∈ J → n ≡ f (k) mod k }. But then AF x > y. By 6. If x. y is an alternating pair.7 allows us to improve upon some previous results. we can show that either of the alternatives in 6.3d. let Gk = [kn + f (k) + 1] for each k > 0. AF1 x > x+ and AF2 x ∼ x+ / Theorem 6.6.92 6. b. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS We can now prove our main result.8a).10b can obtained for any alternating pair. by (a) there is an F such that AF y ∼ (x − x(1). Then (*) holds for each k: (*) Gk = n  An MODk. where J is some ﬁnite subset of N+ . If H is a ﬁnite subset of G.3. Without loss of generality. But f is congruous. b.2. Recall that every inﬁnite completion of CS is equivalent to CSIf for some total and congruous remainder function. Every inﬁnite completion of CS has an outpacing model. So. a. The intersection of any ﬁnite subset. Let J = k  x[k]  = y [k]  .f (k) .2. By 6.f (k) Let G = { Gk  k > 0 }. Since neither x nor y outpaces the other.7: Proof. (See 3. we can suppose there is a set.12. Proof.2. so AF CSIf . Since the intersection of any ﬁnite subset of G is inﬁnite.11. so is y. For example. then there is an ultraﬁlter F .2.2. Theorem 6.) Given such an f . let F be a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter which contains J.2. f . such that AF (x > y).2. If neither x nor y outpaces the other. then H = { Gk  k ∈ J }.
MODELS OF CS AND OUTPACING 93 On the basis of 6. (2) If FA = FB . by considering x = n2 : any ﬁnite set of congruences has inﬁnitely many solutions that are squares and inﬁnitely many that are not. both (1) and (2) are necessary. satisfy OUTPACING. (1) If A is an outpacing model. each yielding a diﬀerent outpacing model. in general. though it may be extraneous to show that OUTPACING is independent. there are only 2ω remainder functions while there are ω 22 nonprincipal ultraﬁlters over N[Bell. At most one of them is obtainable by our construction. Lemma 6. we will do so. There are standard models of CS over P(N) which do not satisfy OUTPACING. Finally. then x > y. If x outpaces y. Ch.6. First.4.5 for the relative sizes of the kcongruence classes are obtainable in outpacing models. But even if (1) is true. we could produce standard models of CS over P(N) which satisfy OUTPACING and these will not.2. so whether x ∈ F is an independent choice. but it should not. So (1) and (2) are open problems.2. This would be true only if ﬁxing the congruence classes determined whether x ∼ x+ or x > x+ for every x ⊆ N . This section has explored the existence and variety of outpacing models. Proof. .1. x+ but disagree elsewhere. it is not clear whether every outpacing model can be obtained by the construction of 6.2. Three comments are in order before we turn to the common structure of outpacing models.13. there is no unique outpacing model which satisﬁes T . Theorem 1. 6. two outpacing models may agree about all pairs x. perhaps. More speciﬁcally.2.5].11 we noted that there are even and odd outpacing models. is AF for FA = { x  A x > x+ }. That all such choices are not determined by a remainder theory can be seen intuitively. then clearly A = AF .2. To establish that A = AF . we can now extend that observation to moduli other than 2. If (1) is false. then A = B I have not been able to prove (1) or (2).4. all of the possibilities listed in 6.10c may suggest that any outpacing model. Theorem 6. Suppose that is a linear ordering under which N forms an ωsequence. Modifying 6. Then we could deﬁne x outpaces y as follows: ∃n∀m[n m → {k  k ∈ x ∧ k m} > {k  k ∈ x ∧ k n } ] and deﬁne the principle: OUTPACING . even it T is an inﬁnite completion of CS. then FA is a nonprincipal ultraﬁlter.2. Second. Also. A.
If x is ﬁnite. otherwise. 6. iﬀ x has a density in y. Since they often want to compare inﬁnite subsets of N. x diverges iﬀ x diverges in N.2. iﬀ x converges in N. e. d.3 Size and density When number theorists talk about the sizes of sets of natural numbers. a. if it exists of i=y1 [i] lim xi /ˆi ˆ y ω That is. cvg(x. One notion they use is asymptotic density. y).94 Suppose. In this section. If x ⊆ y = ∅. y). x diverges in y. pk . .3. cvg(x). of x[n]  as n grows. then x converges in y. the density of x in y. . so p > [2n] and OUTPACING is false in OUTPACING models. . the asymptotic density of [2n] is 1/2. . Fact 6. qk . ρ(x. . . b. is the density of of x in N. . If x ⊆ y = ∅. Deﬁnition 6. p and q will be nearly the same size. From now on we shall use the term ‘density’ for asymptotic density. if x has a density in N. . x converges. But the evens are much smaller than q. of natural numbers is the limit. y) = r iﬀ ∀(δ > 0)∃n(∀i > n)(r − δ < xi ˆ < r + δ))) yi ˆ c.1. q1 . SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS is the ordering: p1 . The asymptotic density of a set. a. In any model of OUTPACING . they do not content themselves with speaking of the (Cantorian) cardinalities of these sets. they need a more discriminating notion. then ρ(x. The density of x. for example. the fraction of numbers less than or equal to i that are ˆ members of x. For example. x. if there is one. as the evens and the odds are in normal outpacing models.3. we compare the ordering of P(N) given by density to the orderings given by CS and OUTPACING. ρ(x) = 0. that 6. where p is the set of prime numbers and q is its complement. is the limit. ρ(x). xi = xi  .
3. b. Construct the set x as follows: x0 = ∅ xi .999. If x is coﬁnite. x= xi if xi ≥ r.3. 95 a. between 10. z). If 0 ≤ r ≤ 1. there is a set with density r in y. So x contains all numbers between 0 and 9. c. ρ(x) = 1. Proof. z) = ρ(x. if . Fact 6. then x10 ≤ . ˆ ˆ If n > 1. z) and ρ(x. Modify the construction for (b) in the obvious ways. between 100 and 999. ρ(x. z) < ρ(y. There are divergent sets. z).4. Then. then cvg(x.1 and x10 ˆ b. y outpaces x. xi . Suppose that both x and y converge in z. a. SIZE AND DENSITY b. Let x = i  ∃n(102n ≤ i < 102n+1 . ˆ otherwise.3. y)ρ(y. If 0 ≤ r ≤ 1 and y is inﬁnite. i + 1. and so forth. So xk cannot have a limit. z). c.000 and 99.3. ρ([2n]) = 1/2 ρ([4n] . there is a set with density r. Suppose r is given. [2n]) = 1/2 ρ([4n]) = 1/4 d. 2n+1 2n ≥ . y) and cvg(y. xi+1 = c. If cvg(x.9.6. Theorem 6.
3. N) = ρ(y. where ρ(y. z) − b.3. z2 ): Let z1 be the set of primes. z1 ) < ρ(y. If A is an outpacing model. and b. z1 ).6.5. Let x be an inﬁnite set with density r. So.4 implies that in any outpacing model. ρ(x. we can begin to appreciate how precise an ordering outpacing models provide: Fact 6. there are uncountably many sizes of sets in A. y outpaces x. then x outpaces y.3. Theorem 6. z) + b < ρ(y. N) = 0. xi /ˆi < ρ(x. from Facts 6. z1 ). b.b and (c). as in Theorem 6. let y be an inﬁnite subset of x. z) − b ˆ z ρ(x. Let Let and let So we have and But So So So b = (ρ(y. But if ρ(x. Theorem 6. x) = 0. z))/3 6.3.5 to say that ρ(x. So. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS n1 = the least n such that for i > n. but ρ(x.3. z2 ) ≤ ρ(y. Immediate from Fact 6.4. x) = 0. though ρ(y1 . If ρ(x. for any y1 ⊂ y. and let z = x − y. z2 ) < ρ(y. z) < b ˆ z for any i > n1 + n2 . z2 ).3.3. and both x and y converge in z2 . z1 ) = 2/3. and let y be z1 − x. z1 ) < ρ(y. z2 ) > ρ(y. xi /ˆi < y i /ˆi ˆ z ˆ z xi < y i ˆ ˆ x[i]  < y [i]  We can use the relation between density and outpacing to draw conclusions about densities that have nothing to do with outpacing. then even among sets with density r. Proof. z) < b ˆ z n2 = the least n such that for i > n. . z2 ). There are uncountably many subsets of y with distinct densities in y. then ρ(x. there are uncountably many sizes in A. if 0 ≤ r ≤ 1.3. Even if two sets have the same density. − b < xi /ˆi − ρ(x. Then ρ(x. Since ρ(x.3b and Theorem 6. a. z) − ρ(x. z2 ) Proof. let x contain every third member of z1 . z1 ) = 1/3 and ρ(y. they will diﬀer in size if they have the same density in some common set. − b < y i /ˆi − ρ(y. then a. We cannot strengthen the consequent of 6.5. sets with distinct densities will have distinct sizes.96 Proof. z2 ) ≤ ρ(y. z) + b ˆ z y i /ˆi > ρ(y.
if r < r2 . so A z ∪ y1 < z ∪ y2 . For if y converges. If x ∼ y and ρ(x) = r and cvg(y). Recalling that sets may have the same density even though they diﬀer in size. we’ll discuss the consistency of an aﬃrmative answer.4 insures that (1) just in case (2).) Now. we may consider two additional formulations: (3) If ρ(x) = ρ(y) and x < z < y. then x < y and if r > r2 . second. we’ll explain why this is called the convexity problem. 97 y1 < y2 . We can regard the cardinality of a set in P(N) as determined by its size. so r2 = r. cardinality is a function of size. We shall express this fact by saying that. then ρ(y) = r.3. at least when we focus on P(N).3.3. But the situation is really not so clear. Theorem 6. First. y2 ⊂ y. any such ordering which is realized in an outpacing model) is both a reﬁnement and a completion of the ordering suggested by density: a reﬁnement because it preserves all diﬀerences in size which are captured by the notion of density. rather. Then A by 6. 6. we want to know whether the density of a set is a function of its size. then ρ(z) = ρ(x) .3. then x > y. a completion because all sets are located in a single. Consider (1) and (1a): (1) (1a) If x ∼ y and ρ(x) = r. linear ordering of sizes. while an aﬃrmative answer may or may not be consistent.4. (It is not at all clear that this is true in any power set. by DISJ∪ . we will give a more precise formulation of this problem. In passing. then ρ(y) = r. though two sets with the same cardinal number may have diﬀerent sizes. and ρ(y1 ) < ρ(y2 ). SIZE AND DENSITY Suppose now that y1 ⊂ y. But ρ(z ∪ y1 ) = ρ(z ∪ y2 ) = ρ(x).3. there is some r2 = ρ(y).4. since z was obtained by removing from x a set with density 0 relative to x.6. ﬁnally. (1a) is an immediate consequence of Theorem 6. But x ∼ y. It turns out that a negative answer is compatible with our theory (CS and OUTPACING). then y converges. So. we will show that a negative answer is consistent. It is evident that the size ordering over P(N) in any outpacing is a reﬁnement of the ordering by cardinality: if x has a smaller cardinal number than y. then x is smaller than y. the questionable part of (1) can be expressed as (2): (2) If x ∼ y and x converges. though diﬀerent sizes may yield the same cardinal number.1 The Convexity Problem It’s tempting to infer from these results that the extremely ﬁne ordering of sets by size (or.
x ∼ x . x1 and x2 such that ρ(x1 ) = ρ(x2 ) = r = ρ(x) and x1 < y < x2 Assuming that x = ∅ and x = N. by SUBSET. ⇒ Suppose that x < y < z and ρ(x) = ρ(z). ρ(y) = r. we need to ﬁnd two sets. By REP< . (3) and (4) are equivalent for the same reasons that (1) and (2) are equivalent. for some b ∈ x. so ρ(y) = ρ(x) To apply (3). there are two sets. let x1 = x − a. by INDISC∼ . for which x ⊂ y ⊂ z.7. x and y .98 (4) 6. / Then x1 < x < x2 . An outpacing model satisﬁes (1) iﬀ it satisﬁes (3). If x = ∅ or x = N. Since and then So and But So So x∼x ρ(x) = ρ(z) ρ(x ) = ρ(z) ρ(z − x ) = 0 ρ(z − y ) = 0 y = z − (z − y ) ρ(y ) = ρ(z) ρ(y) = ρ(z) by (1) by (1) ⇐ Suppose that x ∼ y and ρ(x) = r. then z converges.3. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS If ρ(x) = ρ(y) and x < z < y. Proof. for some a ∈ x and x2 = x ∪ b. ρ(x1 ) = ρ(x) = ρ(x2 ) So. y ∼ y . Since adding or removing a single element has no eﬀect on the density of a set. and x1 < y < x2 . . by (3). Fact 6. then y = x.
so K is a member of some nonprincipal ultraﬁlter. any point between them (ie on the line segment from one to the other) is also in the ﬁgure. Let x be a set with density r and let y be a divergent set which neither outpaces nor is outpaced by x. F .6.3. Proof. The negation of (1) is satisﬁed in some outpacing model. We regret that the only thing we know about (3) is that it may be false: Theorem 6.8. SIZE AND DENSITY 99 The question at hand is called the ‘convexity problem’ because of the formulation in (3). (2) and (4) say the same thing. Let K be n  x[n] = y [n] K is inﬁnite. (3) says that the class of sets having a given density is convex. (1).3. a ﬁgure is convex if.3. . AF so (1) is false in AF .3. Applying this notion in the obvious way to the size ordering. By theorems 6. In geometry. given any two points in the ﬁgure. Open Problem: Is (1) consistent with CS and OUTPACING? x ∼ y.4 and 6.7.
100 6. SETS OF NATURAL NUMBERS .
maps natural numbers into sentences (see 3. φ . The arguments of such functions are indicated by subscripts.5].. or function symbols.Appendix A A.. A ﬁrst order language is determined by its nonlogical constant symbols. DIVn .. A schematic function is a function whose range is a set of formulae. for example..1 Notation Predicate Logic The formal theories discussed in this thesis are theories with standard formalization. These may be predicates.. p.2. and φ .. then if and only if identical not identical there is an x for all x Conjunctions and disjunctions of sets of sentences are represented by: φ . φ . The following notation is used for the predicate calculus: ∧ and ∨ or ¬ not → ↔ = = ∃x ∀x if .. In most cases. the ranks of the symbols will accord with their familiar uses and we do not stipulate them... individual constants.. That is. 101 . they are formalized in ﬁrst order predicate logic with identity and function symbols. in the sense of [Tarski. in the usual way.8).
. we use the following: i+j i−j ij i plus j i minus j i times j ij i to the jth power i! i factorial i  j i divides j gcd(i. we use the following notation: I the universe ∅ the empty set x ∪ y the union of x and y x ∩ y the intersection of x and y x − y the relative complement of y in x x ⊆ y x is contained in y x ⊂ y x is a proper subset of y These symbols are also used for set theoretic relations..102 APPENDIX A. j) greatest common divisor of i and j n ≡ m mod j n is congruent to m modulo j . we use the following: x ∈ y x is a member of y P(x) the power set of x { x  φ(x) } the set of x’s which are φ x. a the union of x and a x[n] N the members of x less than or equal to n the set of natural numbers: 0.3 Arithmetic For arithmetic. N+ N − 0 Z the set of integers ω the smallest inﬁnite cardinal 2ω 2 to the ω A. outside of ﬁrst order languages. In addition.2 Set Theory For ﬁrst order languages with boolean operations and predicates. . 1.
A = {Ai }. L. Deﬁnition B. T is consistent. A is isomorphic to B (A B). T proves φ (T T proves T2 (T d. {Ai } is a chain of models. T2 ). A.. e.1.. A is a submodel of B (A ⊆ B). ˙ c. The language of a theory. the union of a chain of models. We assume the notion of satisfaction as deﬁned in [Chang. T is complete. φ). c. e. a. Familiar notions about models.2.. where X is a subset of B...3] and use A φ to mean that A satisﬁes φ . g. an nary function deﬁned over and yielding values in A. . ˙ An interpretation. MODEL THEORY We use the following notation for sets of natural numbers: [.n. consists of a domain. Notions about theories: a. h. A theory is a set of ﬁrstorder sentences.) } For example: [kn + j] = the set of numbers congruent to j modulo k n2 = the set of squares of natural numbers 103 B Model Theory This section lists the modeltheoretic notions and results assumed in the text and presents our notation for these notions. and to each nargument ˙ function symbol of L.. Deﬁnition B. b.B. B is an extension of A (A ⊆ B).n. a set of ntuples over A. ˙ and a function which assigns to each individual constant of L a member of A.. d.] = { k  ∃n(k = . LT . B is an elementary extension of A. f is an isomorphic embedding of A into B. The submodel of B generated by X. b. f. section 1.. ˙ to each nplace predicate of L. A. of a ﬁrst order language.
then some ﬁnite subset of T proves φ (compactness). Deﬁnition C. Deﬁnition C. T is model complete iﬀ T is consistent and for any two models. A ⊆ B iﬀ A is an elementary submodel of B. We use only one. [Monk. There are several ways to show that a theory is complete.104 f.1. 355]. T . b. unless the theory has a prime model. then any submodel of A also satisﬁes T . then T c. Fact B. for all i > 0. If T is existential. Fairly familiar facts: a. A and B of T . and A ⊆ B. φ.3. T is categorical. φ is consistent. Deﬁnition B. If T APPENDIX φ. T is equivalent to T2 (T ≡ T2 ). then B T. none of which have universal quantiﬁers. [Monk.4. If T is universalexistential and Ai C Model Completeness This section presents the deﬁnition of model completeness and some basic results needed in Chapters 4 and 5. T is universalexistential iﬀ it is equivalent to a set of prenex sentences. The following are well known facts: a. If T is complete and T . each of which has all of its universal quantiﬁers preceding any of its existential quantiﬁers. p. φ is a primitive formula iﬀ φ is an existential formula in prenex form whose matrix is a conjunction of atomic formulas and negations of atomic formulas. A b. Fact B. c. b.359] T and A can be embedded . If T is categorical. T is universal iﬀ it is equivalent to a set of prenex sentences. c. g.5. More familiar notions: a. T . A model complete theory is not necessarily complete. Robinson’s notion of model completeness. If T is universal and A T . A is a prime model of T if A in any model of T . then {Ai } T. T is existential iﬀ it is equivalent to a set of prenex sentences. none of which have existential quantiﬁers. which is based on A.2. p. d. then T is complete.
The Aexpansion of L is the result of adding to L a constant for ˙ each element of A. If A and B are models of T . and A φ(x). If A and B are models of T . The following are equivalent [Monk. a. A ⊆ B. d. x ∈ A. If T is model complete and T has a prime model. The diagram of A is the set of atomic sentences and negations of atomic sentences of the Aexpansion of the language of A which are true in A. For every model.3. A ⊆ B. and B φ(x). then B φ(x). then A φ(x). on a theorem of Monk’s (see 4. .1a). b. 356]: a.5. T is model complete. b. which is based on some equivalent formulations of model completeness: Deﬁnition C.4. φ is a primitive formula. x ∈ A. p. To show that a theory is model complete we rely.C. of T and every Aexpansion L of L. c. Fact C.2. φ is a universal formula. MODEL COMPLETENESS 105 Fact C. then T is complete. A. the T ∪ L diagram of L is complete. directly or indirectly.
106 APPENDIX .
Bibliography [Bell] [Cantor] Bell and Slomson. Model Theory. Kurosh. H. 1971. D. Tarski. Transactions of the American Mathematical Society. 1972. 1955. 1979. Amsterdam. NorthHolland Publishing Company. Princeton University Press. Russell. Second edition. New York. George Allen and Unwin. Elementary Theory of Numbers.W. London. A Mathematical Introduction to Logic. 96(1960). J. 1903. A. and Zakon.W. Amsterdam. Undecidable Theories. The Foundations of Arithmetic. Amsterdam. 1965. New York. 1968. New York. Models and Ultraproducts. Academic Press. E. 1973. [Chang] [Dauben] [Enderton] [Frege] [Griﬃn] [Kurosh] [Monk] [Robinson] [Russell] [Tarski] 107 . Georg Cantor: His Mathematics and Philosophy of the Inﬁnite. A. 1937. Monk. Griﬃn. H. Princeton. Dover Publications. Illinois: Northwestern University Press. New Jersey. Robinson. NorthHolland Publishing Company. 1965. Pergamon Press. 1968. Lectures in General Algebra. J. Mathematical Logic SpringerVerlag. Dauben. NorthHolland Publishing Company. Cantor. Evanston. G. B. pp.G. G. New York. The Principles of Mathematics. Florida. McGrawHill. reprinted by W. Frege. Norton and Company. Orlando. Contributions to the Foundations of the Theory of Transﬁnite Numbers. Inc. A. 222236.. Enderton. Chang and Keisler. 1975. New York.
102 x y. 29 Qf . 66 α(x). 102 x. 67 Qf. 102 x. 103 B(A). 54 ZA . 1 Model Theory T φ. 103 A φ. 94 ˆ Arithmetic k  n. 102 x ∩ y. 31 ∆2 (x). 101 ∀xφ. 31 β(x). 31 ρ(x). 102 xk . 103 T1 ≡ T2 . 103 A ⊆ B. 102 [in + j]. 102 k!. 67 Qn . 25 SA . 101 ¬φ. y). 45 ˜ C(x). 31 ∆1 (x). 1 x > y. 102 x[k] . 103 108 A φ . 1 x < y. 27 QCn . 86 AF . 101 φ ↔ ψ.n . 1 x ≥ y. 55 Sizing x. 32 θ(x). 32 QC. 101 ∃xφ. 45 cvg(x. 102 Size ordering x ∼ y. 31 ρ(x. 32 θf (x). 1 x ≤ y. 21 An . 101 φ → ψ. 32 δ(x). 94 . 103 T φ. 102 P(x). 27 N. 102 x − y. y). 103 Models and Domains A. 103 ˙ A. 94 σA [x]. 101 Set Operations x ∪ y. 101 φ ∨ ψ. 87 ˆ A. 29 Qn . 73 Q.Index of Symbols Logic φ ∧ ψ. y. 45 ZA .
INDEX OF SYMBOLS cvg(x). 94 Node Construction λ. 70 λ • m. 70 ˆ A. 76 109 . 75 qλ . 70 Aλ . 75 λn . 70 aλ . 70 L(λ). 73 ι(λ).
26 BDIVn . 13 INF. 20 Timesn (x. 13 CS. 25 MONOT. 10 ASYM> . 22 BAn . 36 ASSOC. 46 ASSOC2. 24 DEF∼ .Index of Theories Languages LC . 10 Modn. 20 Divn (x) . 24 DISJ+ . 20 LC< . 23 BA. 38 CAI. 25 EVEN. 10 TRICH. 83 PCA. 36 Indisc(x. 46 PSIZE. 47 PCS. 20 L< . 16 FUNC+ .m (x). 10 IRREF< . 10 Tf . 24 BDIVJ . 10 DISJ∪ . 10 TRANS< . 13 DEF> . 16 DEF+ . 36 Theories ADIVn . 54 ASYM< . 39 CAIf . 16 ODD. 9 DEF+ . 24 SYM∼ . 26 DIVn . 16 DIVJ . 86 Predicates Abstract(x). 10 TRANS> . 23 EXCORE. 46 QUASI. 18 INDISC∼ . 40 TRANS∼ . 40 CORE. 40 SIZE. 26 CA. 13 . y).m . 39 CANTOR< . 23 BAI. 9 EXACTLYn . 20 LN . 10 ATLEASTn . y. 54 Sum(x. 21 110 CSI. y). 23 BASIC. 9 RTf . 9 OUTPACING. 20 Unit(x). 10 REF∼ . 36 Sm(x. 10 ASYMF . 46 MIN. 46 MODn. y). 23 MAX. 10 REP< . 1 Atom(x). z).
54 UNIQ+ . 51 Zgm. 51 111 .INDEX OF THEORIES UNIQ− . 54 UNIQ∼ . 46 Zg.
68 nodal embedding. 103 equivalent. 48 Monk’s Condition. 105 diverges. 75 diagram. 40 consistent. 74 abelian groups with identity. 70 extension. 87 ﬁnite set model. 104 complete. 103 isomorphic embedding. 86 language of a theory. 49 generated. 77 node. 14 ﬁnite completion. 47 ncongruence class. 70 model complete. 64 Monk mapping. 68 compactness. 20 size (L< ). 27 nquasicongruence class. 94 density. 74 Anear. 40 inﬁnite completion. 39 interpretation. 38 congruence class. 40 ﬁnite class model. 103 isomorphic. 94 elementary extension. 103 incongruous. 103 converges. 70 node atom. 104 existential. 70. 105 extends. 14 functional assumptions. 20 common nfactor. 103 charmed nfactor.m)partition. 104 existential assumption. 70 . 39 ﬁnite intersection property. 94 basis. 103 completion. 87 112 ﬁnite. 21 classes (LC ).Subject Index Aﬁnite set. 36 length. 27 Nsemigroups. 21 classes. 21 subsets of N(LN ). 27 (n. language of. 68 class size. 51 categorical. language of. 52 near. 103 ﬁlter. 104 molecule. 103 least common multiple. 85 asymptotic density. 27 congruous. 21 cancellable abelian semigroups with identity. 51 alternating pair. 104 chain. 103 language of class size (LC< ). 94 depth. 49 expansion.
103 quasicongruence class. 40 translation. 50 remainder function. 103 theory of abelian groups with identity. 91 satisfaction. 52 Zgroups. 70 node sets. 70 . 74 reducible. 84 partial. 51 simple translation. 103 universal. 45. 48 simply reducible.SUBJECT INDEX node atoms. 50 union of a chain. 87 uniformly τ reducible. 12 roughly divisible. 21 standard protomodel. 21 solution. 12 ultraﬁlter. Zg. 52 0extends. 61 prime model. 87 proves. 70. 45. 104 primitive formula. 86 τ reducible. 71 oneone correspondence. 40 remainder theory. 48 trichotomy. 66 size model. 104 universalexistential. language of. 52 total. 51 Nsemigroups. 11 quasinodal. 30. 104 principal. 40 PCA. 73 simple order. 51 Zgroups modulo I. 27 quasilogical principles. Zg. 51 113 cancellable abelian semigroups with identity. language of. 50 size. 67 submodel. 104 Zgroups. 71 node set. 103 schematic function. 40 standard ﬁnite interpretation. 103 subsets of N. 50 theory. 101 shell. 1 outpaces. 40 representation principle. 83 outpacing model. 25 run. 51 Zgroups modulo I. 21 standard interpretation. 46 size.
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
We've moved you to where you read on your other device.
Get the full title to continue reading from where you left off, or restart the preview.